Table of Contents Introduction
Views of Aristotle on Civil Relationships
Best Places to Work
Comparison with the Views of Aristotle
Introduction Aristotle was one of the Greek philosophers who contributed enormously to the field of science, politics, ethics, and philosophy. His most notable works was on laws whereby he noted that laws are trusted in any society, unlike men who can easily be corrupted by the earthly.
The law defines the relationship between the ruled and the ruler, the environment and man, and among the ruled. His works on Nicomachean ethics talks about the relationship of human beings on earth. For instance, he discusses extensively the issues touching on happiness, otherwise referred to as eudemonia, virtue, deliberation, justice, and friendship.
This paper aims at expounding on these issues, as well as giving a practical application of the ideas. Aristotle noted that civil relationships determined the success of any society. In other words, the ways in which people relate in society determine their survival. In the modern society, a debate has always ensured on regarding the best place for an individual to work.
The paper utilizes the ideas of Aristotle to shed light on this topic. The paper goes a notch high to compare the views of Aristotle on civil relationships with the contemporary notions of the best places to work.
Views of Aristotle on Civil Relationships As earlier noted, Aristotle talked about various ways in which the public could forge a working unity. Once of the ways is through ensuring eudemonia (happiness) in everything an individual does in society. This is not achieved automatically, but instead an individual should follow a certain path. The following quote shows this:
Happiness then is the best, and the nobles and the most pleasant of all goods, nor are these things distinct as said the inscription at Delos (Aristotle 21).
To Aristotle, happiness should be the ultimate goal of every individual in society. In whatever an individual does, happiness should be the ultimate goal. In this regard, happiness is a special gift that has four qualities. One of the qualities of happiness is that it does not have any evil in it. Moreover, happiness is desired for itself meaning that nothing can replace happiness in human life.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since it is desired for itself, it can only be achieved through doing good things and avoiding evil. This implies that an individual should never come up with a strategy that would affect his or her own happiness. Finally, stability is another quality of happiness implying that it does not change with time and space. An individual should not cease being happy just because he change the residence or because time.
Aristotle went ahead to distinguish various forms of happiness in human life. For him, there were at least four types of happiness in human life, including gratification, which refers to comfort and pleasure, moneymaking happiness, political happiness, philosophical happiness and educational happiness.
In this regard, Aristotle was of the view that each person has his or her own form of happiness. What makes one individual happy might the cause of discomfort to another individual.
Regarding virtue, he talked much about it in reference to what makes man happy in life. Just as happiness, virtues are also ranked. The human virtues are divided into three main parts, the reason being the first virtue. Reason is the part that is expected to govern meaning that it leads an individual in making decisions.
This implies that before an individual makes decisions, some processes are usually followed. The second part of virtues is the appetite or the sentiment part. This is the most judgmental virtue in human beings. The last part of virtue is the unresponsive part, which is compared to plants.
This type of virtue does not add much to the life of an individual since it is utilized in performing the most basic activities such as digestion. He defined virtue as the habits of the soul that enables an individual to make a decision. The following quote helps in understanding this statement better:
…..but this definition needs some modification for virtue is not merely a habit of mind concordant with prudence, but rather a habit of mind in conscious accordance with prudence (Aristotle 207)
We will write a custom Essay on Concept of Nicomachean Ethics in Philosophy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The virtue determines what is wrong and right in society. However, the virtue should only express the best thing in society and keeps off the occurrence of the negative things. Virtues are not acquired automatically through birth but instead they are acquired through practice and habituation.
In this regard, Aristotle implied that an individual could only be considered virtuous if he or she acts virtuously. This means doing the correct thing at the right time and at the right place. An individual loses virtuous and becomes vicious when he or she allows some things to rule him, such as drugs and greed.
It is noted that virtuous are very difficult to attain because people are fond of doing things that their instincts instruct them to do. People are always willing to do things that make them happy, but their human nature cannot allow them. In this regard, virtuous are acquired through the reinforcement.
This implies that parents and the society in general have a role to play in ensuring that children acquire virtues in life. The philosopher advised that people should learn to act correctly and feel correctly. This means that virtuous have a direct relationship with happiness. However, a skill is differentiated from a virtue because a skill is just a product yet a virtue is the intention of the action.
Another thing that Aristotle talked about in detail is the issue of whether the act is deliberate. Deliberation refers to the intention of the actor in any civil relationship or interaction. In this part, he talked about three types of deliberations, including voluntary, involuntary, and non-voluntary. Many scholars of sociology borrowed his works on deliberation in formulating their ideas.
To him, an action is involuntary in case it is performed under compulsion, which would definitely cause pain to the actor. Such an action includes rape and forcible sex. However, an action is considered voluntary when the actor was in full senses by the time he or she was performing the act.
An individual may perform some actions out of ignorance. Such actions are also considered involuntary because the individual could not know the effects of the act by the time he or she was acting. This means that ignorance is genuine defense in ethics, but it does not apply in the rule of law.
The case is different in case an individual does not go through any form of pain since it would be considered non-voluntary. Under deliberation, the choice is the determining factor, unlike the case virtue, which considers actions.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Concept of Nicomachean Ethics in Philosophy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In Aristotle’s view, justice can mean two things, including lawfulness, which means following the law in strict terms, and doing something fairly meaning that considering the effects of the act on others and oneself. Through the law, an individual could be virtuous because the law removes the beast nature of human beings. He also differentiated virtue from justice because justice is not equivalent to morality.
Justice pertains to the relationships of individuals in society while morality is all about doing something that is approved by the majority. An individual might do something that is approved by the majority yet it is not the legally approved.
However, another person might do something that is morally disapproved yet it is accepted legally. Just as other categories of civil relationships, justice is divide into two major sections, one of them being distributive and the other being rectificatory. As the name suggests, distributive justice deals with the distribution of resources, both capital and social.
In this case, merit is the major unit of measure because an individual receives something based on what he or she posses academically. Rectificatory justice deals with offering solutions to the unjust society. This form of justice is usually invoked to rectify the injustices that an individual could have gone through.
Finally, Aristotle shed some light on the issue related to friendship since it is the most important element of civil relationship. From his previous analysis, it is noted that human beings aim at achieving the high ends meaning that they strive to achieve happiness and end injustices. All these can only be accomplished if people coexist as friends. The following statement explains this in detail:
Moreover, friendship of the good is the only friendship which slander cannot prejudice (Aristotle 271).
Best Places to Work The great place to work involves an environment that is conducive for each employee, irrespective of gender, skin color, and history. The work place should embrace diversity meaning that people should not be judged based on their history, skin color, origin, race, or physical appearance.
However, they should be evaluated based on their ability, talent, capacity, and results. Such places should embrace equality whereby the ideas and views of each person are incorporated into the policy-making mechanisms. In this regard, the most important aspect is building trust among employees.
The top management should always respect junior officers while junior officers should emulate the behavior of the top management. The junior officers cannot emulate the behavior of senior officers in case there is mistrust. An environment that embraces trust has the chances of excelling because there would be innovation and invention.
Such an environment relies on merit for promotion of staff, designing of policies, and implementing policies. An environment that employees trust each other would probably embrace change since it is only through embracing change that an organization can move forward. For instance, technology has redefined the way organizations do business.
An organization that embraces change is in a position to acquire the market share while the one that is reluctant to embrace change will always be lagging behind in terms of development. Change means women should be allowed to ascend to senior positions of management.
In other words, transformational leadership should be embraced. This kind of leadership values consultation. A transformative leader will always ensure that he or she develops trust with junior members of the organization. This trust will go a long way into giving an organization a competitive edge in the market.
Comparison with the Views of Aristotle The ideas of Aristotle on civil relationships compares closely with the best practices at the work place. Aristotle was of the view that the idea of meritocracy should always be allowed to flourish in society. This means that the most qualified should be allowed to rule through provision of the best ideas. The best managerial practices in the contemporary world suggest that an individual should be qualified to secure an employment.
In other words, this is considered justice because the best person is expected to secure employment while those that are less qualified would fit in where they qualify. Aristotle opposed the view that democracy is the best form of governance. This is the major difference between his reasoning and that of the best managerial practice in the contemporary world.
Democracy is the worst form of governance because it gives the weak an opportunity to express his or her idea. In the contemporary society, transformational leadership is embraced as the best form of leadership in the world. Transformational leadership gives employees the freedom to be represented in policymaking.
To Aristotle, this is giving the weak in society an opportunity to rule. This is not virtuous, neither is it justice. To him, roles must be assigned based on the qualifications. The following quote proves this:
Thus then it is clear that there are more kinds of justice than one, that there is, in short, a justice particular, distinct from virtue as a whole. It remains to determine its genus and its differentia (Aristotle 88).
Works Cited Aristotle. Aristotle Nicomachean Ethics. New York: CUP Archive, 1926. Print.
Assessment of a Transformational Leader Effectiveness Term Paper college essay help online
Assessment questions to measure effectiveness of a transformational leader The individual has the capacity to become the role model for his followers (1-10 scale)
The individual has absolute trust on his followers and the followers also trust him (1-10 scale)
The person has the willingness to take risks and is consistent (1-10 scale)
The leader has a vision (1-10 scale)
The individual communicates expectations with followers and shows optimism in reaching those particular goals (1-10 scale)
The activities and behaviour of the individual inspires and motivates the colleagues (1-10 scale)
The person creates a team spirit and ensures that he works enthusiastically with the colleagues as a group (1-10 scale)
The individual stimulates the colleagues’ problem solving ability and analytic skills (1-10 scale)
The individual encourages his followers to come up with their own solutions to the common problems even if they differ with his own (1-10 scale)
The person encourages his followers to approach old issues with new methods (innovations) and creativity in order to realize great output (1-10 scale)
He does not criticize his followers’ efforts and does not pass sarcastic comments when in public (1-10 scale)
The individual keeps his ego in check and does not let it get in the way of acting in ways that are beneficial to the business or firm (1-10 scale)
He accepts the fact that different individuals have different levels of potential and only ensures that he develops higher levels of potential in the individuals (1-10 scale)
The individual can maintain a clear two-way communication in order to ensure that issues are understood properly and solutions arrived at (1-10 scale)
The individual ensures the development of his followers through delegation of tasks and only monitors and provides improvement tips to delegated tasks (1-10 scale)
The individual has the habit of making solid eye contact with his followers and stopping everything he was doing in order to focus on the employees (1-10 scale)
The person takes extra care to make sure that his followers’ needs are met (1-10 scale)
The individual promotes respect, trust and loyalty amongst the colleagues by applying proper behaviour and charismatic vision (1-10 scale)
The leader is willing to adapt to and looks for new ways of working in order to meet the needs of the ever-changing business environment (1-10 scale)
The individual has the ability to make difficult decision based on the values, vision and goals of the business or organization (1-10 scale)
Analysis Using the same instrument, the supervisor, a personal associate and I rated my leadership traits based on the model’s leadership characteristics in order to measure my tendency towards transformational leadership style. There were several similarities and differences in the individuals’ assessments.
For example, each individual who participated in the assessment procedure agreed that the individual had the capacity to become the role model for his followers. The average rating out of ten was eight. From the assessment, it is clear that the individual also has absolute trust on his followers and the followers have also earned his trust.
All the participants also rated highly the trait that suggested that the individual could maintain a clear two-way communication in order to ensure that issues were understood properly and solutions arrived at. This suggests that the individual has good communication skills and applies them in the work environment.
The results suggested that the individual had the ability to make difficult decision based on the values, vision and goals of the business or organization. This was shown by the high rating from all three participants. According to the results, the individual also came out as a leader who promotes respect, trust and loyalty amongst the followers through the application of charismatic vision.
The rating on the assessment of whether the individual avoided criticism on his followers’ efforts and avoided making sarcastic comments when in public was moderate. However, the results showed that the individual did not encourage his followers to approach old issues with new methods and with creativity. This suggests some form of rigidity and conservatism.
One of the differences was seen in the ratings of whether the individual had the willingness to take risks and ensure consistence. The self-rating was much higher than that of the supervisor and the personal associate. This result suggests that the individual does not the ability to take risks when required to.
Another difference appeared in the assessment to determine whether the individual was willing to adapt to and looks for new ways of working in order to meet the needs of the ever-changing business environment. This characteristic had a low rating and this suggests that the individual is rigid to changes in the business environment.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There were different ratings when it came to the determination of whether the individual ensured the development of his followers through delegation of tasks and by monitoring and providing improvement tips. The self-assessment indicated a high rating of eight while the rest rated it at five and three respectively.
Recommendations One way of ensuring that one qualifies as a transformational leader is by ensuring that one embraces change. The business environment is usually moving fast and not moving with the speed would impair the business’s ability to gain a competitive edge against similar businesses. Such a business also fails to meet the needs of the clients and this causes them to fail in obtaining loyal customers.
Embracing change also allows for the growth of the employees. This is mainly due to the opportunity they get to learn new skills. They would have the ability to exercise creativity that would be beneficial to the organization. A transformational leader would prepare his employees for such changes by ensuring that they receive the necessary skills (Simic, 1998).
Examples of tools that organizations can implement in their organizations as a way of embracing change include Six Sigma and the Theory of Constraints. The Six Sigma concept, for example, is a very useful tool to use in numbers-based organizations. Organizations that have embraced this tool include Motorola and General Electric.
A transformational leader should also encourage his followers to come up with their own solutions to the problems facing the organization. The leader should welcome all ideas even if they differ with his own. Such a leader would also involve the employees in matters such as goal setting. This could be done by asking the employees to help in drafting the goals.
The employees could contribute by giving their thoughts about what they think could contribute to their organization’s success. The leader can also consider some of the ways in which the employees can enhance their competencies for future positions. When the goals have been set, the leader can monitor the progress and later celebrate success when the goal have been achieved.
In looking for new ways of carrying out businesses, a transformational leader should appreciate technology and use it to add value to the organization. One of the current technologies that are being used is information technology (IT). IT has been determined to be useful in all industries including the financial institutions, industries and even grocery stores.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Assessment of a Transformational Leader Effectiveness specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Organizations that embrace the use of IT become competitive in the rapidly developing business world. A transformational leader needs to understand the importance of IT in ensuring that the organization survives in the current market. Firstly, information technology plays an important role in communication.
Many companies use the email service to facilitate communication among the employees and between the organization and its suppliers (and clients).
Other tools such as the video conferencing systems also enable the organizations to set up virtual boardrooms where they can hold meetings without necessarily being at the same venue. Information technology is also vital in data management. Data storage is made easy, effective and safe with the use of IT.
A transformational leader also needs to be able to motivate his followers since motivation is very essential. In order for employees to embrace change, they need to be motivated by the potential benefits they expect from the change. They should be convinced that the change would benefit them and the organization as a whole.
Embracing culture change requires the use of tools of learning, negotiation and persuasion. A transformational leader would persuade the individuals using a user-friendly approach. This means that the employees would be allowed to express themselves.
It would also be expected that employees could make mistakes during this transition period. Therefore, the leader should not criticize or punish the employees when they make such mistakes. Instead, they should coach and encourage them.
Since employees are different and have different levels of potential, a transformational leader would need to treat them fairly rather than equally. Treating workers fairly is beneficial to the organization since it creates stronger and better relationships between the employees and the leader. Such a relationship would be based on trust and respect.
Consequently, the turnover rate would be low since the organization would be able to retain its employees. In order for a transformational leader to be fair, he must treat every employee individually and appropriately. The leader should be able to make good judgement regarding the employees and this judgement should be based on the circumstances and contributions of the particular employee.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Assessment of a Transformational Leader Effectiveness by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As a transformational leader focuses on the needs of his followers, he creates a people-centred organization. Such organizations usually excel at recruiting good employees and keeping them committed. They also understand the need for training and empowerment of the employees in order to enable them to serve their clients effectively. Such leaders know the importance of continuous learning and embracing change.
Therefore, they encourage their employees to do the same. A transformational leader should create a people-centred organization through several ways. One of them is through treating the employees as a balance sheet asset.
The leader should also create a habit of celebrating the achievements of the employees. A transformational leader ensures that the working environment is positive in order to ensure employee satisfaction.
A transformational leader should also work towards creating a good organizational culture. This usually dictates how the employees would behave and what meanings they would attach to the actions. This usually calls for the aligning of the organization’s vision, beliefs and norms.
Teamwork culture may be achieved by having similar performance expectations. Leaders should strive to create a strong organization culture in order to ensure that the employees adjust well and respect the policies laid down (Armstrong, 2009). This ensures employee satisfaction since employees would enjoy working in such environments and taking each assignment as a lesson.
A transformational leader should also embrace diversity in the organization. This would require the recruiting of individuals from diverse backgrounds including race, age, personalities, educational background, ethnic groups, among other factors (Pielstick, 1998).
Successful organizations usually have the ability to embrace diversity. One of the benefits of having a diverse workforce is that the organization will have an increased adaptability. In the event of a problem, the employees will have a greater variety of solutions.
People from diverse background would also bring different talents and experiences on the table and this would lead to exchange of ideas. A diverse workforce also ensures the availability of a broader service range. This is to mean that the diverse abilities of the employees would ensure that the customers receive service on a global basis. Such an organization also has a more effective execution.
This is due to the fact that diversity would inspire every individual to perform at his or her best. This would in turn lead to greater productivity and greater profits. However, a transformational leader should be aware that challenges such as communication might be encountered in such an organization.
Therefore, he or she must be able to develop mechanisms to overcome such barriers. Another challenge may be encountered when employees become resistant to change. A transformational leader should also find a way of convincing and encouraging the employees to embrace such useful changes.
Teamwork is essential in the agenda of a transformational leader. It is essential to encourage employees to work as a team since this would help increase productivity, unity and organizational culture. One of the benefits of working as a team is in problem solving.
Problem-solving synergy would be achieved due to the inputs from different individuals. The pool of ideas would ensure that problems are easily solved within the shortest time possible. Teamwork also ensures that communication is made effective. Effective communication is one of the requirements within a company. Teamwork also encourages cohesion.
Consequently, this increases the level of trust among employees. Such a team is less likely to act in a confrontational manner towards each other. Instead, they would accept each other’s decisions and support each other. Teamwork also makes learning easy and enjoyable. This is due to the fact that each individual would be learning from the other.
A transformational leader is expected to act as a role model in the organization. Therefore, he is expected to show high levels of ethics in order to raise trust in his followers. For this to be achieved, leaders need to familiarize themselves with the application of the dimensions of transformational leadership (Singh, 2012).
References Armstrong, A. (2009). The ethical dimension in transformational leadership. Journal of Business Systems, Governance and Ethics, 3(3), 21-35.
Pielstick, C. (1998). The transformational leader: A meta-ethnographic analysis. Community College Review, 26(3), 15-34.
Simic, I. (1998). Transformational leadership – the key to successful management of transformational organizational changes. Economics and Organization, 1(6), 49-55.
Singh, K. (2012). Developing ethics at the workplace through transformational leadership: A study of business organization in India. Journal of Knowledge Globalization, 4(2), 1-24.
Child Development in a Bi-Racial Family Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The development of a child in a bi-racial family
Pro’s that come from growing up in Bi-Racial family
Cons that come from growing up in Bi-Racial family
Introduction Race distinguishes people based on the physical characteristics that make them appear different from each other. Race in the United States of America is more prominent in describing different people. During the slavery period race would justify the mistreatment of people who were enslaved.
The people of the United States of America thought that those who were enslaved had negative traits. The concept of race should not be ignored because there is discrimination of people based on race that need to be solved so that all of them are treated equally. Bi-racial families should teach children to have self-esteem so that self-hatred is avoided for proper functioning of the mind.
The development of a child in a bi-racial family The healthy development of a child in a bi-racial family is shaped by emotional acceptance. The mixed race people identity is unique and helped by interacting with others who do not reject them.
The healthy pathways originate from having open communication about factors that influence identity. The bi-racial children encounter challenges in their development because of self-worth. The families and caregivers should help these children understand that they are bi-racial so that they can reject historical stereotypes (Tokar, 1991).
The parents are able to prevent their children from damage of self-esteem by telling them to ignore those who talk about their race as well as skin color. The schools, families and peers tend to privilege the people with lighter skin, which lead to difficulties in accepting those from bi-racial families.
Honesty is significant when communicating about race especially when bi-racial children are involved so that they are not discriminated. The bi-racial families fail to discuss about race with clear conversation even if children are from mixed race. This creates confusion on how to interact with other children making biracial children not to value them.
Development of identity is very important for the children to grow well because the bi-racial children are many. Children develop from early childhood to adulthood where the whole process requires them to know who they are and the answer to the question is difficult to find.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There are several aspects involved in development of children in bi-racial family due to the impact of culture and history of the family. The characteristics of a person shape his or her identity and depend on mental functioning of how he or she perceives himself or herself (Cross, Vandiver
Hamilton and Jefferson Discussion Essay (Critical Writing) online essay help
To begin this study, it will be worth noting that both Alexander Hamilton and Thomas Jefferson had their individual differences in ideologies especially in the way of thinking and politically. As a result, the study was quick to reveal that there were huge differences in the programs they started when they were in government.
Their family background could have been a determining factor to each of their program considering that Jefferson came from a wealthier and aristocratic family compared to Hamilton’s family. In addition, Jefferson was once a leader of Democratic-Republican Party whereas Hamilton served under the leadership of Federal Party. The political differences were the major source of the hatred the two had regarding their programs.
To start with, Hamilton preferred a strong central government. As a result, his program evolved around issues to strengthen the government. That is why he was determined to settle the debts on the government before working on a stronger central government.
In this regard, Hamilton came up with means of settling the debts in which the citizens were supposed to buy some securities in form of bond to help the government pay off the debts.
The financial program was the central role of Hamilton as he empowered the local agricultural sector and banking sector to overpower the British trading activities in the United States. This led to initiation of Bank of United States and Central Bank that was similar to that in the United Kingdom. This reduced over reliance to British government.
On the other hand, Jefferson was a strict constructionist politically and he believed in very weak central government. His program pioneered to champion the states’ right and civil liberties. This meant that his program was meant to empower the people unlike the Hamilton’s program that given the central government the power.
The burden to advocate for people’s presence can be related to some of the statements made by Jefferson. For instance he said, “A government big enough to supply everything you need is big enough to take everything you have. The course of history shows that as a government grows, liberty decreases” (Dolbeare,
Organisational Learning: A Critical Analysis Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Organizational learning is an important aspect in organizations in the modern days. A lot of of research has been conducted to identify the strengths and weaknesses of organizational learning. It has been the subject of attention and research for some time now (Burnes et al 2003; Marshall et al 2009). Research demonstrates that the concept of organizational learning did not emerge until the 1980s.
However, its principles are firmly grounded on the many perspectives of management. The practices of organizational learning indicate a variety of factors which affect the performance of an organization. Such factors include organizational strategy, culture, structure and design, absorptive capability, problem-solving capacity and staff participation, among others (Wang
Analysis of Inherit the Wind Film Essay (Movie Review) college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
A synopsis of the Film
Critical Review of the Film
Introduction Inherit the wind is a Hollywood film produced in 1960 following inherit the wind play. The movie is an allegory that fictionalizes the 1925 Scopes Money Trial. This is aimed at criticizing McCarthyism. The movie reacted to the chilling outcome of the McCarthy period, which entailed an examination of the academic discourse.
The movie plays a critical role as far as the understanding of creation is concerned. In 1925, Scopes was charged in the court of law for teaching the Darwinian theory of creation. It was perceived that teaching high school students the theory was affect their faith and interfere with their belief.
The Tennessee state law stated that children at the high school were not to be introduced to theories that would infiltrate knowledge as far as the understanding of creation is concerned. In the movie, Matthew Harrison, Henry Drummond, and Bertram Cates are some of the characters that represent scholars at the time such as William Bryan, Darrow, and Scopes.
Even through the producers of the movie state in the beginning that the movie does not represent the chronology of events, it is shown clearly that the movie portrays a historical account. This article conducts a critical review of the film by showing how it portrays the period and events. The article also looks at the accuracy of the film1.
A synopsis of the Film The movie shows a teacher in the Southern town who was charged for introducing students to one of the controversial theories of creation. The teacher introduced students to the Darwinian Theory, which was contrary to the laws of the state. The teacher informed students that man is a descendant of the apes, something that the society was reluctant to accept.
The teacher encountered criticisms from various sections, especially the church since the reverend was the first to deny the allegations. The teacher was arrested for giving students information that was perceived to be controversial since not all scientists agreed that Darwin’s theory was accurate.
The case was exciting was it was to be attended by famous individuals, including Matthew Brady, who had previously vied for the presidential seat. Brady was always against the theory by Charles Darwin since he was a scholar of religion. His area of interest academically was the study of the Bible. The three times presidential candidate would act as a prosecutor alongside other prosecutors including the town’s attorney.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Brady observed that it was his responsibility to teach the naïve teacher the true story of creation2. However, the three times presidential candidate was in for a rude shock because one of the best American legal experts represented the teacher, even though he was considered so controversial.
Apart from being a legal expert, Drummond was an enemy of the three times presidential candidate. The case attracted attention from various quarters, including the media since various media personalities would attend the court session.
The reverend was so annoyed to an extent of inciting people against the ungodly teacher and his legal representative. However, the reverend’s daughter complicated the case because she was in love with the controversial teacher. In the court, a controversy ensued because the judge seemed to be against Drummond by referring Brady to as colonel.
Drummond was upset since the judge did not demonstrate impartiality in a sensitive case. Drummond tried severally to persuade the court to allow the scientist to explain the provisions of the Darwin theory, but the judge could not allow. The view of the judge was that the provisions of the theory were misplaced meaning that they could not be explained in public.
At this point, the movie portrays the period that was so unfavorable to scientists. The works of various scientists in society were not allowed because they went against the teachings of God in several ways. Many people believed that God created human beings.
Therefore, there was no reason to believe that man could have actually evolved from apes. The movie confirms some of the experiences that scientists went through in the traditional society. In fact, the experiences that the teacher goes through in the movie compares closely with the experiences that other scholars went through in early 1900. Internet sources and various books confirm this.
After a heated argument, Drummond while representing the estranged teacher, requested Brady, the theologian and three times presidential candidate, to explain the why the findings of Darwin were inaccurate. Brady was well versed on matters related to the Bible.
We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of Inherit the Wind Film specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For him, explaining the teachings of the Bile was not an issue. Drummond was the best lawyer since he cross-examined the theology scholar until a common ground was reached. Brady was unable to explain clearly some of the controversial issues.
Drummond concluded that the knowledge on creation was still developing since no individual could defend his or her position clearly. In this regard, he suggested that each person, including the teacher, had a right of formulating a viewpoint as regards to creation.
The judge was reluctant to rule in favor of the teacher since the society was unwilling to accept the fact that various theories explaining creation exist3. At last, the teacher was convicted since he had been found guilty of giving controversial information to his students.
Brady was not satisfied with the ruling since he convinced the judge to charge Drummond and his client for wasting the time of the court. However, his attempts are unsuccessful because the judge did not give in to his views. Noticing that no one was listening to him, Brady fell and died instantly. It was later identified that ruptured stomach was the cause of his death.
Critical Review of the Film As earlier noted, the film shows how science and scientific knowledge have gone through a long process to be what it is now. Scientists have gone through various problems because the society has always been reluctant to accept the new knowledge. The teacher could not survive in a society that believed God created everything.
Charles Darwin theory could not be spared in a society that religious leaders and scholars were extremely powerful. The judge lacked impartiality because every member of society respected religion. Nothing could convince the judge that the theory could be having some truths in it.
Religious leaders and scholars controlled all forms of inventions implying that they had the right to determine what was to be taught in schools. This could also mean that the church and religious scholars were relied heavily as far as formulation of laws was concerned.
The laws of the state were designed in line with the teachings of the church. Brady and other religious leaders could express their opinions in the song ‘inherit the wind’ meaning that those opposed to the teachings of the bible had no otherwise, but to comply with the mainstream belief.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Analysis of Inherit the Wind Film by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Revered Brown is shown quoting a verse that Brady had earlier quoted in the court. This shows that the church controlled all major events, opinions, views, and beliefs in society.
Through analysis, it can be concluded that the movie criticizes the past by observing that the society was unsympathetic to change. These determined to bring change were frequently humiliated through the courts and other organs of the law. The Tennessee administration feared the future, which forced it to come up with laws that discouraged scientific discoveries.
In the US, scientists have fought for their rights continuously just like other minorities such as women and people of the color. Through the movie, it is noted that they have never enjoyed their rights and freedoms in history. The church controlled science implying that it could determine what to invent and what to discard.
The film brings out the theme of power clearly since the church and the intelligentsia is seen to compote for recognition4. The church uses the state as a coercive tool to intimidate those who do not subscribe to its rules.
The views presented in the movie are accurate because the church has always influenced the public opinion, even though it was separated from the state in 1648 through the treaty of Westphalia. In the movie, the state organs do not use facts to make a ruling since the judge favored the church without even giving a legal reason.
Bibliography Bergmann, Paul, and Asimow, Michael. Reel Justice: The Courtroom Goes to the Movies. Kansas City: Andrews McMeel, 2006
Curtis, James. Spencer Tracy: A Biography. New York: Alfred Knopf, 2011.
Jerome, Lawrence, and Lee, Edwin. Inherit the Wind. New York: Literary Licensing, 2012.
Larson, Edward J. Summer for the Gods the Scopes Trial and America’s Continuing Debate Over Science and Religion. New York: Basic Books, 2006.
Footnotes Jerome, Lawrence, and Lee, Edwin. Inherit the Wind. New York: Literary Licensing, 2012.
Curtis, James. Spencer Tracy: A Biography. New York: Alfred Knopf, 2011.
Larson, Edward. Summer for the Gods the Scopes Trial and America’s Continuing Debate over Science and Religion. New York: Basic Books, 2006.
Bergmann, Paul, and Asimow, Michael. Reel Justice: The Courtroom Goes to the Movies. Kansas City: Andrews McMeel, 2006
Franklin D. Roosevelt’s Plans to End the Great Depression in His Presidency Essay essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
The Great Depression
Measures to End the Great Depression
Introduction President Franklin Roosevelt rose to power at the time when the U.S. was facing hardships in the economy with the great depression badly affecting the economic activities of the country.
Although the President did not have new measures to combat the great depression, he had normal old techniques to be applied together with a message of hope to the Americans that they could overcome everything that is affecting the economy. He encouraged the Americans to overcome fear first. This paper discusses the techniques that President Roosevelt used to overcome the great depression in his presidency.
The Great Depression The great Depression affected the economy of the U.S. in the 1930s with people’s values shrunken to the lowest levels. The government increased taxes due to reduced levels of income with ability for consumers to consume goods decreasing to lowest levels.
In addition, the means of exchange that measures the level of liquidity in the economy had gone down thereby freezing any form of trade. Enterprises closed down even as savings of many Americans were diminished.
The level of economic activities in the country was badly affected and the levels of unemployed were soaring. Therefore, the president had to offer not only hope, but ways through which the economy could be resuscitated (Polenberg 39).
Measures to End the Great Depression The President began by offering measures that could be undertaken to end the great depression. He argued that banks had lacked morals and ethical standards that led to lack of credit to borrowers. Due to this, he stated that his government would restore values in the banking sector so that credit can be improved and the levels of investment increased. This was not the only solution to the problem.
He argued that employment levels were low and the economy could only be revived through reduced unemployment levels. This could be achieved by various means beginning by direct recruitment by the government. He pointed out that his government would treat unemployment as an act of emergency such as war. Through employment, the country’s natural resources would be put back to use (Polenberg 40).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The other revealed measure to end the great depression was balancing of population in industrial centers together with redistribution into agricultural land. Through this, Agricultural production would be increased even as unemployment reduces.
This was to be accompanied by the increased purchasing power of the population. The federal government pledged to support these activities by effective planning and provision of effective means of transportation of manufactured farm products. Despite this, the efforts were to begin immediately and not wait any longer (Polenberg 42).
President Roosevelt pointed to regulation of the financial sector as another ensure that would ensure that the recession did not repeat itself again in future.
This could involve strict supervision of all banking, credit and investment activities carried by all financial institutions. This could help end speculation using other people’s money. In addition, the president prioritized stability of the national economy over international trade.
In the State of the Union Address in 1935, the president reiterated that the federal government owed the Americans in terms of provision of employment. Therefore, he outlined measures taken by the federal government to reduce levels of unemployment.
These measures included a vast public works program that would cost $5 billion such as slum clearance and upgrading, rural electrification and reforestation (Polenberg 64).
Further still, he reiterated that his second term government would ensure that unemployment is low, interest rates are maintained low to encourage investment, more agricultural production would be promoted and better and cheap infrastructure would be provided to the American citizens.
We will write a custom Essay on Franklin D. Roosevelt’s Plans to End the Great Depression in His Presidency specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The president further argued that welfare programs established by the federal government such as home relief should come second to work relief, a statement that has spurred mixed reactions.
A part from economic recovery and overcoming the Great Depression, President Roosevelt was concerned with the conservation of the environment. He continuously pointed out that the environment should be conserved for the future generations that will succeed the land in a few years to come.
His government undertook measures to conserve the environment through various programs such as the reforestation, dam construction and provision of hydroelectric power projects to show his concern for the environment (Polenberg 66).
Conclusion It is true that President Roosevelt had measures in place to overcome the great depression that affected the U.S. economy in the 1930s. First, the great depression had led to low levels of productivity that was accompanied by high unemployment levels, lack of credit in financial institutions, low investment and reduced farm output. The measures as he outlined in his inaugural address to the nation were many.
They included government support to improve agricultural production and general productivity in the country through improved industrial activities. Farmers were to be supported by provision of cheap infrastructure and provision of cheap social amenities such as electricity through the rural electrification programme. Unemployment was to be reduced by direct government recruitment.
Lastly, government regulation of the banking sector was to ensure that the issues affecting the economy are not repeated in future. In addition, the President pursued environmental conservation measures such as reforestation.
Works Cited Polenberg, Richard. The Era of Franklin D. Roosevelt, 1933-1945: A Brief History with Documents. Basingstoke: Palgrave McMillan. 2000. Print.
The role of nationalism and national identities in the UAE Essay essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The national population imbalance
The unemployment rates among the nationals
Introduction The UAE has experienced a quantum leap from just a loose collection of tribes since in 1971 to a wealthy state worth recognition. Despite the robust economic performance the country faces challenges with its native populace. The priority three is demographic imbalance, unemployment rate as well as development of human capital.
According to Patrick (1) the UAE has yet to develop the concept of a nation as manifested by the increase in the public debate approaches to guard the national identity through amicably defining who is a national. The UAE has operated on social openness with Islam that is tolerant to heavy modernization and influence by international environments.
Some scholarly assertions in the UAE argue the bases of national identity as an Emirati not tied to indigenous populace or aborigines from UAE. Unlike other countries in the Middle East that have a historical struggle for their own determination or expansionism linked with the Western colonizers, the GCC states have faced complications in developing national identity models.
Al-Suwaidi (45) views that politics in the UAE rest upon the governance pretext of explicit and implicit consent under the old Lockean principle where the ruling regime serves on the premises of universal acceptance of the incumbent and approach to government.
This permeates both inter and intra-Emirates as well as the federal levels. The governing class has laid more emphases on procedural set up of national institutions and systems than focus on development strides in the country’s politics.
While citing literature, Patrick (2) explains nationalism in the UAE as positive turning inward vis-à-vis negative turning outward. This nationalism concept has been entrenched in the Emiratisation policy. In order to push for the nationalism agenda some of the policies in Emiratisation are regulatory than subsidiary.
Emiratisation has advanced nationalism avenues on financial empowerment, religious and cultural issues assist in developing of skills as well as creation of professionals. Towards this end, the federal government set up a National Human Resource Development and Employment Authority (TANMIA) charged with enhancing skill development as well as hiring of nationals into the work force.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The national population imbalance Koji (41) notes that the federal government of the UAE has faced a challenge in its demographic composition. The government realized that influx foreigners were creating a population imbalance between national and expatriates, which disadvantaged the locals seeking national opportunities; thus, has led to crisis in defining national identity.
As part of the national labour policy, the government has embarked on affirmative action of replacing foreign workers with native ones to enhance the employment for the local work force, while lessening expatriate pool.
Koji (43) observes that the overall population is 8 million people with foreigners making up 87 percent; moreover, the work force in the private sector constitutes about one percent of natives. The oil boom that drove the process of national economic development attracted foreign workers in the UAE since the 1970s to service huge labour gaps since at the onset the nationals were few vis-à-vis the employment opportunities.
This initial economic development effort in the 1980s intended to widen revenue sources away from the oil sector bases; however most of the employment opportunities fitted expatriate skills.
The unemployment rates among the nationals The UAE is experiencing an increment in the youth population among nationals and a positive correlation with unemployment rates. Koji (43) views that some non-oil sectors in the UAE like manufacturing, services as well as construction have created labour opportunities, which have not attracted the nationals on the bases working conditions. This is creating room for expatriates to cease the opportunities to fit in.
Nonetheless, the nationals tend to prefer government based jobs vis-à-vis private sector. Projections on the trend of the labour market estimate that by 2015 more than a quarter million of nationals will be unemployed with four-fifth of this being the youth. As part of giving nationals a priority within the private sector and in specific in banking sector the Decision No.
8 of 1998 by Cabinet that demand each premise to hire at least 4 percent nationals within its workforce. The government is also pursuing efforts on diverse nationalities within a workplace as opposed to cheaper labour that favours influx of foreigners.
We will write a custom Essay on The role of nationalism and national identities in the UAE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This will at the end lead to increase in the infiltration of nationals into the workforce. Moreover, there is increased attention on the movement of non-nationals within the country. Al-Ali (38) notes that about a tenth of Emiratis in private have left employment citing difficulties with working in a multicultural setting as a hindrance to human capital formation, particularly the female gender.
Women Empowerment There are gender related issues specifically among the women’s subgroup. Al-Ali (13) observes that gender development has come with new challenges for Emirati women, which need national assistance. Cultural changes have led to low of fertility rates, especially number of children per Emirati women.
In the wake of achieving gender equity in nation building, Emirati women are experiencing delayed childbearing and a commitment to acquiring higher education knowledge while attending to household matters.
Traditionalists lifestyle that thrived on more births to propagate family as well as tribal status are facing huge challenges now that Emiratis is called upon to participate actively in the country’s human capital in the economy amid competition from expatriates. Affirmative action has led to more women taking up employment opportunities.
In the public sector, women constitute about two-fifth of the workforce in the education sector, a third in health as well as a fifth in the social affairs. Interestingly, affirmative action has led to more women joining higher education and gaining necessary qualification across professions thus beginning career life and earning a living (Al-Ali 13).
The more women that join the post secondary education have benefit to their contribution to the human capital development because of the shift in the social attitudes.
Conclusion In conclusion, the UAE has presented as a fair model of a nation that has used its natural endowment to diversify and modernize its state, while ensuring there is equality in benefits for natives as well as the rest of the world.
The application of the old Lockean principle implies that the nation appreciates that influence of globalization by tapping benefits and preserving traditions with adverse impacts the country’s history.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The role of nationalism and national identities in the UAE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Furthermore, institutionalizing the challenges facing nationalism through TANMIA is evidence that the government has concern for developing national economy that directly benefits nationals through affirmative action.
This is engendered on issues arising from cultural and religious barriers, financial capacity as well as skill and professional development. Some scholarly quarters have the feeling that the country has not yet fully addressed its definition of national identity.
Works Cited Al-Ali, Jasim 2008, Structural Barriers to Emiratisation: Analysis and Policy Recommendations. PDF file. 15 Feb. 2008. .
Al-Suwaidi, Abdulla. “The United Arab Emirates At 40: A Balance Sheet.” Middle East Policy. XVIII.4 (2011):44-58. Uaeinteract. Web.
Koji, Horinuki. “Controversies over Labour Naturalisation Policy and its Dilemmas: 40 Years of Emiratisation in the United Arab Emirates.” Kyoto Bulletin of Islamic Area Studies. 4.1(2011 ):41–61. Asafas. Web.
Patrick, Neil 2009, Research Paper, Kuwait Programme on Development, Governance and Globalisation in the Gulf States. PDF file. 15 Feb. 2008.
Shia and Sunni Realms Essay custom essay help
Introduction Islam is the second largest religion in the world in terms of the population as well as global spread. Prophet Muhammad started the religion in the year 610 CE after receiving a revelation through Gabriel who delivered a message to him from God. Islam believers and followers are referred to as Muslims.
The Quran is their holy book that acts as a guide for all Muslims as it contains the message from Prophet Muhammad. It guides Muslims on how to live and or conduct their lives religiously. Blanchard (2009, 2) indicates that several Muslim groups have emerged. The groups are defined by their beliefs and practices through their interpretation of the Quran.
Among them are the Shia, the Sunnis, Sufism, Ahmadiya, Ibadi, and Yazdanism amongst others. The paper focuses on the Sunni and Shia groups, which are the largest in the world of Muslims, in an effort to find out their defining factors in terms of development, beliefs and traditions, and their significant followers amongst other parameters.
Development of the Shia The Shia group of Muslims is the second largest group after the Sunnis. It constitutes about 10-20% of the whole Muslim population in the world. The development of the Shia community started immediately the prophet died due to the different schools of thought adopted by leaders who were around the prophet.
This difference was brought about by a succession in terms of who should succeed the prophet in addition to how it should be done. In fact, the prophet had died without clearly indicating how the succession would happen. Therefore, the leading clerics around him took upon themselves to define what the prophet’s succession would have meant thus leading to the emergence of the two groups.
Shomali (2003) postulates that the Shia group was guided by the belief that the prophet had appointed his caliph through divine messages that he had given his followers when he was alive. This revelation was simply an interpretation of the messages he had left behind, which was contrary to what the Sunni group believed.
The Shia group is guided by the belief that the Muslim nation’s leadership is a prerogative of God who should be the sole appointer of their leader. This teaching led this group to follow Ali ibn Abi Talib who was Prophet Mohammad’s son in-law.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Development of the Sunni The development of the Sunni can be traced back to the time when the prophet Muhammad died. There was a need to appoint a successor in his place. The Sunni can be described as the largest branch of Islam making up 75-90% of the Muslim population in approximation. The emergence of the Sunni group came about the same time as the Shia group. The two can be described as the original groups of Islam immediately after the demise of the prophet.
Elshamsy (2008) states that the Sunni came about due to the belief that the appointment of the caliphate was a prerogative of the people and that the first four caliphs were supposed to be the successors of the prophet because he had not appointed a successor nor defined the succession procedure to his followers at the time of his death.
The Sunnis therefore believe that a caliph should be chosen by the community and can be anyone as long as he or she is righteous as per the Quran teachings. They therefore do not believe that only the descendants of the prophet should lead the Muslim community.
Beliefs and Traditions of the Shia The Shias just like all other Muslims believe that Prophet Mohammad was God’s last prophet and that he was sent by Allah as a messenger to the people to spread Islam. The Shia people believe in the hadith, which are defined as the sayings of the prophet and his aides, which usually form part of the Quran.
The Shias believe in the five pillars of Islam, which are Shahada, Salat, Zakat, Saum, and Hajji. These five tenets are the guiding principles that all Muslims should follow for them to attain holiness. Other than the Quran, the Shia derive their teachings and practices from the Sunna, which are the customs and practices done by the prophet ranging from the qiyas, which are analogies to the Ijma, which can be described as a consensus, not ignoring the ijtihad, which is a given individual’s reasoning as Barzegar (2008, 88) reveals.
The Shia group believes that the leadership of Islam should be God appointed since He (God) appointed the prophet and that it should follow the prophet’s bloodline. The group also holds that the mujtahids, who are spiritual people, took over the leadership of faith and community when the Imams who were offsprings of Ali ended and that the heads have the mandate to construe lawful, supernatural, and holy knowledge to the community.
The Shia group views and commemorates Ashura, which is the tenth day of the month Muharram according to the Islamic calendar according to Fibiger (2010, 32). This day marks the time when Hussein who was Ali’s youngest son was killed by Sunni forces in Karbala Iraq.
We will write a custom Essay on Shia and Sunni Realms specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, it observes the day by self-flagellation. Hussein was killed in the year 680 by Sunni forces. The Shia group is strongly guided by the doctrine of the imamate. It centers most of its beliefs and teachings on Ali. According to it, the Imam is sinless and infallible and a source of religious absolute.
Beliefs and Traditions of the Sunni Just like the Shia, the Sunni came about due to the succession debate within the Muslim society. The Sunnis suppose that the religious head should be chosen through consent of the community and not simply from the bloodline of the prophet. They believe that the prophet Muhammad was a messenger sent by God. They believe in the hadith and the teachings of the Quran.
Just like the Shia, the Sunni believe and practice the five pillars of Islam, which are Shahada, Salat, Zakat, Saum, and Hajj. Shias’ teachings are based on the Quran, the Sunna, the hadith, the qiyas, the Ijma, and Ijtihad. The Sunnis never bestow the status of the prophet to their leaders, as they believe that the last person to have the status was the prophet himself. The Sunnis do not have a strict and complicated religious hierarchy.
They allow laypersons to lead prayers at the mosque. The practice is only restricted to religious leaders under the Shia group. The Sunnis have several permissible institutions that provide jurisprudence when it comes to the construal of legal issues. The four are Hanfi, founded by Abu Hanifa, Maliki, founded by Malik ibn Anas, Shafi founded by Muhammad ibn Idris al-Shafi, and the Hanbali, which was founded by Ahmad Hanbal.
These legal schools are prevalent in specific regions of the world, which have chosen to use them as Blanchard (2009, 3) points out. Within the Sunni group, there is a movement called Wahabi, which can be described as purist that interprets the Quran in a fundamentalist way.
The Sunni group believes that they are the original group and that their interpretation of the Quran is the correct one. Under the Sunni group, the Imams have a big responsibility when it comes to matters of birth, marriage, and death. They are viewed as the leaders of the religion.
Leaders and Significant Followers of Shia The Shia can be described as the most fragmented group in the Muslim nation because of the different factions it has among its followers. The Shia group follows Ali who was Muhammad’s cousin as well as the son in law with the belief that Muslim leadership is God appointed. The Shia group has most of its followers in Iraq, Iran, Yemen, central Asia, and Southern Asia. The Shia group is divided into different groups with two major ones coming out prominently.
As Shomali (2003) explains, there is the twelver Shiism that believes in the line of twelve imams who are descendants from Ali whose appointments were divine from birth. The twelve Shia leaders are Ali ibn Abu Talib, Hassan ibn Ali, Husayn ibn Ali, Ali ibn Husayn, Muhammad ibn Ali, Jafar ibn Muhammad, Musa ibn Jafar, Ali ibn Musa, Muhammad ibn Ali, Ali ibn Muhammad, Hassan ibn Ali, and Muhammad ibn Alhassan. All of these leaders were assassinated. They existed at different lines with all of them being descendants of Ali.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Shia and Sunni Realms by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Leaders and Significant Followers of the Sunni The Sunnis believe in the first four Caliphs after the demise of the prophet. The Sunni subscribe to four schools of Jurisprudence brought about by the four leaders at different times. These schools of jurisprudence have been spread across the Sunni followers across the world with people in specific areas subscribing to specific schools of thought.
Fibiger (2010, 34) lists four scholars that the Sunnis look up to. They include Abu Hanifa (d. 767 AD) whose jurisprudence is called the Hanafi having followers in Bangladesh, turkey, the Balkans, Iraq, Lebanon, Syria, Afghanistan, Jordan, Central Asia and India. The other scholar is Malik ibn Anas (d. 795 AD) whose followers call themselves the Maliki group.
They are mostly found in Bahrain, Kuwait, North Africa, and Mauritania. Muhammad ibn Idris al-Shafi’s (d. 819 AD) school of jurisprudence is called Shafi group and is prevalent in Malaysia, Egypt, Somalia, Sudan, parts of Yeme,n and Ethiopia. Ahamad Hanbali (d. 855) has Hanbali as his school of jurisprudence. He has followers in the following parts of the world who subscribe to his views and thoughts: Qatar, Saudi Arabia, the United Arabs Emirates, and Oman.
Ground Breaking Events of the Shia Groundbreaking events of the Shia Muslims can be traced back to the day the prophet Mohamed was born. This period was in earnest the start of Islam as a religion, which would later on lead to the development of the Shia group. The death of Muhammad in the year 632 AD led to succession events with the majority siding with Abu Bakr while the minority sided with Ali only for the group to secure the name Shiat Ali.
During this period, the once unified Muslim nation became divided thus giving birth to the Shia and Sunni. Fibiger (2010) states that the killing of Husain who was Ali’s youngest son and a third successor after Ali led to the remembrance of the day by celebrating the day of Ashura when he was killed. This experience further aligned the Shia Muslims towards having their identity in the leadership of Prophet Muhammad’s lineage thus strengthening the Shia group.
Ground Breaking Events of the Sunni The groundbreaking events for the Sunni following can be ascribed to the birth of the prophet who later on led the Muslim world. All Muslims celebrate the birth of the prophet because it was the first step to the birth of Islam. The demise of the forecaster led to the separation of the Muslim world between the two groups under scrutiny.
From this point, the Sunnis were able to define their principles and beliefs. Before the death of the prophet, the Muslims were one group under the leadership of the prophet. According to Sunni News (2009), the Sunni also celebrate the Ashura but not with the same reasons as the Shia but rather as instructions from the prophet who observed the day by fasting. Generally, very few Sunni events can be described as specifically belonging to the Sunnis because most of the days they celebrate are also common with the Shia.
Where the Shia Stand Today The Shia group remains small in terms of followership compared to the Sunni. The Shia group is concentrated in specific countries. Their interpretation of the Quran has been criticized as being manipulative to fit their own theories. Nevertheless, the Shia group remains a big force to reckon within the Muslim world because they form almost a quarter of the Muslim population.
The Shia Muslims continue to be persecuted in countries where there is the majority of Sunnis. The situation has led to what can be described as an intra-religious war between the two groups. The current structure of the Shia continues to be led by Imams who are regarded as their spiritual leaders.
Although they have had splits, the different Shia groups have minor differences that tend to define their existence. For instance, the seveners and the twelvers are the major Shia groups in existence. The groups are divided along diverse schools of thought about the lineage of Imams to follow.
As Barzegar (2008) states, some of the Shias’ hadiths differ from those of the Sunnis. In fact, they include some imams that are not recognized by the Sunni. The Shias just like other religious groups has an expansionist agenda of converting more followers into its group.
Where the Sunni Stand Today The Sunnis comprise the largest Muslim group in the world with a 75-90% followership in the whole Muslim nation. Their spread in the world is also the largest due to its popularity. Blanchard (2009, 2) finds that the Sunnis have an organized leadership in the countries where they exist with the highest honor being bestowed on the most learned leader in religious matters.
They can be found in countries like Iran where the Ayatollah wields so much influence in both spiritual and political matters. The Sunnis view the Shia people as a group that is out to distort Islamic teachings for selfish reasons by taking every opportunity to fight them. The Sunnis continue to popularize Islam wherever they are by starting community projects that help the community with the aim of winning more converts by generally performing their religious duty as per the Quran.
Bibliography Barzegar, Kayhan. “Iran
upload the initial post then I will post two peers initial so you can do the peer response to their post. college admissions essay help
Where do you think nursing is in it’s struggle to be recognized as a discipline of knowledge? Support your beliefs on this question by using/discussing three of the characteristics of a discipline. Apply what you have come to know about a discipline to a nursing situation in your workplace/clinical practice area or through personal experience. Tell us the nursing situation, and describe how the characteristics of the discipline are lived in the situation. A nursing situation is defined as any event in which a nurse is engaged with another individual. Post your initial cited and referenced response the first week of the module. Be sure to include in your posting a bibliographic citation for the article you have read and are responding to. Two cited and referenced peer responses are due as well; one cited and referenced response must be in the second week of the unit, the other cited and referenced peer response can appear in either week of the module.
Strategic Audit – Adidas Report custom essay help: custom essay help
Executive Summary The global sportswear industry is becoming one of the most competitive industries in the world. One of the main companies that operate in the industry is the Adidas Group. The purpose of this paper is to carry out a strategic audit of the Adidas Group.
The paper has taken a diversified approach of analysis; internal analysis and external analysis. Various models of analyses have been applied in the paper, and they include PEST and the Porter’s analysis.
The analysis was aimed at capturing the strategies of the company and how they help it to adapt to the competitive forces in the industry. The findings from the analysis point out that Adidas is still competitive in the industry. The competitiveness has been enhanced through focus on the global approach of management.
Introduction According to Slack (2004), the global sports industry is growing at a quick pace due to commercialization of sports. The number of sporting events has been rising each day, thus attracting more people directly and indirectly into the sporting industry. In the contemporary times, the sports industry has a wide number of stakeholders.
The most critical question to ask is what the growth of the sporting industry implies for the business world. The growth of the global sporting industry has attracted many business players in the sporting industry by presenting the opportunity to supply the sporting infrastructure and equipment.
There are a substantial number of companies that deal in the global sporting industry (Andreff
Math Teaching Methods Expository Essay a level english language essay help
Introduction Rounding of mixed decimals is a significant mathematical concept. This concept as presented in the paper targets students who are in the fifth grade. Students at this level ought to be clearly taught how to round off numbers involving decimals to the nearest tenth as a foundation for the concepts in the upper grades to curb any difficulties in dealing with related concepts in the future.
Prerequisite concepts and skills learnt before the lesson
One of the required concepts and skills that students should have is the ability to round off whole numbers. The second most fundamental skill is on place value. These concepts will be heavily relied upon in teaching how to round off mixed decimals to the nearest tenth. Students who do not understand these two concepts may have difficulties in understanding this concept.
Concepts and skills in this lesson
This session will provide the idea and proficiency of rounding off decimal numbers to the nearest tenth. Activities and resources that will be used in this activity will be geared towards making it easier for the learner to grasp the concept. A systematic format will be used to ensure that learners understand the basics of the concept in a bid to proceed to its mastery.
How to teach rounding with decimals to the nearest tenth
When teaching students the concept of rounding decimals to the nearest tenth, one has to begin by ensuring that every student understands some basic concepts. The teacher has to probe the students in order to evaluate their understanding of rounding whole numbers and place values.
According to Reys (2012), understanding mathematical concepts should be reinforced through examples and practice. After affirming that they understand these basic concepts, the teacher may proceed to explain that, when one wants to round decimal numbers to the nearest tenth, he or she has to begin by rounding the number that is located immediately after the decimal.
This step is followed by an explanation that the tenths figure is the beginning number on the right hand side of the decimal. It is crucial also for the teacher to give the learners a hint that numbers after the tenths place assume the hundredth and thousandth positions consecutively.
Students are also made aware that, when solving questions on rounding with mixed decimals to the nearest tenths, they have to apply similar procedures like those of rounding whole numbers. The teacher goes on to exemplify to the students that, when the hundredths place value is, say 50 or beyond, the tenth place value will have to increase by one.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Similarly, if the hundredths or thousandths place value is less than 50, the tenths figure remains unchanged. It is crucial to note that, once the rounding off has been done, all other numbers after the tenth place are dropped completely so that the only number appearing after the decimal is the tenths digit. The teacher then goes on to solve a number of examples as students move with him or her.
Students are also allowed to ask questions concerning these concepts. According to Atkinson (1966), individual’s perception of understanding of a task motivates him or her to do it without failure. Allowing students some time to ask makes the concept simpler for them.
The tutor also needs to circulate handouts that show learners how to perform the rounding operation to decimals numbers to the nearest tenth as teaching resources. Finally, the teacher offers some questions for students to solve on the same concept as a way of affirming that they have understood the concept or not.
Description of activities and tasks applied
The activities and tasks that I will use will include giving of examples like solving problems on the textbooks, short evaluation quizzes from past examination papers, and correction of procedural and conceptual errors made by students.
Conceptual and procedural errors, difficult concepts, and their remedy in rounding with mixed decimals to the nearest tenths
Learners do some common mistakes when performing the rounding off exercise. The most common one occurs when students round whole numbers on the left to the nearest tenth in place of the decimal number to the right. The other error occurs when students fail to round up.
In such incidences, students only give their answers as the tenth place value numbers as it were originally on the question. Some problems may be difficult for the students. For example, 6.61 may be erroneously rounded to 7.0 instead of 6.6 following the misconception that that the exercise is the same as when they are handling whole numbers.
Another difficulty is seen when they round 6.51 as 6.6 instead of 6.5 when one is less than 5. However, this challenge can be solved by the use of a number line to realize the place value of the number. Students should also be cautioned against changing the whole numbers.
We will write a custom Essay on Math Teaching Methods specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reference List Atkinson, J.,
Memory lane and morality Essay (Article) college essay help: college essay help
Introduction There is little knowledge on the effect of autobiographical memory on moral behavior. This research focuses on childhood memory as a type of autobiographic memory.
Conclusions drawn from research on moral psychology and memory propose that moral purity is elicited by childhood memories. It is a state where people feel they have clean morals and that they are innocent. As a result, when moral purity is heightened, pro-social behavior becomes great.
In the first experiment where participants were expected to remember their childhood experience, those memories aided the experimenter more than they let the participants take control. Moral purity mediated in this event. In another experiment, manipulation increased money donation (Aarts, and Dijksterhuis, 2003).
This effect came as a result of clear and inherent measures of moral purity. Experiment three further links moderation of childhood memories and pro-social behaviors with the fourth experiment. It indicates that child hood memories compromise others’ ethics. Finally both positive and negative valences increased aid as compared to control action (Edwards, and Lambert, 2007).
The participants in the first experiment were one hundred and thirteen. They were graduates from a university. There were instructions to read on computer screens after which they were to write about a particular occasion that took place at a certain time in the past. The provided time was 5-10 minutes and they were to start by describing their morning routine which was to enforce the true purpose of the study.
The reports on how the participants felt ten positive and negative emotions were given on a scale of seven. In the second experiment, eighty seven undergraduates with a mean age of 20.89 years old were selected for the experiment. First they were given a fifteen minute bogus task after which they received a compensation of $5. Thereafter, they did a different question from the one in experiment one.
The third group of participants comprised of one hundred and one people; both students and staff members. There were forty two male students with a mean age of 23.82 years and their purpose was to first do the task in experiment two after which they were to choose from a list of forty words containing their favorite words (Aarts, and Dijksterhuis, 2003).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The fourth experiment had one hundred and twenty adults with forty two females with a mean age of 44.20 years. They first did the activities in experiment two and three for ten minutes after which they had a different question to test on the negative and positive effects; including a question testing on nostalgia.
Findings of the first experiment showed that participants could write a lot about their favorite music and their first time experiences like bicycle riding from childhood memories. The manipulation was effective because the participants admitted that such actions like writing made it easy for them to draw back to their childhood memories.
Conditioned report proved a higher mean moral purity level than controlled participants. It also came out clear that the participants could do more when subjected to questions than when they were alone and not under conditions. From the second experiment, there were no guesses made on the hypothesis. Therefore, no participant was excluded from the analyses.
As in the case of first experiment, the second also showed that participants who wrote about their task easily remembered their childhood life. In terms of amount donated, more money was donated by participants who wrote about their childhood life. There was a significant manipulation in the third experiment where no participant was excluded.
Amount donated and moderated mediation were significantly and positively correlated. The two last experiments were characterized by same results except for the fact that having children for moderation in experiment five did not have any effect at all (Aarts, and Dijksterhuis, 2003).
There are various limitations to this research. Although nostalgia, moral purity and mediums through which pro-social behavior are promoted by childhood memories, there are other areas that were not covered in this research. Future research may widen our knowledge on additional mechanisms. Secondly, only a single manipulation for childhood memories was used in the experiments (Cialdini, 2001).
Each participant was expected to write about his own childhood memories. This type of memory ignited the concept of childhood. In future, it is important to test general findings like in a case of an office setup where participants can be asked about their preferred color or choice of furniture. The third limitation is failure to investigate the role of moderators.
We will write a custom Article on Memory lane and morality specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For instance, they could have been asked about the effects and impacts of having their own children. Many important factors, both trial based and institutional based, may also moderate the investigated relationships in this research.
For example, importance of one’s moral identity can lower the chances of one remembering their childhood. Finally the research had little or no interest on the benefits of having childhood memories on potential costs. It only dwelled on the benefits of having the memories.
Conclusion Moral identity is, therefore, important in moral motivation. It is also important to conduct a detailed examination on the two moderators considered in the last two experiments (4 and 5). One could perhaps consider comparing two participants with complicated childhood experiences.
References Aarts, H.,
Travel Agencies in the 21st Century – Challenges and Prospects Expository Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Introduction There is great need for travel agencies to come up with a sophisticated and advanced information technology for handling the increasing level of tourism traffic, and improving the quality of services offered. This is due to the rapid growth and development of the travel industry. Previous research has shown that modern travelers prefer to associate themselves with travel products and services that are of high quality.
On a similar note, the development of new and advanced tourism products and the drastic increase in tourism activities has compelled several travel agencies to undertake a wide-scale adoption of information technology.
Specifically, most of these agencies have adopted the use of internet as a form of prompt electronic intermediary that can serve as a wide distribution and communication channel for both the suppliers and travelers. The internet allows travel agencies to enhance their level of performance and competitiveness.
Based on the aforementioned aspect, most of the researchers who conduct studies in areas such as tourism and travel have always emphasized the need to make appropriate use of the internet to promote both tourism and travel.
In the case of travel agencies that deal with tourist supplies, the internet offers significant contribution especially in facilitating capacity of agencies to market their products and services to potential travelers located in different parts of the world. These travel agencies can make use of remote portals to control their servers.
For instance, these servers can be able to display information that relate to the products and services offered by the company. In most cases, this information is displayed using an appropriate electronic speed so that potential travelers are provided with the most update and releavnt information at the right time (Jamal
Isolation and Capital Punishments Essay custom essay help
Isolation and capital punishments are both social evils. Isolating people deprives them the right to stay with their families, and limits their freedom of movement (Samaha 418).
Besides, isolated persons seem to acquire brain disorders in the end and they become obliterated socially. On the other hand, capital punishments such as deaths deprives of people the freedom of life and goes against God’s command which disallows intentional killings of persons, or murder.
Human beings need interaction with other people due to their social nature. Harlow used monkeys to study impacts of social isolation by raising these monkeys in a nursery. He concluded that neglected and orphaned children experience psychological damage, similar to monkeys.
Therefore, he showed that children need nurturing for proper functioning of their brains (Gawande par. 9). Experiments on human adults also show similar results. Long distance sailors, who only communicate through videos report high levels of loneliness that destroy their souls. Anderson, a chief Middle East correspondent, missed people terribly during his confinement.
He dozed off and yearned for any form of activity during the day. Later, he began trembling and he feared to lose his mind. Eventually, Anderson lost his mind and he began beating his forehead against the wall. Proponents of long-term isolation in prisons argue that it prevents violence and offers discipline (Gawande par. 13).
When prisoners disobey rules by engaging in drugs and attacking correction staff, wardens have no choice but to offer penalty in efforts to contain the behavior (Gawande par. 13). Therefore, proponents label isolation as unavoidable and term all those that fail to support this idea as naïve.
In America, the number of prisoners in isolation is quite high. America believes that confining prisoners together increases violence due to overcrowding. Besides, some criminals are just too dangerous for common housing. Britain tried solitary confinement of prisoners, but it failed as violence in the cells increased.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Alternatively, Britain adopted a system of preventing violence in prison instead of offering more punishments. They presented violent prisoners with more control by offering them opportunities for work, education as well as special programming (Gawande par. 72).
Britain found out that prisoners who were extremely violent in one area behaved perfectly well in other areas. In the same way, Felton, a psychosis who faced confinement at some point, argues against solitary confinement.
Capital punishment, similar to isolation, is also evil. Death penalty is certainly wrong, since every human being has a right to life. Besides, governments attain moral authority from God and thus, should not break His command against murder and avenge (Scalia par. 13). No person has power to avenge by death, as this is a divine responsibility.
Besides, most crimes that lead to capital punishments are less likely to come from the same offender for a second time. For instance, domestic murder that results from passion is unlikely to come from the same person for a second time. Nevertheless, involved persons undergo life imprisonment just as a form of punishment, or justice.
Clearly, this is vengeance, which is against the will of God. Besides, such persons are not likely to gain from any form of rehabilitation offered in prisons. Rather, imprisonment will just make them to lose their minds due to loneliness experienced in isolation.
The main reason behind punishment inflicted by the society is to rectify disorder that results from the offense. However, it is obvious that capital punishment hardly defends the society, or corrects disorder. The structure of the word’s penal system has seen much upgrading to include cells that are very clean, meals planned by nutritionists, rooms for exercise and even allows visits by partners.
This arrangement of just retribution does not prohibit evil acts, as people are not afraid to face reprimand with these conditions. The penalty of death is wrong, as no government or person has moral authority over life. The main force behind modern hatred to the death penalty is comparing government morality with personal morality. This is plain due to contemporary democratic governments.
We will write a custom Essay on Isolation and Capital Punishments specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The catholic religion, for instance, allows death penalty if it makes prudential considerations However, it becomes difficult to know when such considerations are prudent. The Catholic Church disallows maters such as abortion and birth control totally, yet considers death penalty as just and right in some occasions.
In conclusion, both isolation and capital punishments are social evils. Isolating prisoners causes psychological damage and does not stop violence, or discipline them as expected. While proponents of isolation label it as unavoidable, a country like Britain has adopted a system of preventing violence in prison, and not practicing isolation. Violent prisoners get more control through opportunities such as work and education.
Similarly, capital punishment in the form of death penalty is wrong, as life is divine. Besides, death penalty does not prevent crime, as same offenders never commit most crimes that lead to capital punishments. In addition, death penalty for vengeance is unjustifiable according to biblical doctrine. Therefore, societies should ban capital punishments and try other ways of handling persons who commit serious offenses.
Works Cited Gawande, Atul. Hellhole: The United States holds tens of thousands of inmates in long-term solitary confinement. Is this torture? The New Yorker. 30 Mar. 2009. Web.
Samaha, Joel. Criminal justice, Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth, 2006. Print.
Scalia, Antonin. God’s Justice and Ours. Issue Archive. May 2002. Web.
The Affinity Argument in Plato’s Phaedo Explicatory Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents The Affinity Argument in Plato’s Phaedo
The Argument from Affinity
Application of the Affinity Argument in Contemporary Societies
The Affinity Argument in Plato’s Phaedo Plato’s Phaedo is a great dialogue written during his middle period. It is written as a third-person account of a philosophical conversation between Socrates and his friends, on the day he died (Cooper ix). Socrates accepts that he has to die in order to attain the objectives of true philosophy (Cooper 94, Phaedo 63c). He asserts that the soul can only gain wisdom once the physical body is dead.
He also argues that learning is a recollection of the fact that one’s soul exists even before his or her birth, and lives beyond death (Phaedo 67). In most parts of the dialogue, Socrates argues about opposites of things; that one thing originates from the opposite of the other (Phaedo 105d-107). In essence, Phaedo is an explanation of immortality of the soul, as put across by Plato.
It has four main issues or arguments which Socrates presents as a way of proving the immortality of the soul. These are; the Argument from Opposites (Cyclical Argument), the Theory of Recollection, the Argument from Affinity and the Argument from Form of Life (the Final Argument).
This paper solely focuses on the third argument-Argument from Affinity. It aims at criticizing Socrates’ idea of the immortality of the soul. The paper proceeds from the premise that philosophers are great thinkers, who should not merely mention ideas but provide proof of them as well.
The Argument from Affinity This is the argument which presupposes that human physical body is material, visible and perishable. On the contrary, the soul is immaterial, invisible and immortal. Socrates laid down his arguments that people ought to be more concerned with the soul than the physical body since in the long run the body will die but the soul will outlive it (Phaedo 78b).
Indeed, many people especially the religious leaders lay a lot of emphasis on the soul. Therefore, we see relatives of the dead gathering together to pray for the soul of the deceased person. Religious leaders also pray for the body and the soul of the dead but lay a lot of emphasis on the soul. This is to say that Socrates’ philosophy still lingers in the minds of many people (Cooper 95).
However, Socrates ought to have used reason to lay his claims instead of just mentioning ideas and leaving them as assumptions. These assumptions are held by the religious leaders in claiming that those who live virtuous lives will go to heaven. This can be quite misleading, and the underlying question is, what will happen to those with a lot of vices and their souls after death?
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Socrates ignored very important aspects of the human body while explaining the immortality of the soul. He did not factor disorders such as dementia and brain malfunctioning in his claims. He simply put the immortality of the soul as the last thing that comes out of human living (Phaedo 94b-e). This falls short of what a true philosopher should profess as well as the angles in which philosophers look at things.
Following his claims on the opposites of things, one can say that the soul is mortal. Socrates argued that something is formed from its opposite; the soul exists within the mortal body. Therefore, one would not be wrong to say that the mortal body can corrupt the immortal soul. What this means is that the soul is not immune from being tainted by the body (Phaedo 83d-e).
Tension arises when people are faced with different challenges, some of which make them to indulge in worldly desires. For instance, stealing can cause someone’s soul to be tainted and “imprisoned in another body” because stealing is wrong. The main challenge that people face now is how to disentangle themselves from this tension.
Socrates argued that if any person is virtuous then his or her soul is immortal and they should not fear death as it is an end to earthly suffering (Phaedo 118). Those who love truth remain honest, and have great value for wisdom will have their souls unperturbed and their eternal life will be full of goodness.
Socrates believed in this immortality up to the time of his death, and he gladly accepted to die. It is instructive to note that this argument can be summed up by saying that the human body dies and decays but the soul lives forever. However, he did not explain his claims clearly.
Application of the Affinity Argument in Contemporary Societies This argument has been viewed by many people as a way of enhancing virtuous living. Not a day will pass without a religious leader emphasizing on the importance of the soul in eternal life.
Several individuals have lived by such teachings which owe their origin to Plato and Socrates, for several years. However, many people abide by these teachings simply because their leaders teach so, and not because they have in-depth understanding of them.
We will write a custom Essay on The Affinity Argument in Plato’s Phaedo specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In conclusion, Socrates fell short of a philosopher’s manner of presenting ideas from different angles. Philosophers just don’t state ideas without remarkable explanations.
This paper serves as an eye-opener to contemporary philosophers, especially those who base their arguments on Socrates’ teaching to be extremely careful when quoting him. As a philosopher, one should not just issues mere utterances without adequate supporting facts and ideas viewed from different angles.
Work Cited Cooper, John. Plato, Five Dialogues: Euthypro, Apology, Crito, Meno, Phaedo (Second Edition). Indianapolis: Hackett Pub Co, 2002. Print.
Negative Impacts of Computer Technology Essay best college essay help
Table of Contents The Nano-Chip Implants
Negative impacts of computer technology
Personal Obligation and Web Content
Social Websites and Employee Character Analysis
The Nano-Chip Implants These chips have been designed using nanotechnology. Their basic working principle is based on computer programming. These chips have the ability to perform various functions. For instance, they can erase human memory, enhance the ability of human memory, boost the effectiveness of the brain, utilize the human senses in computer systems, and also detect anomalies in the human body.
Therefore, the chips are indeed one of the greatest scientific inventions of this era. The scientist who came up with this technology hoped that it would make life more interesting and comfortable for all human beings.
The capability of the chips to monitor human senses has made it possible to be used by the security agencies. The results are tremendous since the eye can be used as a camera while the ear can perform the function of a microphone. The security personnel have been transformed to moving surveillance cameras.
They hardly get sick or emotional since the parts that trigger emotions have been erased. This technology has completely managed to curb most of the chronic infections. An early detection method even without the knowledge of the affected person has boosted the healthcare sector. The use of the nano-chips has finally given rise to a super human.
However, this type of technology has some shortfalls. For instance, the nano-chips are very small and can be induced through ingestion. This has significantly interfered with the human’s right to privacy because any individual can be used as a camera to monitor other people.
The technology’s capability in terms of memory manipulation is also threatening to wipe out humanity. Mankind will be converted to perfect machines without emotions, family ties, and cultural beliefs.
Negative impacts of computer technology The 21st century has witnessed the desire to incorporate computing technology in several aspects of our daily lives. As such, a computer is turning out to be a necessity in every person’s life. This technology has tremendous negative effects to humanity in. For example, advances made in computing knowledge have led to sophisticated acts of crime and elimination of several employment opportunities that were initially done manually.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The societal values have also changed remarkably due to increased computer use. Currently family values in some cultures have been eroded. For example, young people may have quick access to adult content from online sources. Besides, members of the society no longer understand how to socialize face to face due to increased use of social media. Computing knowledge has equally made it easy to make fake identities.
Digital crimes have become a norm as many people continue to gain access to computer literacy. The most common crime is piracy. The latter has been enhanced because most media files have been converted to digital formats and therefore easy to produce copies.
Piracy is a major impediment towards the growth of the music industry. Online hackers are also on the increase. Confidential information can easily be accessed when someone gains access to private data through a computer. There are increasing instances of money laundering and theft from banks. Since most confidential files and records are stored in computers, they can easily be deleted remotely.
Computer systems have the ability of performing work faster than human beings. A single computer with one operator can perform work that could have been done by several people. This has resulted into massive unemployment. It has affected the livelihoods of many individuals across the employment field.
The negative effects associated with the use of computers can be managed in various ways. The manufacturers of computers should design these devices in such a way that they both healthy to use and also do not erode our values.
Computers should be designed with improved security protocols that can assist in eliminating digital crimes. In addition, employment opportunities should be boosted by various governments across the world because computerization of the systems has negatively impacted the availability of job opportunities.
Personal Obligation and Web Content The number of personal websites has increased significantly in the recent past. Besides, sharing information on these websites has also been on the increase. This information is used for academic purposes and also when handling emergencies such as first aid instructions, general knowledge, and several other aspects of life. This implies that the contents on websites have become increasingly vital in the contemporary society.
We will write a custom Essay on Negative Impacts of Computer Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The information available on website are supposed to be accurate bearing in mind that there are millions of web users who rely website contents on a daily basis. Currently, measures that have been put in place to enhance authentic publication of web content are quite limited. This leaves all the obligations to owners of websites to ensure that the contents posted are appropriate and accurate.
We live in a society where character is judged based on our actions. If a website owner wants be credited, then it is pertinent to ensure that the information being released to the public is indeed credible.
The internet has so far become a rich source of learning resources. It is a type of resource that has proved to be cost effective and easily accessible. As it stands now, the internet and related web content are largely used for informative purposes. Therefore, it cannot be neglected as a learning resource.
The governments and major players in the industry have put up measures that are believed will protect the internet as a vital part of human life. This initiative will not succeed if the owners of websites do not feel ethically obligated to provide the most credible services to internet users who access their websites.
Social Websites and Employee Character Analysis The code of morality has been developed since time immemorial. There are myriads of values that have been adopted while others have been completely dropped from human civilization. The current age is definitely in a phase of moral crisis. This has been worsened by the widespread exposure to social networking websites.
Ethical standards are based on truth alone. How sure do these employers know that what they are reading from social networking sites is true about that person they are interviewing? These employers should try to get a distinction between personal and public or professional life.
These two are completely different and should not be mixed. A good example is a person who was denied a job opportunity because of a letter written online when the person was still a student. The letter denied the person employment opportunities until when it was withdrawn.
When a person is applying for a job, the past personal interests should never play a role in determining the effectiveness of that individual. College and work life are very different. It is therefore difficult to predict the true nature of a person based on social networking sites.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Negative Impacts of Computer Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Sub-Optimization of The Canadian Food Production System Essay argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Organic production of forage and cereal crops
Organic production of fruits and vegetables
Organic livestock production
Quality and value of organic products
Introduction Sub-optimization refers to a situation in which objectives of a sub-system prevail at the expense of the objectives of a system. This occurs when a system produces limited output compared to what it is capable of producing. In addition, sub-optimization also results in a situation where there is poor co-ordination of the elements and parts involved in the interplay.
In the Canadian food production system, sub-optimization has been caused by lack of appropriate coordination of production activities in the nation. The lack of coordination in the Canadian government exists among consumers, the government and the farmers. The lack of coordination has been caused by different goals among these groups.
The consumers in the nation seek to be offered commodities that meet their needs at an affordable cost. On the other hand, the farmers need high profits while the government needs control aimed at protecting the interest of the public. This has led to sub-optimization of food production through the introduction of organic farming underpinned by public demand.
However, these groups can achieve a common objective that meets their interests. Organic farming has sub-optimized the food production system through a variety of crops. These include cereal and forage crops. Vegetable and fruits have also been organically produced.
In addition, the production of livestock products has also been organically achieved. Furthermore, the use of integrated weed and pest management methods has formed a crucial tool in the Canadian organic farming system.
Organic production of forage and cereal crops Forage and cereal crops have been produced organically in Canada. This is because these crops have a low vulnerability to pest pressure. Their nutrient requirements are also lower than other crops. The production of cereals such as soya bean has been achieved through organic farming. However, the challenge of weeds still presents a challenge in the production of soya beans.
Corn production has also thrived in Canada because of organic farming. The production of corn using organic methods has presented the farmers with the challenge of fertility and weed management. The challenge of fertility is due to the high nitrogen requirement of this cereal.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To address this challenge, farmers grow corn after the growth and harvesting of forage legumes. The current international market for organic cereals has risen. This is owed to their increased use in animals feeding. Canadian farmers have strived to obtain high profits from this opportunity.
Organic production of fruits and vegetables Vegetables and fruits have also been grown in Canada using organic practices. Farmers, however, have witnessed several challenges in their production. Diseases and pests have caused significant problems in the organic production of vegetables and fruits. The Canadian government is making steps in regulating diseases and pest through the introduction of bio- pesticides that are organically approved.
The production of organic horticultural crops to be sold in the markets is always lower than that produced using non-organic methods. This leads to lack of adequate benefits to farmers in relation to income generated from these crops. On the other hand, consumers prefer organic crops to other crops because of their high qualities.
In response to this problem, farmers have adopted value addition systems at farm levels. This has enabled them to obtain sufficient sales thus, making substantial profits. Some of the methods that they have adopted include production of jellies, jams and juices. They have capitalized on these products because they have a long shelf life.
Organic livestock production Organic farming is also used to produce livestock products in Canada. This is because the market for organic dairy products has increased. This has been successful because feeds are organically grown in most of the farms in the country. The government of Canada ensures that the meat products are free from avian, mammalian and fish by-products. In addition, it also prohibits all genetically produced substances.
The government stipulates that animals identified with traces of these substances should be separated from the organic livestock herds. The separated animal cannot be sold for slaughter or production of organic meat products. Vaccination is only allowed in situations in which livestock diseases cannot be regulated by other organic methods.
Quality and value of organic products Production of food using organic method ensures that interests of consumers, farmers, and government are met. Organically produced foods have higher returns than food products produced using non-organic methods. The premiums obtained from organic crops depend on the consumer markets handled by farmers. This is because consumers play a significant role in the prices of commodities.
We will write a custom Essay on Sub-Optimization of The Canadian Food Production System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Various consumer markets include; consumers, retailers, wholesalers and processers. High prices of organic commodities ensure that the production costs of the farmers are lowered. Thus, organically produced foods are of high quality and adequately meet the demands of various consumers. In addition, it enables authorities to have control over all activities relating to farming, products and their prices.
Conclusion In conclusion, the food production system in Canada has been sub-optimized through emphasis on organic farming as opposed to other farming methods. Organic farming ensures that the interests of the government, consumers and farmers are met.
Crime custom essay help: custom essay help
This essay focuses on the depiction of law and agents of law in the American films Young Mr. Lincoln and The Man Who Shot Liberty Valance. These are films with legal concepts in representation of the law. These films depict drama within courtrooms during the delivery of justice. Law films may provide some fundamental insights on how the criminal justice system works.
The major concern is whether these depictions do portray facts or provide useful insights to viewers. However, we have to recognise that films tend to portray surprising and dramatic events instead of providing factual accounts of cases.
Films are parts of popular cultures, which influence law and justice systems. Friedman notes that popular culture is “a part of law and some of the most obvious aspects of laws are exceedingly prominent in popular cultures” (Friedman, 1989).
Concerns of whether such depictions are “influential, acceptable, or accurate” (Rafter, 2006) lead to many questions. Creations of courtroom films have resulted from the public’s fascination and the desire to understand the criminal justice system. Some of the notable trials include OJ Simpson in the US, and Louise Woodward trial in the UK (Rapping, 2003).
We have to note that films and other popular news channels do not convey the real courtroom drama. Given the role of popular media in shaping the public perception, the public will understand “lawyers and law processes through diverse channels” (Rafter, 2006).
We have to ask whether law films are extensions of the criminal justice system or whether they compromise the integrity and the delivery of justice. Law films may portray various social issues and the courtroom as a centre for the drama. In this sense, law films and television series show that the public can also debate legal issues and determine legal consequences.
We realise how the issue of depiction of agents of law and the criminal justice system is complex when we review contemporary films. Machura observes that law films usually have both justice and injustice figures. Injustice figure creates the discrepancy in the justice system.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, the justice figure comes as a hero in order to resolve the situation (Machura, 2007). The main of aims of law films are to portray the idea of justice to viewers. The general belief is that the law provides justice in a dispute. In the film, Young Mr. Lincoln, we look at the idea of right and wrong in the delivery of justice.
We can also observe that the process of delivering justice is a major challenge. For instance, lawyers must go beyond the written law and find solutions in moral arguments. In the film, Henry Fonda (Lincoln) demonstrates that lawyers can deviate from the written law in order to achieve justice to suspects. They may bring a moral argument as Lincoln does, “I may not know so much about the law, but I know what’s right and what’s wrong”.
Young Mr. Lincoln is a manipulative film. Lincoln achieves a high status in a short time than expected. It shows a rookie lawyer, who delivers justice to accused brothers. This transformation represents unrealistic aspects of law films. Such a transformation enhances the delivery of justice.
At the same time, such changes influence the process of an actual delivery of justice. If we analyse Young Mr. Lincoln within its context, then we see a young lawyer, who experiences transformation in order to deliver justice.
Law films may also depict cooperation or hostility among agents of law. In some cases, lawyers may work together. Still, the presiding judge and lawyers may also cooperate in a case. This is what Young Mr. Lincoln portrays when the judge supports the lawyer during the trial (Machura, 2007). Such acts of cooperation may also extend to interrogation procedures in order to establish the legal truth to a case.
Young Mr. Lincoln raises concerns related to how a legal system works to deliver justice. In other words, it focuses on who should the justice system favours. Law films tend to create extraordinary lawyers. For instance, in Young Mr. Lincoln, the lawyer claims that he does not know much about law.
However, he tends to show that we should rely on natural law or use common sense during trials. In this context, lawyers should use the law to protect law-abiding citizens and not to protect powerful individuals. Therefore, the justice system should work in any given circumstance, irrespective of the experience of the lawyer.
We will write a custom Essay on Crime
Market Entry Strategies for MNEs and SMEs Essay college admissions essay help
The methods to enter a given market are significant for any firm willing to diversify its operations while increasing and expanding its operations. MNEs corporations are mainly large and dominant in their domestic markets and often seek ways to diversify in order to increase their scale of operations while minimizing risks in domestic markets.
On their part, SMEs are still growing and seek opportunity to diversify their activities while growing to full potential. As they seek to undertake a manufacturing venture in a foreign market, both SMEs and MNEs utilize some entry techniques as examined in this paper (Doole
Alexander McQueen: A Bibliography Essay essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Alexander the Designer
Introduction Alexander McQueen is regarded as the most significant British fashion figure. Beginning his career at the tender age of 17, McQueen was able to accomplish great success at an early age and by the time he was 27 years old, he had gained worldwide repute for his fascinating designs. For two decades, he was able to intrigue the fashion world with his novel designs and gain many awards for his efforts.
Early Life McQueen was born on March 17, 1969 in London’s East End to Ronald and Joyce McQueen. From an early age, McQueen demonstrated his exceptional tailoring skills, designing dresses for his siblings while still a child.1 McQueen was openly gay since childhood and this caused him to be bullied and teased at school. He quit school after his O levels and proceeded to seek an apprenticeship in fashion.
Career McQueen’s career in the fashion world started when he started training in London’s legendary Savile Row, which is the de facto home of bespoke tailoring, at the age of 17. While here, he gained the skills of bespoke tailoring and his mastery with needle and thread allowed him to execute avant garde designs with an exceptional craftsmanship.2
The apprenticeship at Savile Row was crucial for McQueen since the experienced he gained here helped him gain a reputation on the international fashion scene.
McQueen graduated from the Central Saint Martin’s College of Art and Design with an MA in Fashion design in 1992. His graduation collection based on Jack the Ripper and Victorian prostitutes dealt with the themes of sex and death and it proved to be a successful show that catapulted McQueen to the public scene.
Knox notes that McQueen’s humble upbringing in London’s East End made him something of an outsider in the fashion world.3 As such, a significant encounter in McQueen’s life was his meeting and subsequent friendship with the style guru, Isabella Blow.
Miss Blow purchased McQueen’s graduation collection and proceeded to act as his mentor. Blow helped McQueen gain a commercial footing and introduced him to key industry players.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Alexander the Designer The fashion shows that McQueen engaged in through the mid 1990s helped to propel him into the international scene and mark him out as an accomplished designer. Through these series of spectacular fashion shows, McQueen developed his aesthetic and gained attention from the international community.
Knox declares that Alexander McQueen set himself apart from other fashion designers such as Christian Dior or Yves Saint Laurent by coming up with designs that bust out of the commercial confines and reinvented the role of fashion in society.4 This declaration is supported by the fact that McQueen’s designs were iconic and inspired the wearer to epic artistic proportions.
McQueen’s initial collections were Victorian in inspiration.5 However, this first collection drew on the dark side of the era instead of the picturesque representation that many designers emphasized on in their works. The most common themes in McQueen’s work are sex, death, and commerce and how the three intertwined.6
His obsession with such themes led to McQueen being often accused of misogyny since his designs objectified his models in a twisted sexual manner. McQueen early work attracted shock and horror amongst the viewers. In his first show in March 1993, the designer’s models were scantily dressed and appeared battered and bruised.
In the next show in October of the same year, McQueen presented models in Edwardian jackets splattered with blood and dirt. Due to the grim nature of his work, the Independent newspaper titled his work as “McQueen’s Theatre of Cruelty”.7
Achievements In the course of his career, McQueen won a number of prestigious awards for his skill as a fashion designer. He was named “British Designer of the Year” for four times during his career, a record that few designers achieved.
The 2003 was especially significant for McQueen for it was during this year that he was appointed Commander of the Most Excellent Order of the British Empire. In the same year, the prestigious American fashion association, Council of Fashion Designers named him “International Designer of the Year”.8
We will write a custom Essay on Alexander McQueen: A Bibliography specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Death Alexander McQueen’s life came to a premature death following his suicide on 11th February 2010. Addley speculates that the fashion icon’s suicide may have been precipitated by the death of his adore mother nine days before.9 Throughout his Career, McQueen was able to gain a reputation as a skilled tailor and a creative designer.
His work inspired a generation of designers who cite this fashion genius as their most significant influence. Alexander McQueen will continue to be remembered as a fashion genius and his work will continue inspiring many people for decades after his death.
Bibliography Addley, Esther. “Alexander McQueen’s death mourned by fashion world.” The Guardian. 12 Feb. 2010. Web.
Brown, Chip. “The Kids are all right.” New York Magazine 30, no. 32 (1997): 110-116.
Evans, Caroline. Fashion at the Edge: Spectacle, Modernity
Teaching Methods- Mathematics Expository Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Introduction Performing mathematical operations successfully is dependent on the students’ understanding of the relationships between different operations. This paper discusses the relationship between additions and multiplication. It also shows how a good perception of the relationship aids students to understand the operations besides discussing the link between commutative, associative, and distributive properties.
Relationship between multiplication and addition operations
Multiplication is also termed as repeated addition (Reys, Lindquist, Lambdin
Generating Curiosity in Mathematics Essay cheap essay help
Table of Contents Strategies for Enhancing Curiosity in Mathematics
Purpose of the Strategies
How a teacher can apply the strategies in classroom settings
Strategies for Enhancing Curiosity in Mathematics One of strategies for enhancing curiosity in mathematics among students is making use of mathematical manipulatives. Manipulatives are obtained from day-to-day objects used by students. Using this strategy, curiosity is developed through connection of mathematical concepts with sensorimotor understanding coupled with explicit verbal-declarative skills.
Another strategy is making students work in groups. The third strategy is to teach all the students together and have one repeat the procedure to the rest. A reward may be given for correct repetition. Lastly, a teacher may use mathematical problems to create games for which every student would like to be part of. In the effort to become champions in a particular game, the students develop curiosity on how to work with numbers.
Purpose of the Strategies For successful performance in the games, when using games to create curiosity among children, a child endeavors to learn the rules of the game. Hence, when games are made such that they feature mathematical analogies, children become curious on how they can be able to learn the rules and the processes of determining the winner (Koch, 2010).
The purpose of mathematical manipulative strategy is to make children relate practical scenarios with the concepts taught in mathematics. For strategies of group work and having a single student teach the rest about something that has been taught previously, the purpose is to encourage students to become curious by learning from the mistakes made.
How a teacher can apply the strategies in classroom settings To use manipulatives to enhance curiosity in mathematics among students, a teacher can collect colored beads, blocks, or even sticks. He or she has to make the learners sample together blocks of the same color followed by requesting them to count each set of the blocks in an effort to get their answer.
Based on color differences, students learn that different objects have different mathematical representations. This strategy would make them become curious about other things, for instance, their number in class based on gender. Using gaming strategy to enhance math curiosity, the teacher needs to let the children engage in plays while keeping the record of scores for each session in the form of blocks with one block representing a score.
The blocks for different sessions also need to be different in color. When requested to identify the number of scores in all the games, the main problem would be how to count the total number of blocks. Since the winner will be the team having the largest number of blocks, children are able to have curiosity to understand the precedence of numbers through gaming and the process of determining the winner, which entails addition.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To induce math curiosity by having students work in groups, a teacher may give students a number of sticks to use in the computation of addition problems. Each student in the group is requested to carry out an addition task while explaining to the rest about every step.
When one student completes the task, another student in the same group is requested to also carry out the task. Rewards are given for students who achieve outstanding results. Rewarding not only motivates them but also makes the group members more curious about the process of using the sticks to arrive at the correct answers (Reys, Lindquist, Lambdin
Canada Corporations Business Environment Case Study essay help: essay help
The world is getting increasingly competitive. There are various players within the industry having similar products to offer the market. Customers are increasingly becoming demanding. They have increased knowledge, and therefore, know that there is always an option when they need a product. Suppliers on the other hand, have become more demanding.
They want to supply more products at increased cost citing increase in various factors of production. A firm always finds itself in such an awkward situation in the market. This would force the firm to come up with mechanisms through which it can outsmart other firms. It must be able to offer customers products that are unique in the market.
It must stand out as a firm that offers a positive change at regular interval to its customers. It is through this that it will be in a position to manage competition and come out as a successful firm in the market. This would be achievable if the strategies that the management comes up with are competitive enough to make it be seen as the best.
Estimated Income Statement for the Period that Ended 10 Feb 2013
Item Value $ Income Profits on Sale Profits on Tangible Net worth Sales of tangible Net Worth Sales of Inventory Expenses Cost of goods sold Net Income 2.7 15.6 5.9 5.7 29.9 Cost of goods sold= sales- profits. Cos= (5.9 5.7)- (2.7) 8.9 21 ROI= Gains from Investment- Cost of Investment
Cost of Investment = (29.9-8.9) /8.9 = 2.36
Market Analysis for the Firm The target market for Canada Corporations varies in their demographic space. Although the firm has a large customer base from the local residence of Miami and the larger Florida, a good number of customers of this firm are travelers. The firm receives a high number of travelers who come from various regions around the world, who need their products while on vacation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This firm has decided to take care of the interest of the customers in this area because they form the main customer base for this firm. The products can also be marketed in the international market easily. Women clothing is very marketable in the international markets. However, it requires a heavy marketing procedure to make products of one firm different from that of another firm.
This firm has been able to make its products stand out in the market. This makes this firm one of the firms that has had massive success in this market. Drastic changes in designs of the clothes are also on the rise globally. Some of the designs are very expensive.
The management decided to focus on the complex dressing because of the value generated from that sale. Most of the travelers who come to Miami have the capacity to pay for the expensive cost of these trendy dresses.
Developing a competitive advantage is one of the key success factors in a business environment. It enables a business unit stand out above the rest, as a firm that has the capacity to offer customers satisfaction in the best way possible. As stated above, the target audiences are the locals and travelers who come to Miami as travelers, and the residents of Florida.
The firm targets the middle and upper class individuals who have the capacity to afford the high cost that the firm charges. Canada Corporations has made an effort to ensure that it can attract potential clients from various regions across the world. Product proposition is always the best way that a firm can acquire a special niche in the market and stand out as the best firm.
To manage this, this firm should focus on the quality of the product they provide other than the cost. It should use social media alongside mass media in reaching out for the customers. This way, it will be appealing to the middle and upper class clients who can pay premium prices for better products.
To further improve customer experience, the management should consider offering recreational services both to the customers and their families when they visit the facility. Miami is one of the most preferred recreational centers in the world. Customers and their families should experience this even when shopping around.
We will write a custom Case Study on Canada Corporations Business Environment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When making changes on the website, it is important to let customers, and even non-customers know about it. They should be informed of the added quality to the website following the changes that have been made. There are a number of online strategies that a firm can use to let customers know about these changes.
Search engine optimization is one of the best online strategies that a firm can use to reach out for the customers with this news. In this strategy, the firm will need to create product-specific page with all the new features and the desired communication to the target audience.
The page should have necessary photos and various others feature that are distinct from the previous website. The firm should ensure that the page is coded appropriately for search, with key words, header text, title tags and unique URL.
This will benefit the firm because those who will key-in the key words will be directed to this site, and this will be a form of advertisement. To the customers, it would easily allow them access to important information about their firm without struggling to look for the changes.
Another good approach is by using e-mail marketing. This strategy is appropriate when dealing with customers that have close relationship with the firm. In this strategy, the firm will develop appropriate message in regard to the changes made on the product. The firm will then select customers and other specific individuals who should be receiving the message.
The firm will then send message to these individuals via their e-mails over the changes made on the website. This strategy is very beneficial both to the firm and the customers.
To the firm, the management will be assured that the message will reach the target audience. It also helps the firm assure its customers that it cares about them by sending them a message about changes they have made. The customer will benefit from the fact that the message will reach him or her promptly.
Online advertising is another strategy that can be used to inform the target audience of the changes that could have taken place within the firm. Such tools as Google AdWords can be useful in reaching out to the target audience directly. This strategy is always very useful when the firm targets a large target audience.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Canada Corporations Business Environment by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The marketing department should conduct a research and determine blogs which are most widely read in that particular industry. The firm will benefit from this move because it will not only be developing a relationship with the customers, but also help the firm develop a close relationship with the bloggers.
Social network forms another attractive strategy through which this firm can reach out for the target audience. The world is changing very fast due to the changes brought about by advanced technology. Smartphone and personal computers have become basic items in the lives of many youths. Many of the youths visit various social sites on a daily basis. Facebook has a fan base of more than one billion people.
This cuts across various demographic spaces, with majority being youths from various social statuses. YouTube has almost a similar number of users, with over eight hundred others on Tweeter.
There are other social sites that are used by various individuals. When a firm makes a decision to use this site, it would be certain that it will be in a position to reach a large number of people through these networks. Customers will also be able to reach this information with a lot of ease. They can get the message from friends who are also on Facebook.
Adjustments Needed The firm should also offer online purchase to its customers as a way of making their experience better. This will help it solve the issue of seasonality in this industry. The firm will be able to attract customers throughout the year. This will eliminate cases where production cost is higher than sales generated. The issue of insecurity can be handled through public-private partnership projects.
Insecurity is an issue that is arising from the external environment. It is therefore, not easy for a firm to approach it as an individual. This firm should partner with other private firms and engage the government of the United States and the Public at large to combat crime and terrorism.
Individually, the firm should install state-of-the-art facilities that can help detect internet criminals when one tries to infiltrate their websites. It is through this that the firm will be assured of relative security in their facilities.
The team members were concerned of the increasing threat that this firm was facing from various competitors in the market. They were in agreement that this industry has had a massive development in the 21st century. For this firm to be successful, it must consider adopting the following recommendations.
The management should consider moving most of its operational activities online. It should consider making the process of booking the products, and payments of the services online. This will reduce operational activities within the firm.
The management should consider improving the value they offer customers. This may include offering additional benefits to the customers such as free transportation within Miami. This will increase levels of satisfaction of customers.
The management should improve the security of the facility. It should install detectors, and other machines that can help detect and prevent the use of harmful weapons by criminals.
The management should embrace corporate social responsibility, especially on environment as a way of increasing its popularity.
Implementing the above recommendations will have a number of advantages to the firm. However, it also comes with a number of challenges that this firm must be ready to face. The firm must be ready to face these challenges when it decides to implement these strategies.
Purchase of a Franchise Essay argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Assessment of the Risk and Returns of the Franchise Investment
Factors to Be Considered For a Franchise Investment
Laws Giving Special Protections to the Franchisee
Introduction Organizations and individual entrepreneurs continue to adopt more innovative approaches to business. Evidently, globalization and technological developments have played crucial roles in this business. Generally, these two factors have increased the rate of business processes. It is observable that brands have advanced beyond their domestic and regional markets (Schell 2011).
There is a notable platform for global business negotiation and franchise opportunities. There are several fundamental elements to be considered while establishing and conducting an international franchise. Strategies applicable in the management of complications associated with international franchise are eminent within all sectors of investment.
Entrepreneurs interested in franchise business must take into consideration the crucial challenges. Ideally, the basic objective is always to minimize the negative implications of franchise operations. Precaution and effective examination is vital for all parties interested in the global franchise business (Lorette 2013). This paper presents critical considerations to be undertaken during the establishment of a franchise investment.
Additionally, it describes the process of assessment of the risks and returns associated with the business. There is a description of the laws providing special protections to the franchisee. The report also indicates vital analysis and recommendations to be adopted by the franchisees.
Assessment of the Risk and Returns of the Franchise Investment The report focuses on investment in the franchise within the Canadian hospitality industry. For this segment of international franchise, the interested parties must consider a variety of factors. However, it is vital for them to examine the risks and returns linked with this global franchise initiative. Canada is strategically fit for the establishment of the franchise.
Particularly, the country faces a huge influx of tourists and international travels (Herman 2013). This enables the hospitality industry to realize great revenues and profits. Therefore, it is the ideal destination for the establishment of this kind of investment. It is imperative to indicate that Canada has one of the greatest potential markets for the franchise sector.
The nation borrows a lot of franchise strategies and ideas from the major U.S business industry. Those involved in the franchise industry must note that Canada has distinct features. These might have severe business implications. Such important characteristics include the unique regional and the demographic elements. These factors require adequate attention for the business to realize its targeted success.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Franchising is a process in which the private businesspersons purchase the entitlements to establish and manage a site of a potential company (Arthur 2000). Regulatory concerns within Canada must be fully complied with during the process. The franchisor and the franchisee must be engaged in a legal contract.
The contract must indicate and explain the terms and conditions in a comprehensive manner. There are a variety of advantages and disadvantages associated with the franchise business. These must be noted before the franchisee signs the legal business contract.
The franchisee must note that the foremost procedure is to analyze and accent to the terms indicated within the contract. Failure to observe this consideration might lead to the experience of potential losses by the franchisee. The Canadian hospitality industry borrows certain regulations indicated in the “international franchise association” (IFA) charter.
Nonetheless, other regulatory frameworks emanate from the statutory provisions in Canada (Arthur 2000). The franchisee interested in the Canadian hospitality is entitled to several benefits. They are likely to obtain adequate familiarity with the company’s name.
In addition, the impact of the original company’s culture, brand and training may help in the development of a powerful franchise stature. These merits are vital for the successful running g the franchise business in Canada.
The franchisee is likely to benefit from the bustling hospitality industry in different ways. The high level of revenue recorded from the tourist sector is set to minimize the probability of failure of the franchise. The explicit Canadian business and investment policies might also lead to a considerable level of business success.
The parent company might be willing to extend its innovative practices to the franchise (Elgin 2002). These might include human resource training and apprenticeship. Employee welfare is one of the crucial elements of success. It must be extended to the franchise organization.
We will write a custom Essay on Purchase of a Franchise specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Generally, provision of a support strategy to the franchise owner has positive implications on its overall performance. The franchisee must face the elementary risk of raising the rights required for operation of the franchise. There are additional costs required to develop the necessary enterprises and functional systems. This may also cover employee remuneration.
The Canadian business laws must be complied with to the maximum level. These also include other necessities involving tax regulations and costs incurred during business licensing. The costs involving the authorization of the capacity to run and manage a franchise in the Canadian hospitality vary in a significant manner. The franchise entrepreneur may remain liable for other constant expenditures.
These might have negative implications on the business. Indicatively, they differ in orientation, such as those linked to the royalties and use of the name or brand of the mother company. In the end, such identifiable on-going expenditures might deeply minimize the level of expected profits (Lorette 2013). Other potential precautions might increase the level of associated business risks.
For instance, the Canadian franchise is still under refinement. Therefore, certain laws might predispose the franchisee to significant levels of risks. Certain regulations underlined within the franchise contracts appear very stringent and punitive to the business owners. The owners of the franchise must also comply with the contract. The aim is to reduce the likelihood of termination of the contract.
Factors to Be Considered For a Franchise Investment There are diverse factors to be considered for a franchise investment in the Canadian hospitality industry. The franchisee must know that Canada has restrictions on trademarks. Canadian authorities only safeguard legally registered trademarks.
The power to register such trademarks is only exercised by the federal government. The importation of franchise laws from the U.S must be avoided. Particularly, the franchisee must consider innovative techniques applicable within the hospitality industry. Regulations that advocate for individual franchises must be reviewed (Schell 2011).
There are different franchise investment policies within distinct regions in Canada. These include the “grant master franchise and development agreements.” Observably, these franchise agreements remain unique for every province in Canada. Integration of the domestic businesspersons in the franchise process must be considered.
This is because it is a fundamental initiative that improves the level of engagement of local communities in the franchise process. It is also critical for the franchisee to adopt the “Canada oriented marketing.” This enables them to enhance the brand and extend the local market for the franchise (Herman 2013).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Purchase of a Franchise by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This initiative shall help the franchise business to flourish within Canada. The “Canadian franchise association”, (CFA) plays a crucial role in the regulation and protection of the franchisees. Therefore, the franchisee must examine and be conversant with the regulatory measures in the CFA.
Laws Giving Special Protections to the Franchisee The provincial disclosure provisions are evident in three of the major provinces in Canada. Ideally, this provision offers the franchisee a special kind of cushion and protection from exploitation by the mother organization.
There are other provinces with necessary protective legislations for the franchisee. Generally, these regulations have different monitoring agencies throughout Canada (Herman 2013).
Some of the regulatory frameworks indicated under the provincial disclosure in Ontario and Alberta are aligned with those of the U.S. This regulation subjects the franchisor to certain conditions that must be attained before any business contract is signed by the potential investors.
For instance, all of the parties are required to make public all the material information regarding the deal. The “uniform franchise commission of Canada” is in the process of establishing a universal franchise law.
Recommendations The franchisee must be aware of all legal requirements of the business within Canada. Additionally, it is vital to consider the refinement of these regulations. This shall help to enhance the development of a fully protective and regulatory authority.
The hospitality sector is one of the leading franchise industries with approximately 40% records (Schell 2011). However, many precautionary measures must be exercised to ensure minimal losses. The franchisee must be keen to develop effective and transparent business partnerships.
Comprehensive documentation and legal consultations are critical components of the franchise business. Stringent measures are appropriate in the practice of franchise business. It is also upon every investor to examine the franchise contracts before they accent to any conditions.
Works Cited Arthur, A. Canada’s Hospitality Sector; Consolidation, Consolidation, Consolidation. 2000. Web.
Elgin, J. Choosing a Legal Form for Your Franchise. 2002. Web.
Herman, M. International Franchising. 2013. Web.
Lorette, K. Definition of a Franchise Business. 2013. Web.
Schell, C. Canadian Franchise Industry. 2011. Web.
Understanding Material Culture by Ian Woodward Essay (Book Review) custom essay help
Introduction Things we possess and own form part of our culture. These things shape our identity as they have a direct influence on us. In this article, I undertake a review of the book Understanding Material Culture authored by Ian Woodward. This book basically explains what material culture entails in a manner that is easily understood. The book specifically shows that consumption is an act of culture creation.
Ian Woodward makes a very comprehensive and yet simple to understand approach in discussing material culture. He organizes his ideas in a pragmatic manner making it a very useful starter text for students as well as an accompaniment for even the experts in this field.
Using illustrations, the author discusses various aspects of material culture in manner that does not deviate from the main objective of the book which is to show the reader that consumption is part of culture creation and not slavery to culture industries.
Understanding Material Culture
The book is divided into four parts with a total of nine chapters taking up to 201 pages. The chapters in each of the four parts are structured well. Each chapter starts with a summary of the main points covered and at the end the author makes a short but detailed suggestion for further reading.
The parts support each other and going through each is necessary in order to have a good understanding of the part that will follow. These parts are reviewed below and their significance is highlighted.
Locating Material Culture This part discusses material culture in an introductory manner. This is done by examining the main concepts and terms common to material culture studies. A few case studies are highlighted to show the significance of understanding material culture in everyday life.
As illustrated in the case of Helen, materials have aesthetic value (Woodward 6). Materials can also act as identifiers – people identify with different objects and the value attached to different objects differs from one person to another.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Remark
This part is important in showing that people do not just buy objects without a reason or because of being compelled by some forces but rather that consumption is made to fulfill some need. Indeed the author argues that industries in the process of production aspire to find out what people need and produce goods that satisfy that need.
Theoretical Approaches to Studying Material Culture This part examines the ideas of significant authors who made remarkable contribution to the field of material culture. Marx’s views are first to be analyzed. The author points out weaknesses in Marx’s views on objects that people own. Marx observed that capitalism advanced exploitation of some classes of people and predicted that there was no possibility that it would keep on progressing.
On the other hand, Lukacs’ views tried to address the weak sections in Marx’s observations. Lukacs tried to explain why men cannot rebel against abusive systems: he argued that products are deceptive and they blind people from seeing that the process of production is oppressive.
This part also examines the Critical Theory as discussed by the Frankfurt School scholars. The author observes that the views and observations presented through the Critical Theory are relevant today and actually explain the production of commodities on large scale. He also examines the role of tastes and preferences in material culture.
This part is used wisely to bring out the views of previous authors who view the act of consumption as one that progresses enslavement of some class of people. The views that objects are deceptive and are symbols of enslavement best described as “crystallizations of the sweat, blood and energy of workers” (Woodward 38) are discussed.
Objects in Action The third part examines the process through which objects turn from being just objects into acquiring status, aesthetic value and personal taste. It also looks at the correlation between material culture and identity. It shows how objects help in the formation of social identities and collective identities.
This part shows that objects acquire cultural significance through narratives and performances. The manner in which an object is talked about shows how it is valued. An object which is not valued is usually ignored and the role it plays is often not recognized. A narrative brings a social life into an object and makes it a social object.
We will write a custom Book Review on Understanding Material Culture by Ian Woodward specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Objects are also said to have “performative capacity” (Woodward 152). This happens when an object and a person become symbolic and complement each other. For instance, a bus conductor and a mobile ticket machines complement each other.
This part best brings out the argument that consumption is an act of creating culture and that it is made consciously without any form of enforcement. This part shows how objects make who we are. It is shown that the objects a person buys are for specific needs which are unique to the buyer. This is actually why the author considers consumption an art that requires skills.
Part four makes the concluding remarks. The author recounts the significant ideas covered in the previous chapters and makes important remarks about them. The author has included a list of reference used in the book after the conclusion.
Critical Remarks This book helps to create a new understanding of material culture. In a comprehensive manner, it refutes bourgeoisie ideologies on consumption as proposed by Marx and chooses to view consumers as conscious beings who make deliberate choices of objects. The book views acts of consumption as emanating from the artistic nature of consumers as opposed to being due to manipulation.
This book helps us to understand that acts of consumption are meant to bring out personality. In regard to consumption, the author claims that it is “merely one part of the process of building culture, through continuously expending, rebuilding and expending bits of it” (Woodward 97). It shows that objects have some influence on us though that does not mean that objects control us.
The illustration of a home used in the book is best in understanding the argument of the author that consumption is an artistic act by the consumer. The home is used as a showroom by the owners for self expression. The organization of a home and the furnishing made speaks much about the material culture of the owner. It is easy to learn a lot about the material culture of a person by examining his or her home.
In reviewing Woodward’s book, Ossewaarde is in agreement that consumers create culture through consumption. He argues that consumptions should not be regarded as an act of slavery to capitalist systems but rather an act of culture creation (Ossewaarde 783).
In the process of consumption, Woodward views choice and taste as key components, he says, “making choices is a fundamental skill, perhaps a duty, required for people who live in a consumer society…taste is a core component of this” (Woodward 6).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Understanding Material Culture by Ian Woodward by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion Understanding Material Culture is a text which attempts to show the significance of consumption in creation of a culture. The author refutes that consumption originates from manipulation by capitalistic systems and culture industries. He instead views consumption as an art which requires the skills of choice and taste.
Works Cited Ossewaarde, Marinus. “Joint Reviews.” Sociology 43.4 (2009): 782-785. Print.
Woodward, Ian. Understanding Material Culture. London: Sage Publications, 2007. Print.
Description of the Beach Scene in summer Essay essay help online free: essay help online free
Summer is the perfect time for individuals to visit and enjoy the marvelous scenes along the coast. In addition, the feelings and experiences felt in the beach during the summer are always fantastic. Several sceneries and experiences are seen and felt at the beach during summer. These include; the plantation along the beach and inside the sea, the animals, the waters and the people found in the beach.
The beach appears to be live and joyful with the presence of the natural vegetation. There are evergreen plantations both along and inside the beach. Images of buoyant sea weeds can be seen along the shore. Palms trees are seen to stand tall along the beach dancing to the tune of the breeze emanating from the waters of the sea.
The sea grapes and the sea oats are also observed gathered in clusters in the sea next to the shore. There colored flowers are splendid and brightens at the shining of the summer sun. The sweet scent of the flower grapes sends a signal to the world about the hope brought by nature.
The atmosphere is fully intensified by the aroma produced by the buoyant sea flowers. In addition, from a far, images of leafless trees are also observed. The perfect combination of the vegetation along the beach and inside the sea displays the beauty of nature to the highest peak.
It mesmerizes the eyes to gaze at the beautiful creatures that hover all over the beach and on the deep-sea waters. There are sights of beautiful birds that fly all over the dry shore land and over the seawaters. Their colored feathers brightened the sea with marvelous appearance at their illumination by the sun rays.
There are varieties of birds that are in the vicinity. For instance, there are pelicans and seagulls. Pelicans are seen hovering over the sand singing sweet melodies that make the atmosphere at the beach vibrant. The seagulls are also observed to be flying over the seawaters in small groups. Some of the birds are gathered in groups spreading the wings that cloaked a soft shadow on the gentle water ripples.
Next to the shore, there are sea turtles that seem to enjoy the summer heat from the sun. Their eggs are also seen to be exposed on the sand by the children that play on the shoreline. Bees are seen flying from one flower to another over the sea grapes. The humming of the bees as they gather nectar from the sea flowers attracts insect eating birds.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Large crowds are observed all over the seashore. These people come enjoy themselves in the beach at this period of the year. In the sea, people of all ages and sexes are seen swimming and playing with the cool seawaters. The scotching heat from the summer sun is felt on the forehead of all individuals.
This makes the people chill themselves in the cool waters of the sea. The children are seen playing beach ball the shore line. Some children are also seen to pelt each other with sand on the shoreline. Besides, young boys are observed climbing the tall palm trees to gather fruits.
What is more, several activities take place along and inside the shoreline. Vendors are seen carrying ice creams and soft drinks all over the shoreline. Views of homes, hotels and other buildings that run along the peak of the beach are also seen. On the sand where children play, pieces of shells are scattered.
In most cases, children collect the shells for fun. In the shades built along the shoreline, people are seen reading books, journals and magazines. Some are seen idling on the sand while few adults are observed playing football.
However, there is a disgusting scene of plastic bags, cigarette butts, food wrappers and beer bottle along the beach. These items seem to pollute the entire shoreline and the seawaters.
Anglers are also observed far into the sea casting large nets into the waters to have a bulk catch of their prey. Some of the anglers are also observed perching on the edge of the shore carrying sticks in their hands. Their faces displayed anticipation that they had for their prey.
The deep waters of the sea produce a marvelous view at anyone who gazes at the sea. The water is seen to be slowly running low on the shore. Small waves are also observed crashing on the shoreline. The surface of the sea is seen to appear blue in color.
We will write a custom Essay on Description of the Beach Scene in summer specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, some portions are also seen to have the spectrum that results from the sun’s refracted rays. Deep inside the sea, there are high waves that lift boats up and down mightily. The shimmering waves of the sea that are clear and blue mirror the rays of the hot sun. The refreshing breeze that emanates from the seawaters is enjoyable.
In conclusion, the beach has a perfect view and activities that are delightful to experience during the summer. It is a place that everyone one would love to be at all times.
Japan versus Korean economic miracles Essay college essay help online
Introduction Japan and Korea did not follow the same economic development models. While some similarities stand out between these two nations, it is clear that the internal and external circumstances in both countries were dramatically different. These differences in policies and strategies explain why models of economic growth in Japan and Korea were unique to each country.
Why some scholars think that Korea and Japan used similar economic models Korea and Japan were countries that heavily relied on government intervention for the development of their economies. In Japan, the government was a key determinant of economic success, and it achieved this goal through centralized planning. It offered incentives to businesses as well as capital and information to crucial industries.
Furthermore, it protected businesses from foreign competition while at the same time encouraged competition within targeted industries. Likewise, South Korea’s government pursued an aggressive economic development agenda. The government took part in provision of investment resources among central industries. Korean exports were forced upon players who would pursue growth without compromise.
The focus on exports was also a crucial driver of economic growth in both countries. Their governments believed that it was crucial to maintain a healthy balance of trade by encouraging greater exportation and less importation.
These institutions used different policies to achieve this intention of being a net exporter. Nonetheless, most of their target markets were also quite similar, and they included countries in the west such as the US.
Both countries experienced periods of rapid economic growth rates but these were not without some fluctuations. In Korea, the problems were particularly common in the 60s and 70s. Likewise, Japan also underwent periods of economic stagnation within the 70s.
Prior to the economic boom in both countries, agricultural was the mainstay of both economies. However, these nations industrialized rapidly. Their products proliferated into the global market, and they changed their stories from that of desperate dependent nations to strong industrial economies.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some scholars draw similarities between the central planning in both countries. Japan has the Ministry of Trade and Industry while Korea had the Economic Planning Board. These entities determined the pace at which economic growth took place through directed economic policies.
Why Korea and Japan did not ascribe to similar economic models While both economies had immense government involvement in economic development, it is quite clear that the strategies pursued by these governments were quite dissimilar. Korea’s focus was on explicit export growth. It is worked with large Korean firms, known as chaebol, to set targets that would entitle them to immense benefits.
These incentives included tax cuts, preferential credit access, loan access and high administrative support. On the other hand, Japan’s export strategy was as a result of the growth of heavy industries.
Steel, electric and shipping industries had immense production capacities, which allowed them to supply material to the local market as well as to foreign consumers. Therefore, high export patterns were an outgrowth of investment in key industries in Japan while this was a direct goal for Korean players.
Japan largely marketed its goods to the local market while many products in Korea could not be sold domestically. These policies resulted in structural imbalances in Korea and strong market bases in Japan. The steel industry in Japan was initially expanded to include technology imports from countries like the US. At the time, these investment decisions seemed extravagant.
However, due to the rapid growth in other industrial sectors like shipping and automobiles, almost all the steel was absorbed by the local market. Therefore, the domestic-first principle was the guiding factor in Japan-led economic strategies. On the other hand, Korea produced several commodities that it did not sell locally; a case in point was the color TV.
The government did not allow the sale of these items until the 80s. As a result, all of the goods were directed to foreign markets. Several other products like telephones and phonographs were only available to overseas buyers. This export-first approach explains why manufacturing led to monetary imbalances as domestic investments far exceeded domestic savings.
We will write a custom Essay on Japan versus Korean economic miracles specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Korea had greater foreign debt than Japan during its period of economic boom. While Japan had a healthy budget balance, Korea’s export-fist principle created gaps between productive investment and domestic savings. As mentioned in the latter paragraph, Korea had much less domestic savings than it ought to have had at its GDP. Therefore, insufficient funds to invest in future production were a problem.
As a result, the government decided to borrow the difference from foreign partners. Foreign inflow of capital was quite high in Korea compared to Japan and other countries with similar economic partners.
This occurred around the year 1985. On the flipside, Japan had healthy levels of domestic savings. Therefore, it did not need to borrow capital from foreigners and it kept its debt under control. In fact, initial investment led to greater investment in Japan, which was like a chain reaction.
The situations that led to economic fluctuations in both countries were different and the reactions of their governments to the same were also dissimilar. First, Korea’s volatility stemmed from its immense reliance on exportation strategies. Therefore, the sale of produce would dramatically decrease if external occurrences took place.
The government used to allow exporters to bring in raw materials, machinery and other components of production from external markets. Conversely, Japan’s fluctuations were brought on by its industry-dependence on oil for production. The latter government’s response to these fluctuations was more refined than South Korea.
In part, the Korean government was not as well-experienced as Japan’s government in dealing with the monetary consequences of the fluctuations. Japan often worked on correcting the money supply as well fixing its inflation levels. On the other hand, the Korean government responded by heightening domestic capacity or accessing foreign loans.
Korea and Japan’s approach to foreign policy and defense affected the economic outcomes. The Japanese model was one of neutrality, in that it pursued a pacifist agenda in international relations. This perspective stemmed from the wariness that the Second World War created.
The Japanese felt that the post-war period was an opportunity to concentrate on economic development, so their relatively low defense budget contributed to greater capital availability for business. On the other hand, Korea had a relatively high defense budget especially in the early phases of growth because of effects of the Korean War.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Japan versus Korean economic miracles by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It should be noted while South Korea suffered from the effects of the war, Japan benefited from it by selling military supplies to the US Army. The latter was responsible for the earliest phase of the economic boom in this Asian country.
One of the most distinct differences between these two nations in terms of their economic development agenda was how they increased industrial capacity. Japan largely focused on creating new industries while Korea dwelt on expanding the capacity of existing institutions. In fact, this explains why a large gap existed between large firms and small ones.
The large firms in Korea (chaebol) grew and expanded while the small ones were not given a high priority. On the flipside, Japan attempted to pursue a bipolar strategy in which the government worked along side both small and large firms. Market concentration was much higher in the large-enterprise economy of Korea than it was in Japan.
While the problems in Korea seemed to be overpowering it, the government eventually found its niche and stabilized the economy. This was due to a combination of internal and external factors. First, the government decided to pursue economic stability policies rather than growth policies.
Korea’s leaders worked on inflationary pressures substantially and thus stabilized their economy. External factors that led to this stability included low interest rates, depreciation of the dollar as well as reduction of prices of raw materials and energy prices.
On the other hand, Japan continued to remain prosperous due to its own set of external and internal forces. The government continued to protect local investors and offer them capital. However, external factors like a free-floating yen, pressure from the US to open its borders to greater capital flow and forced higher prices for their products in the US market explained why they continued to stay successful.
Conclusion The Japanese economic model was substantially different from the Korean one. Japan had a domestic-first principle while Korea was export-led. Large conglomerates were responsible for growth while both small and large firms were the mainstay of the Japanese economy. The prevalence or non-prevalence of foreign debt and government response to market fluctuations also explains why these economic models were different.
Organization Change model Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Change model in the short-term
Change model in the long-term
Introduction Organizational change refers to the process of shifting from one operation or state in an organization to another. Organizational change includes shifting from one development project to the other that will facilitate growth within the organization. Diversification of operations will help achieve the best results. Organizational change involves two major time frames, either a short term or long term (Beer, 1980).
Organizational management strives to offer the best decision making environment to facilitate the execution of plans for the organization. Organizational change follows a guideline that will help the management implement any development in the environment where the organization operates.
Organization development is one of the changes that may be implemented in companies as they strive to improve their service and product delivery. Organizational heads should carry out a research to find out the best practices to implement changes and what procedure to follow.
Development may include the organizational effort to improve their problem solving capabilities and how each change may be implemented. Change in organizations is very important in that it helps to transform individuals and mechanisms in the organization to a better state.
Transition of change should be monitored well to ensure that benefits are reaped henceforth. Change can be used to enhance the efficiency of a company or its operations (Carter, Ulrich
International Business Incentives Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Many countries across the globe have put up measures in place to attract foreign investments with the aim of fostering economic development. This paper will examine business incentives that have been put in place by Australia and Brazil as a strategy of attracting foreign investments.
Australia is a thriving economy with a high Gross Domestic Product (GDP). This makes it one of the best destinations for investments. The current tax rate for corporate income is 30%. There was a time when suggestions were made to reduce the value but it was withdrawn in May 2012 (Lowtax, 2013). Currently, there are several tax incentives in various investment opportunities.
The most notable incentive is in the research and development field. Australia has put in place a tax credit of about 45%. It is refundable if a company is carrying out research and development (R
J. S. Mill’s Views on F. W. Taylor’s ‘Scientific Management’ Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Taylor’s main position in the monograph ‘Scientific Management’ is that even the most basic form of labor entails some form of science (Taylor, 2010). He asserts that when the right person is carefully selected for a job, then it is essential to develop the correct science of that specific task through scientific training.
The outcome of such an practice will therefore be greater as compared to the outcome that would result from the application of initiative and incentive schemes. On the other hand, John Stuart Mill advocated for a more laissez-faire approach when dealing with employees’ rights.
Mill argued that the departure from a justified distribution despite the fact that it is necessitated by some immense good is certainly evil. He stated that even the employees at the lowest levels make notable input to the general creation of wealth.
Therefore, some standard of justice needs to be applied in the distribution of the assets of an organizational. Thus, the aim of this paper is to reveal whether John Stuart Mill would have supported F. Taylor’s ‘Scientific Management.’
Discussion Based on Taylor’s scientific management theory, the idea behind new face employees is acquired through unconditional uniformity where managers take on new burdens, duties, and responsibilities (Taylor, 2010). Mill would have opposed such an argument since it implies that a manager should take on the burden of amalgamating all of the conventional knowledge used in the previous times.
The manager would then be expected to categorize, tabulate, and minimize such knowledge in accordance with the regulations, laws, and procedure that have been set. Mill believed considerably in the self-sufficiency of an individual especially those based on level-headedness and freedom.
Therefore, Taylor’s assertions imply that placing laws and limitations will impinge on the employees’ rationality since they result to a manager’s opinion on one group, a move that according to Mill is an injustice to the character of the employees.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Taylor’s argument that the management places a new and a heavy load on themselves to seek disciplines for each element of their employee work coincides with Mill’s argument for a more nuanced and consequentiality management perspective. However, Taylor calls for particular sets of outcomes especially that of work which is to be performed in accordance with the standards of the science developed by the managers.
Mill believes that the motivating force is the evasion of certain sets of outcomes that determine the actions that should be undertaken to avoid a predefined outcome.
Thus, according to Mill, all the actions should be right to share since they tend to enhance contentment. The only divergence of this argument from Taylor’s scientific management is that the management takes over every work for which they are incredibly fitted compared to their employees.
Furthermore, incentives should be handed out in various forms such as optimism of swift promotion and higher wages. There should also be a friendly contact between the management and the employees representing a genuine in their welfare (Taylor, 2010). Mill also proposed such measures.
However, his proposal centered more on revisionist interpretation especially with regards to generous work prices and the respect of workers’ rights such as reduced labor hours and the improvement of the working environment. Therefore, such considerations should not be based on personal deliberations only.
Mill observed the previous notion that responsibilities should be thrown upon the employees under a compensation that fits the work of their labor. Scientific management calls for a rigid rule to consult and deal with only one employee at a time given.
At the same time, every employee is expected to have his/her own special capability and limitations. In a similar manner, Mill called for the safeguarding of occupational choices as justice necessitates a move that requires incentive payments to persuade employees with rare talents to be deployed in a competent way.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on J. S. Mill’s Views on F. W. Taylor’s ‘Scientific Management’ specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, Taylor and Mill believe that managers should not deal with the employees as a group because their objective is to develop every employee to his/her highest level of competence and prosperity. However, Taylor emphasizes on finding the right employee as a preliminary step. Through training, such an individual becomes competent in conducting the assigned tasks and achieving the desired (Taylor, 2010).
This contradicts Mill belief that employees should be given the freedom to direct the process that leads to their personal formation of character and not some metaphysical eminence of mind that is distinct and disconnected.
Mill is therefore against the concept of proportioning compensations in accordance with the work completed especially when it depends on innate disparities of strength and capacity. To him, such a principle of payment is in itself unfair, as it gives those who are not doing the most and those who are favored by nature (Taylor, 2010).
Conclusion This paper concludes that John Stuart Mill would only have supported certain aspects of Taylor’s ‘Scientific Management’ including the notion that management should place new and heavy load for themselves to seek disciplines for each element of their employee work.
Mill also agreed on having an identical division of labor and responsibilities between the management and the employees. However, he disagrees on compensation and personal contemplation when recruiting an employee. From these arguments, therefore, it is evident that Mill will support some elements of scientific management as proposed by F. Taylor.
Reference Taylor, F. W. (2010). The Principles of Scientific Managemen. In D. Pacey (Ed), Selections from The Principles of Scientific Management (pp. 15-28). NewYork: Taylor and Francis
Introducing of Edison’s Technologies Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Introducing new technological inventions influences all spheres of social life and industrial production. At this point, Thomas Edison can be considered a strongly influential figure in industrial inventing, holding more than 1000 patient until his death.
In fact, the invention of electricity light, as well enormous contributions made to development of television and video media provides a new strand in perceiving the role and functions of technological advancement in society. Thus, by inventing the electric light, people have significantly improved their productivity.
Moreover, they have reconsidered the needs and requirements by perceiving the advantage of new technology. At this point, although Edison’s technology redirected the attention from other inventions, their scientific and technological achievements had captured the public attention and dictated new norms, values, and purposes in life.
Recognized as the most prolific inventor, Thomas Edison redefined the concept of invention, and made the public reconsider the role of technologies in their life. So far, the inventions were focused on improving the quality of life by fulfilling physical needs of consumers.
In fact, the emergence of electricity had not only contributed to the total reconstruction of the industrial process, but also compelled people to learn more about this new phenomenon to be able to reconstruct their lives. Thus, a shift of attention from gas light to the new electricity era had been introduced.
The inventor had persuaded the public that previous devices were the matters of the past by explaining the main benefits of electricity – from its efficient work to the cost necessary to sustain the invention. In his interview with The Time reporters, Edison remarked, “the cost, compared to gas-pipe, will be very small, and there is very little change of their getting out of order” (Edison’s Electric Light, n. p.).
Apart from outlining the main advantages of his new device, Edison also pointed to the similarities in functions of previous functions attributed to gas light. Nowadays, Edison’s strategy is heavily used by the inventors who strive to penetrate to the market and capture new segments of consumers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In fact, the inventor managed to grasp the attention of the majority to give rise to the new period of electricity enlightenment, as well as greater opportunities opened for development of telecommunications.
The fact that the idea of electric lightning was not new also indicates the actual function of Edison’s inventions. Nevertheless, the inventor successfully manipulated the public interest and made them focus on his original solutions (Friedel
Ethics and Self-Experimentation Argument Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help
Kevin Warwick is a cybernetics researcher as well as professor. He is one of the best specialists in this field. He is a professor of cybernetics at the University of Readings, United Kingdom (England). The famous lecturer has been praised for the role he has played in studies related to robotics and the relationship between computer systems and the nervous system in man.
Professor Warwick reportedly instigated the self-experimented pioneer experiments. His experiments entailed linking his nervous system directly to a computer with an aim of assessing the latest technology for probable use with the disabled. His research was described as ground breaking (Warwick, 2002).
The researcher, through his ground breaking set of experiments, was the first cyborg (short form for cybernetic organism). A cybernetic organism means having organic and artificial components, or a human who has some physiological processes controlled or aided by electronic or mechanical devices.
Cyborg takes place when humans literally meet with machines (Warwick, 2002). The professor carried out various studies on himself. One such study involved fixing 100 arrays of electrodes into the nerve fibers of his left hand. The implant was able to bring about artificial sensation through the stimulation of individual electrodes within the array (Warwick, 2002).
Nicholson and Carlisle carried out self-experimentation with electrical apparatus using copper or silver plates, tin or zinc plates, and moisture discs/pieces of card leather.
The self-experimentation entailed testing electrical flow by completing the circuit with different parts of the body including fingers, the whole hand, shoulders, a wound, inserting in ears. These self-experimentation tested electric continuity and its flow with various body parts completing the circuit.
Through the self-experiment, Nicholson and Carlisle showed that the set apparatus carried the strongest electric effect on broken skin or wounds. By inserting the set apparatus in the ears, it demonstrated a shock in the brain. The researchers show the effects of electricity on human body its conductivity thereof.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Apart from the fact that in proving electric conductivity and shock effect thereof in the human body, the self-experiments indicate what merely happens at different levels, and when using different body parts for tests.
Ethically and scientifically speaking, the experiments in project Cyborg have a number of similarities with the ‘self-experiments’ by William Nicholson and Anthony Carlisle”. First, the objectives of both experiments seem to be to fulfill some form of curiosity rather than to solve a scientific problem.
Both experiments do not have a clear problem statement that might have driven the professor, Nicholson and Carlisle to carry out the self-experimentations.
The experiments appear as though they are both geared towards seeing what happens when the human nervous system is linked directly to a computer and what happens when different body parts are used to complete an electric circuit respectively. They are both similarly unethical and have equally raised ethical issues regarding the objective of them both.
Secondly, both of the self-experimentations are similar, scientifically and ethically speaking, since they both do not respect the set code of ethics for research. With the research code of ethics, it is considered unacceptable to use other humans or self for experimentation purposes. The two experiments by Warwick and Nicholson and Carlisle use humans and self to perform the tests.
Their willingness to undertake the self-experiments could be due to their keenness to take any route so as to make certain observations for instance Warwick’s observation about artificial sensation on his hand and Nicholson’s and Carlisle’s observations of electric shock on various human body parts, even if it requires them to perform the experiments on themselves (Nicholson, 1800).
Finally, the two self-experimentations discussed are similar, ethically speaking. Both experiments expose the human being experimented on, to enormous dangers yet carry little or no benefits to humans.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on Ethics and Self-Experimentation Argument specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In view of the self-experimentations above, self-experimentation should be discouraged since they are not adequate scientifically for lack of proper control and subjects who are sufficient to produce results that are meaningful. Although self experiments on humans are seen as really necessary and of great benefit to the human race, the process has been highly criticized (Nicholson, 1800).
Some cases of self-experimentation are usually inclined towards getting the best possible solution to a medical problem or any other form of stated problem. Other cases are done for ethical reasons and at other times, out of probable pure foolhardiness.
Some experiments done on oneself may not occur with an aim of coming up with any answers or solutions, but for exploration. The major part of Professor Warwick’s cases appear to be a demonstration to the non-medical academics and the public that the kind of technology he is dealing with is not some scientific dream or fiction, but rather an issue that truly exists.
Nicholson’s and Carlisle’s self-experiments also appear to bend towards more exploration rather than focus on giving solutions to the various identified problems. The two self-experimentations do not bear any significant differences in terms of ethics.
References Nicholson, W. (1800). Account of the new electrical or galvanic apparatus of Sig. Alex. Volta, and experiments performed with the same.Nicholson’s Journal of Natural Philosophy, 4: 179–187.
Warwick, K. (2002). I,cyborg. London: Century Press.
Persuasion Case Study writing essay help
Persuasion is a process whose aim is to change an individual’s or group’s behavior or attitude towards a certain belief, attitude, or behavior. Persuasion entails careful presentation of arguments, facts, and/or supporting evidence in a compelling and suitable environment.
The nature of Monica’s dilemma is such that she rightfully deserves a pay rise on account of her commendable performance in her job. In fact, this is one of the motivating factors that saw her accept the job, despite the fact that it paid 5 percent lower in comparison with her previous job.
Her boss, Allan, had promised Monica that upon the completion of 90 days, she would undergo performance evaluation and her salary would be reviewed upwards. Her boss has even commended her on several occasions for a job well-done but one month past the expiry of the 90 days period, she is yet to be evaluated.
Monica’s boss is under pressure to “make the numbers” and has been so preoccupied that he has not had the time to discuss the issue with Monica. On the other hand, Monica is fearful that she might get de-motivated if the performance evaluation is not done now as she might feel as though she is getting less than her worth.
Monica has been unsuccessful at persuading her boss to ensure that the performance evaluation is conducted as promised on account of poor communication strategy. Monica’s approach to her boss as regards her pending performance evaluation was gentle and soft.
She jokingly reminds her boss of his promise and her boss probably never took her seriously. As such, Monica did not present her case in a careful and panned manner. She also lacked the necessary documentation, data and facts to argue her case, although these are some of the key prerequisites of persuasion.
When asking for a pay rise, Monica might have preferred to use such strategies as hint dropping and “joking” as she probably assumed that her boss was fully aware of the promise to review her performance and give her the pay rise that she deserved once the 90 days are over.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As such, she did not wish to offend him and so she opted for a soft stance. Unfortunately, this strategy did not work because there was no effective communication between Monica and her boss.
Seeing that her boss is under pressure to “make the number”, Monica has to adopt a more persuasive strategy than she is currently using. This is the only way for her to be listened to. One such strategy that Monica can embrace is to propose to her boss to give her additional responsibilities as a way of enabling the company achieve its goal.
Definitely, her boss is bound to notice her amid his busy schedule. Then, Monica can seize this opportunity to arrange for an appointment when they can get to discuss her impending performance evaluation and salary increment.
Position of Women in the Traditional Japanese Society Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help
Film is an imitation employed by writers to express views ad opinions in society. In many fictional films, characters are portrayed with either better or worse behaviors as compared to behaviors of real characters. Other actors try as much as possible to match the objects of the film with real life events. In his works, Azu differentiates between the new generation and the old generation (Wood 117).
It is noted that actors in the film are presented in a better way than they would appear in real life. In other words, Azu’s film presents characters in an idealized form. This would mean that the film criticizes the existing social structure because those with perceived antisocial behaviors are not welcome in society. Idealization means that characters live a complete and intense life as compared to real characters.
Real characters might be leading a miserable life. In the film, characters are awesome because they are given good qualities. This paper compares the lives of Noriko and that of his father. It is observed that Noriko is modern while her father is traditional. Noriko represents modernity while her father is the figure representing conservatism.
From the film, it is evident that women have never enjoyed their freedoms in the Japanese society due to barriers put in place by men. Noriko’s behavior show some ways in physical differences between men and women are used to show that women should be allocated inferior and degrading activities such as motherhood and secretary.
Moreover, the film shows that women are subjected to stereotypes, which portray them as weak. In the film, women are often excluded from public activities and are relegated to the private domain of the home. Women are ascribed feminine qualities and identities through the process of socialization.
In this regard, the director of the movie shows that women grow up in the traditional Japanese society knowing that their existence in society depends on the decisions made by men (Scott and Lyonette 24). This feature is evident in Noriko’s father. Therefore, Noriko’s is almost forced to live in a state of false consciousness.
As a traditionalist, Noriko’s father believes that oppression of women is inevitable in all male dominated societies. This means that political and economic power should be concentrated in the hands of men. There is a substantial social differentiation between sexes implying that women cannot perform the activities that are traditionally reserved for men.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case, it is impossible to change gender roles in society without revising the social structure. In this regard, the main aim Noriko is to revise the social structure. The main concern of Noriko is to ensure that women are incorporate into the economy. For her father, if change in the social structure is enhanced, social disorder will be inevitable.
Therefore, gender equality should be approached cautiously. Noriko’s behavior shows that no social structure is safe if it is maintained by oppressing a majority of its citizens (Manning and Robinson 168). For her, women should be allowed to participate in societal activities without discrimination.
In this case, women must be allowed to own land, participate in political processes such as voting for their preferred candidate, and present their candidature during elections. In Japanese society, women are never allowed to engage in activities that are perceived to belong to men.
From the pre-industrial period, men were powerful because of their physical strength and freedom from childbearing duties. Feminists, such as Noriko, observe that these factors allowed men to dominate women physically. In this regard, the aim of Noriko is to ensure that physical differences are not used to assign responsibilities to individuals in society.
The movie shows that cultural beliefs in society support a social structure that puts men in dominant positions (Oaxaca 10). From early childhood, children in the Japanese society are socialized to accept traditional gender roles as natural and just.
Noriko is against this perception because capability is not dictated by gender. In Noriko’s society, some academic courses were reserved for boys while girls were advised to take inferior courses.
The prestigious courses were believed to be pursued by men while women pursue the less prestigious ones. Noriko demanded that the society must appreciate the fact that women have the same capabilities as those of men. In the film, men control most of society’s wealth, prestige, and power.
We will write a custom Essay on Position of Women in the Traditional Japanese Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Women are compared to the proletariat because they are like the workers who work under the directives of the bourgeoisie. Women are exploited and their culture is always devalued while the culture of men is valued. Most of the women’s work is devalued, particularly that of the home.
As a modernist, Noriko notes that subordination of women to men is a result of socio-economic factors, but not biological factors. Women are present in most social situations, but their presence is not appreciated.
Where they are not present, it is not because of inequality or lack of interest, but because there have been deliberate efforts to exclude them (Williams 17). Noriko supports historical developments that would present enormous opportunities to women. Developments in the law are one of the developments that would present chances to women.
Works Cited Manning, Alan and Robinson, Helen. “Something in the Way She Moves: A Fresh Look at an Old Gap.” Oxford Economic Papers 53.3 (2004): 169-188. Print.
Oaxaca, Ronald. “Discrimination and the Decomposition of Wage Differentials.” Journal of Econometrics 6.3 (2004): 5-24. Print.
Scott, Jacqueline and Lyonette, Clare. Gender Inequalities in the 21st Century: New Barriers and Continuing Constraints. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, 2010. Print.
Williams, Jim. Unbending Gender: Why Family and Work Conflict and What to Do about It. New York: Oxford University Press, 2000. Print.
Wood, Robin. Sexual Politics and Narrative Film: Hollywood and Beyond. New York: Columbia University Press, 1998. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Position of Women in the Traditional Japanese Society by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Partisan Demagoguery Essay (Critical Writing) essay help free
Table of Contents The difference between socialism and active state liberalism
The difference between fascism and a minimal State
Reflections on name calling
The difference between socialism and active state liberalism Socialism is viewed as a complicated system since it entails diverse implications, as far as freedom is concerned. Socialists believe that, the idea of individual freedom is not appropriate because it overlooks many fundamental aspects. Since proponents advocate for freedom that jointly affects the entire community, other factions in the debate may believe that socialists are opposed to freedom.
For instance, liberals believe in individual freedom and, thus, a socialist approach would sound faulty. Socialists assert that the agent, who is also the worker or producer, should not be issued with freedom in isolation. This implies that an individual should not achieve freedom and its relative benefits through the hard work of another person (Ball
The Concept of Equivalent Fractions Essay custom essay help: custom essay help
Prerequisite skills to working with fractions with unlike denominators
When teaching fourth-grade students the concept of fractions with unlike denominators, it is necessary for them to have some prerequisite skills (Koch, 2010). These skills include an appreciation of the significance of a fraction (a method of computation of elements of groups of things, sections, and or parts).
Besides, learners need to have ample skills of not only classifying but also interpreting the elements of fraction in addition to possessing skills in division and multiplication of numbers from 0 through 12.
Fortunately, students have these tactics already developed by the time they get to the fourth grade (Reys, Lindquist, Lambdin
Creative Children Culture Essay college essay help: college essay help
The idea that some cultures went by the names “savage”, “civilized”, or “barbarous” is long gone and is viewed trying to revive the same stands out as racism. Nevertheless, the same notion comes out in different ways when people talk about other cultures for some argue that terms like “first world” and “third world” are euphemisms for more outdated terms.
Some of the terms used to describe third world countries include developing countries, the global south, and/or lower income countries. Using the term “developing country” has had numerous criticisms as it shows that a country is inferior compared to a country that is already developed.
The word developing means mobility and when talking in terms of development, there is no acknowledgement that the word may imply “static or decline”, especially in Southern African countries where the “word developing country” has an effect on such euphemism.
Another term that describes third world country is “majority world”. All these new terms are now being preferred so that countries that are not much ahead in terms of development might not feel inferior or think they are doing nothing to alleviate their situation.
Adults have created and maintained childhood innocence and from what I have read, innocence is not something that children are born with. Children are termed as innocent because the American culture regards the not-knowing state highly.
Therefore, children engage in some activities as a way of rebelling against some of the expectations that adults have for them, particularly in terms of displaying sexuality as well as skillful controlling of their bodies. Parents as well as teachers have expectations that affect children in a big way. However, the society bestows parents and teachers with different feelings of expecting too much from their children.
Anytime adults do not anticipate a certain level of achievement from children, children tend to lose confidence and thus underperform. In addition, they exude symptoms of anxiety, anger, and depression. On the other hand, too many expectations subject children to stress, which forces them to show anger, depression, and anxiety.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Children rebel in ways such as blatantly refusing to do what is required of them be it household chores or cleaning their room or using bad language among others. Since parents expect their children to be well behaved, children act completely different so that they can prove their parents wrong.
In my opinion, childhood’s innocence is undergoing a significant transformation especially concerning television shows, toys, and the Internet. According to recent studies, there is a great effect on children who watch TV and other different types of media.
Children start learning language even in their mother’s womb, and this realization shows that children are very quick learners and will grasp whatever comes their way be it good or bad. Heavy exposure to the aforementioned elements increases the harmful effects of sex, smoking, alcohol, and drug abuse.
According to a recent research, 93 per cent of children who watch different issues via the media have had sex at an earlier age. Therefore, in the light of these insights, children’s innocence is changing drastically as they want to keep up with what they see over the media.
In the traditional settings where there was no Internet, one can probably claim that children were innocent for information on areas like sex and alcohol was not readily available; however, in the modern society, adverts using sex as a way of promoting their products are all over including adverts promoting alcohol, and the combination of these elements is corrupting the innocent minds of the children.
The Use of Modern Innovations in the Production of Commodities Essay (Book Review) essay help free
The main problem raised includes that of the use of machinery and modern innovations in the production of commodities (Marx, 1906). The author strives to bring out an argument that is crucial in identify and clarifying whether the use of machinery has, in any way, helped in improving working conditions.
According to the author, the capitalist system is where the employee works for few hours while using machines in the workplace (Marx, 1906). In addition, the employees produce more when using machines and yet they receive little pay for their work (Marx, 1906).
The author’s argument focuses on the discussion that machines can be regarded as a means with which capitalists produce surplus value. Another key argument raised by the author focuses on the mode of production, both in the manufacture and the modern industry (Marx, 1906).
The author contends that the revolution in the production mode starts with labor power in the manufacture while, in modern industry, it starts with the instruments that deal with labor (Marx, 1906).
Another conclusion that the author makes in the text includes the argument that machines perform the same duties as those performed by human beings (Marx, 1906). As discussed by the author, the modern industry considers machines as the key tools to be used in the production of goods.
The modern world has developed to such an extent that machines can be used in the production of other machines (Marx, 1906). The author gives a historical account of the development of machines over the years (Marx, 1906). The author concludes that the number of implements that can be used by a human being tend to be limited to the body organs.
Thus, a human being may not be capable of operating many machines at the same time (Marx, 1906). On the invention, as well as advancement of machinery, the author states that, in Germany, there had been attempts to have two spinning wheels work with a single spinner (Marx, 1906). However, this turned out to be impossible.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The author contends that it is the discovery of a treddle spinning wheel that had two spindles and other discoveries, which had an effect on machinery development (Marx, 1906). The author discusses the various ways through which machines could be driven in industries. For example, the Arkwright throstle-spinning mill could be turned by water.
The text also explains the invention of the prime mover, which could be driven by both water and coal and whose power could be controlled by humans (Marx, 1906). The author contends that the conversion of tools from manual to mechanical implements played a crucial role in the advancement of the machines (Marx, 1906).
This is because the motive mechanism could be driven by other machines, hence allowing it to drive more machines than in the past (Marx, 1906).
The author concludes that, in a machinery system that can be regarded as real, machines of various kinds supplement each other in the production process (Marx, 1906). This enhances the division of labor in the manufacturing process, whereby various machines and various workers operate the machinery at various stages in the production of a commodity (Marx, 1906).
Another issue that the author has tackled includes how the machines supply the materials to each other in the production process (Marx, 1906). This is especially the case in commodities, which require various machines in their production. According to the author, the essence of the factory system is to increase production in the industries and ensure maximization of profits (Marx, 1906).
Reference List Marx, K. (1906). Capital: A Critique of Political Economy. New York: Modern Library.
Organizational Development Case Study best essay help: best essay help
Introduction For any organization to be successful in its field and progress to profitability, it is important that managers and employees in its leadership embrace organizational development. According to Cummings and Worley, “Organizational Development (OD) is a planned long-term effort led and supported through the top management to improve an organization’s ability in a bid to solve its own problems by continuously working together and managing the culture using behavioral skills” (2005, p. 1).
The paper uses the Tedtec Company Limited, which is a fictional organization. The company chosen for this case study is respected in the country of origin. It is among the pioneers of organizational development in the country. Tedtec Company Limited that is located in India has been in operation for the last 70 years dealing with machinery, engineering, production, and construction works.
According to the results of the performance index of India’s companies, Tedtec Company Limited “is also adjudged India’s best managed and most respected company on various attributes of customer delight and shareholder value” (Roy, 2006, p. 25). The case study on organizational development was based on this company because of its significant history in this field in India.
Company profile Tedtec Company Limited is among the most respected of India’s private sector companies that deal with technology, construction, engineering, and manufacturing. The company has been in existence for about seven decades with a strong international presence including offices in the China as well as her Gulf neighbors.
A wide marketing and distribution network and decades of strong customer focused approach has ensured that the company is the leader in its field. The company also “believes that progress must be achieved in harmony with environment” (Roy, 2006, p. 25). This claim has informed its commitment to protection of the environment and participation in community welfare.
Some of the achievements that the company has made include the record for having made the largest coal gasifier in India that it exports to China.
It is the largest FCC regenerator for a refinery, which is the longest coal conveyer in the world besides being Asia’s highest viaduct and the world’s largest EO reactor for a protochemical complex in the Gulf. The company also took part in the construction of India’s first nuclear powered submarine. It has won a number of local and international awards and recognitions.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company is also one of the most profitable construction companies in the region with thousands of employees being employed directly or indirectly by the company. A policy of giving back to the society has ensured that the company establishes good relations with workers and the communities in which it is involved, with only the issue of pollution being the major challenge.
Tedtec Company Limited has however managed to remain viable and important within the manufacturing and construction sector even with the financial crisis experienced over the years in this part of the world and elsewhere in the world.
Diagnostic methods The methods used for diagnosis in this particular organization included interviews and questionnaires, which were addressed to the employees in the organization. Initially, the company had experienced faults in its existing appraisal system at some point in its history. This challenge necessitated a professional correction of the system.
The company elicited help from some of experts in this field with eminent professors being invited to carry out a study and assessment of the appraisal process in the company (Wilson, 2003, p. 13). Walter Jay and Engineer Schwartz Raymond were the professors that were consulted in the evaluation process for the company.
In their study of the appraisal process in the company, they began by interviewing departmental heads and their subordinates. To accomplish the interview, they used diagnosis or action research with the results being recorded and analyzed against a background of other results they had gotten elsewhere and against the existing case studies.
Analysis and feedback methods Feedback
From the diagnostic methods used in the company, a number of feedbacks were obtained. In the analysis of information provided by the subordinates in the various departments, there was apparent communication breakdown in the administrative hierarchy with junior workers not getting information and feedback on their performance in the company.
This case was despite their expressed a desire to get the feedback, which was not forthcoming. Another interpretation of the results of the feedback included the fact that the managerial staff members were responsible for a large number of employees thus making an appraisal of their subordinates difficult.
We will write a custom Case Study on Organizational Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, one shortcoming was that the appraisal form used was too lengthy meaning that the number of employees participating was reduced due to time constraint.
The results of the feedback were presented by the two professors to the top management of the company for consideration and formulation of suggestions and recommendations on the possible solutions to the actual problem.
According to Cummings and Worley, an appraisal system is important in any organization as it helps the company’s employees to understand their strengths and weaknesses and the progress they are making in the job performance (2005, p. 15).
It also enables them to understand the options available for growth in the company. Cummings and Worley claim that the process should “address the issues of appraisal, potential, counseling, career development, and training all in one” (2005, p. 15).
As in the case of IKEA that was discussed as a case study, Tedtec Company Limited used SWOT analysis in the achievement of objectives and planning of its strategic achievements.
As discussed in the essay and in the literature on planning strategies in organizations, this form of analysis investigates the Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats that an organization establishes in its course of operations and development (Cummings,
Youth, Crime, and Violence Report (Assessment) best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
The Content of the Book and the Authors’ Career
Review Based on Content only
Introduction Written by Rodrigo Bascunan and Christian Pearce, the book Enter the Babylon System: Unpacking Gun Culture from Samuel Colt to 50cent is a fiction book that attempts to give an insider view on the situation of gun culture in the American society. The violent gun culture in society has become one of the biggest talking points for leaders at different levels who are either supporting or opposing it.
The book therefore explains why the gun culture has become a runaway problem by trying to link it to the popular hip-hop culture, which is believed to be a catalyst to the present-day gun violence culture in society.
Therefore, the writers of this book give the perspectives of the issue from an insider point of view and hence their choice of the title Enter the Babylon System: Unpacking Gun Culture from Samuel Colt to 50cent.
With this hint in mind, the paper therefore reviews the book in details based on the link between the authors’ career and content in an attempt to unveil their sole message that the issue of associating gun shootings with hip-hop is not always true.
The Content of the Book and the Authors’ Career Rodrigo Bascunan and Christian Pearce who are the co-authors of the book under review are accomplished journalists and owners of Pound (the hip-hop music and culture magazine). Pound is rated the top most hip-hop culture and music magazine in Canada.
Bascunan and Pearce (2007) therefore have an in-depth and authoritative opinion about the hip-hop world specifically how it operates and its relation with the gun violence culture. They therefore come out to paint an unknown picture about the hip-hop culture and its link with guns by dispelling beliefs that hip-hop escalates gun violence in society.
The authors write this book from a Canadian perspective, which has embraced hip-hop music and culture like the American society. The book is written as a defence for the hip-hop society, which has come under a lot of attack from old members of the society as well as those who do not appreciate the hip-hop culture.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, the authors are people who mix with hip-hop artistes daily thus having the experience of real situations as they happen on the ground. The writers have done the writing of this book in an honest way in that there are no denials to accusations about hip-hop culture and gun violence. They have put facts on the table for readers to judge for themselves.
Review Based on Content only The book has been written in defence of the hip-hop culture due to the accusations pointed at it as being the cause of gun violence in society. It has based its story on facts about the gun culture by providing a history of the culture in the American society from the days of Samuel Colt who invented the colt pistol to artiste 50cent who glorified gun and violence in his music in the present society.
The history in this case provides a comparative plane to judge the facts about gun culture and gun violence. From the authors’ perspective, it has shown that the problem with guns is a historical dilemma dating back to the 19th century.
This information is compared to the history of hip-hop, which is too recent to conclude that the hip-hop culture is the cause of gun violence. The book therefore aims to exonerate hip-hop as the cause of the runaway gun madness.
Recent times have been characterised by an escalation of mass shootings in school as well as in neighbourhoods thus leading to answers for the question of why the gun culture is getting out of hand.
This situation has seen many people in society point a finger to the hip-hop culture as the cause without giving statistical figures to boost their accusations. In fact, as an industry and culture, hip-hop has embraced gun culture in a big way. Because of its visibility, it has come out as the main culprit in the eyes of society.
As Bascunan and Pearce (2007) found, researchers could not give any figures that could conclusively pin down the culture as the main problem. Hip-hop is about expression, bragging, and glorification.
We will write a custom Assessment on Youth, Crime, and Violence specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One way of bragging and self-glorification is to be tough. The book strategically brings out guns as the best weapons for self-defence and elimination of perceived enemies. Just as the rest of the gangsters accomplish their missions, hip-hop has been sucked into the ideas of killing for one to be perceived as being tough thus bringing guns into hand.
The writers therefore admit that hip-hop has had its role in this problem. However, their point of departure is that hip-hop is just part of the problem and not the main cause of the problem.
The chapters in the book are short and easy to read because they have been presented in a very simple language. They give a blow-to-blow narration that captivates the reader of the book to reading it to the end. Bascunan and Pearce wrote the book on a basis of credible research that brought together data derived from different fields.
The composition of the book includes stories of hip-hop artistes as reported in the media, the history of the gun, lyrics from hip-hop songs, interviews by hip-hop artistes, and society in general (Bascunan and Pearce 2007). The writers give the story a new bend by delving into the world of guns broadly.
The book explores the manufacture and distribution of guns in society. In the end, it points out that a few who are known to governments and ones who escape without blame from society do the distribution of guns. The book therefore points to a direction where people do not look at.
There are so many guns in society so far that seem to appear from nowhere. The society is bended on blaming proliferation of guns on the hip-hop culture though it does not look further to find out the true sources of guns. The two writers have endeavoured to gather credible information on matters to do with where guns are manufactured, the reason behind the manufacture, and their distribution process.
Besides, they have also sought information on people who engage in this risky venture of gun production in an attempt to disapprove the claim that hip-hop fanatics have a connection with gun ownership and misuse.
The book paints the gun problem in society as an infectious problem that does not just affect the Canadian society but also the whole world. It goes ahead to show how guns are being used in society today by the military, police, and rebels in conflict areas as well as unlicensed criminals ruling the streets.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Youth, Crime, and Violence by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The authors have made it simple for readers to understand guns by defining the difference in different guns. According to Bascunan and Pearce (2007), the Canadian society lays the blame on America for the proliferation of firearms into the Canadian society besides going ahead to show how the problem is home-grown as much as it has been influenced by the American hip-hop culture.
The book names some of Canada’s own home-grown gun makers who are responsible for supplying guns to society. Though licensed gun owners acquire most guns legally, somehow, guns enter wrong hands in one way or the other.
The authors name the National Rifle Association as one group that does not live to its intentions. They describe the group as people with borderline psychotic intentions due to their ultra campaigns to legalise guns into civilian hands regardless of the misuse of guns.
Bascunan and Pearce have been very meticulous in defining most sources that inspire violence. They direct readers to video games as sources of inspiration that have created some of the worst mass shootings in society. Most video games that are on the market nowadays are based on war games involving virtual guns. A DVD or VCD player offers a variety of choices to make on the type of weapon to display.
In most cases, the weapons used on the game are actually the same make of real weapons found in the market. Therefore, regardless of age, video games tend to expose society indiscriminately to information on a variety of weapons that can be found in the market. The authors tend to point this exposure as the source of most mass shootings in schools. White students who have no links to hip-hop mostly do it.
Whereas shootings happen in neighbourhoods where they are said to be connected to hip-hop, there are more criminal elements to it than the cause being the hip-hop. The writers merge their views by providing real life stories of young men who were shot in the streets. Although the men were hip-hop artistes or fans, their murders were more to do with drugs and gang rivalry than to do with hip-hop.
The authors concede that hip-hop culture has so much embraced the gun culture and violence that it is not easy to separate the two. The difference is only to be found in findings that indicate that only few hip-hop fans worldwide are involved with gun violence.
The writers have therefore gained ground in their pursuit of exonerating hip-hop from all the blame in gun violence. This goal has been achieved by the authors’ effort to interview a whole host of stakeholders who may have a role to play in the whole issue in one way or the other.
Conclusion Rodrigo Bascunan and Christian Pearce have come out in their best way possible to defend the industry that earns them their daily bread. They have achieved their purpose in pointing to society the direction it should look at when trying to solve the gun problem issue.
By being brutally honest and admitting that hip-hop has played its role in escalating gun violence culture, the authors have been able to capture readers’ trust through this strategy. The authors have done a comprehensive research on the gun problem around the world in a bid to present it as a universal problem that cannot be blamed on the hip-hop culture alone. Otherwise, the book is an informative piece of work.
Reference Bascunan, R
I need help writing a paper on cyber security. With the explosion of the Internet of Things (IoT) devices (including smart home and office appliances), a significant amount of data is being transmitte best essay help
With the explosion of the Internet of Things (IoT) devices (including smart home and office appliances), a significant amount of data is being transmitted to and stored on the cloud. In addition to malicious activity, data stored in the cloud can be lost due to accidental deletion or a physical catastrophe, such as a fire or earthquake, and lead to the permanent loss of customer data. In 8-10 pages (double spaced, font 12, including graphics and references as appropriate using APA formatting), highlight the most-recent top 10 cybersecurity risks to data that is processed on, stored on, and/or transmitted through the cloud. Address the following for each: What is the impact (financial and otherwise) of each risk? What is the best mitigation strategy to address each risk?
The Pillow Book of Sei Shonagon Essay (Critical Writing) best college essay help: best college essay help
The book The Pillow of Sei Shonagon can be regarded as a comprehensive description of the life at Japanese court at the period of Heian society. Sei Shonagon provides her insightful accounts of the life at the court. The writing is very personal and it makes the book even more valuable as it does not only reveal certain customs and traditions, but unveils the way people thought. Remarkably, the book also helps understand peculiarities of the Heian society and gender roles in it.
In the first place, it is necessary to note that the Heian period is characterized by certain empowerment of women as they could take some roles in a social life of the state. Thus, women could obtain education which was really good and comprehensive. Earlier, education was considered to be a male task.
In Heian Japan, women had a specific role as they were leading personalities in literature. They wrote a variety of literary works which were admired by women as well as men. Women could also copy books, and this was also rather a privilege (Shonagon 1991, 148). Apart from working on literary masterpieces, women at the court did not have a privileged position.
Clearly, people of that period cherished education and mental as well as physical abilities. Sei Shonagon stresses that people who excel in studies, literature or art of war are exceptional. Therefore, such virtues as excellence in art of war, literature and politics were seen as primary.
It is also necessary to note that men were still regarded as superior creatures. Men were regarded as rulers and those who lead, while women were seen as subordinate creatures and had to play certain roles. These were roles of wives, mothers, mistresses and, of course, writers.
Thus, being a court lady, Sei Shonagon, was quite close to her Majesty Empress. Sei Shonagon enjoyed all privileges of an aristocrat of that period. Of course, she had to follow the conventions which existed at the court at that period. It is necessary to note that there were a lot of rules and traditions which had to be respected.
It is necessary to note that the court at that time was characterized by peculiarities of any medieval court. There were various intrigues, love affairs, coalitions, etc. Notably, the author pays a lot of attention to love affairs and eroticism in her book. Thus, she depicts a number of dates and night meetings. She also describes complicated traditions and customs associated with love affairs. Men and women had to write love letters, which had to have certain structure or rather form. These writings had to be deliberate and thoughtful.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The author also describes how hypocritical the life at the court was as people often pretended to be better than they were in reality. Admittedly, it was a norm to have an exemplary family where the husband and the wife love each other. However, in reality the situation was different and many couples hid their feelings.
Sei Shonagon notes that there are hardly couples who “always treat each other with scrupulous care and respect” (Shonagon 1991, 146). Therefore, the Heian court life was not different from the life at any other court (or even at any other society where people tend to create certain images top fit the society).
It is also necessary to point out that even though family values were regarded as prior to anything, adultery was also a norm. Sei Shonagon mentions a man “with two mistresses who is obliged to see them being bitter and jealous towards each other” (Shonagon 1991, 171). The author also writes about waiting for a lover in the middle of the night. This may not refer to adultery, but it is not an exemplary marital relationship. Therefore, extramarital affairs were seen as something illicit but possible.
Another characteristic feature of the court was the aristocracy’s attitude towards representatives of other societal layers. This can be easily explained as one of the major virtues of an individual was education and only aristocrats could afford being educated. Wisdom and courtesy were seen as certain priorities. Admittedly, peasants did not have time or money to obtain education. Aristocrats did not take this into account and saw peasants as inferior creatures.
To sum up, it is possible to note that Sei Shonagon reveals major peculiarities of the life at the court. The writer describes a variety of traditions and conventions which existed at the court. Clearly, the Heian court can be regarded as a conventional court of the Middle Ages as those who lived there were hypocrites.
However, the court was also somewhat exceptional as women had quite a special place. Women were able to obtain education. Women were even regarded as major figures in literature at that period. However, it is also true that this was a partial empowerment as women were still seen as inferior in many other respects. Major roles assigned to women (apart from roles of writers) were roles of wives, mistresses and mothers.
References Shonagon, Sei, The Pillow Book of Sei Shonagon. Translated by Ivan Morris, New York: Columbia University Press, 1991.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Pillow Book of Sei Shonagon specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Employee Appraisal Report college essay help near me
Executive Summary The determination of whether an organization is on track or not in terms of meeting its key deliverables and objectives calls for the evaluation of employees’ performance and appraisal by the organizations’ managers. Using the National Bank of Kuwait as a case example in this report, the report reveals that there exists a dissonance or rather conflicts between employees and the evaluation managers on matters of appraisal.
The report therefore recommends that organizations’ managers should guide employees in order to make their appraisals high. Besides, the management should give employees some goal that they should achieve every year. Above all, organizations should test and hire good quality human resource managers to help in bringing on board a promising workforce.
Introduction and Overview The report addresses the problem of employee appraisal, bonuses, and conflicts in organizations. The research goes deep into carrying out a research interview with the human resource manager at the National bank of Kuwait. The research adopts the use of questionnaires with close –ended and open-ended questions as research tools.
From the findings of this interview, the research adopts various variables as parameters of organizational behavior. These variables include interpersonal skills, accountability, attention to details and quality focus, teamwork, customer focus, attitude, commitment, and sense of energy.
The research proceeds to weigh the scores from each variable on the scale of 100% comprising (A ) for ‘outstanding’ for scores above 100%, (A) for ‘exceeds expectations’ for scores between 100%- 90%, (B ) for ‘meets expectations’ for scores between 89%- 74%, (B) for ‘below expectations’ for scores between 73%-63%, and (C) for ‘unsatisfactory’ for scores between 63% and below.
The research goes on to evaluate various motivational methods applied by the National Bank of Kuwait especially the use of bonuses. These include December bonuses, March special bonuses, and April promotions. The impact of the appraisal and the bonus program is also evaluated. After analyzing the findings, the report offers several recommendations directed towards elimination of the problems in question.
Problem Statement In many organizations, employees do not appreciate the results of appraisals carried out by the human resource managers in their organizations. Employees will therefore discredit the competence of the human resource manager who carried out the evaluation instead of focusing on the results and their failures.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, human resource managers face tough times in their bid to explain and convince employees to accept the results of their appraisals. This report hypothesizes that employees in the National Bank of Kuwait disregard the results of their performance appraisals due to the incompetency of human resource managers.
Failure of employees to appreciate performance appraisals is rooted on the idea that management does not provide employee with guidance towards organizational and individual goals. As Baroda, Sharma, and Batt put it, it is vital for workers to be well versed on the organization’s situation so that they can know what it is that they are required to change (53).
Findings The research relied on data collected from a sample of 1000 employees of the National Bank of Kuwait. The sample was randomly selected from the possible “4000 workers of the bank all the 17 countries across the four continents” (National Bank of Kuwait Para. 2).
The findings were presented in the tables and pie charts as illustrated below
Table 1.0 performance of various employees on a 100% scale
Average grades 100 (A ) 100-90 (A) 89-74 (B ) 73-63 (B) Below 63 (C) No of employees out of 100 10 20 30 800 140 Pie chart 1.1 performance appraisal for employees and their scores on a 100% rating scale
Table 2.0 Reasons for employee disagreements with organizational appraisals
We will write a custom Report on Employee Appraisal specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Reason for disagreement No of employees Percentage Incompetence of HR manager 400 40% Unfair appraisal/Favoritism 100 10% Unfamiliar goals/targets 300 30% Infrequent appraisals 200 20% Pie chart 2.1 Reasons for employees’ disagreement with the performance appraisal
Discussion of Findings
From the findings presented above, various deductions and analysis can be realized. The research indicated that employees vary in performance and various areas of appraisal based on the evident difference in capabilities as put forth by Baroda, Sharma, and Batt (54). From table 1.0, when employee performance was coded and averaged, the research realized that the highest percentage of employees scored below average (80%).
The finding concurred with Khazal’s revelation that majority of institutions within the eastern region of Kuwait have to fight back the unwelcoming financial circumstances (2). Most of the employees therefore scored between 73% and 63%, which was rated as below expectations on the appraisal rating scale.
From the pie chart 1.1, it can be interpreted that the performance of the largest segment of employees in the National Bank of Kuwait performed below the organization’s expectations. The larger segment of 80% percent of all the employees performed below standard. However, within this range, there is potential to improve this performance in time. Such a group of employees can change for better performance in a small period.
There is quite a considerable level of laxity on the side of the management to train and direct employees based on the high number that performed below the expected standard yet they have the potential to perform better within a little duration of time depending on the ability of the human resource department and the management to train employees. From table 1.1, it is clear that 14% of the employees scored below the level of satisfaction of the organization and hence unsatisfactory.
It is also quite disturbing that the organization is not sure whether the 14% employees in this segment can be reformed. From the pie chart 1.1, this segment is the second largest in degrees. The interpretation is that the National bank of Kuwait is in the verge of either being forced to lay off these employees or develop an intensive training program for them. From the rating scale, it is almost impossible to revive the employees’ performance standard.
The other important result that came up from this research was that a very low percentage of employees at the National bank of Kuwait scored above B . From table 1.0, only 3% of the employees scored between 89% and 74% (B ) hence meeting the expectations of the organization. Out of 1000 employees, only 30 whose performance was at the required standards set by the management of the national bank of Kuwait.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Employee Appraisal by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The expectations were that most of the employees from the bank would meet this threshold. Although most of the experienced employees are supposed to be in this range, the research proved otherwise. Having only 30 employees scoring a grade that indicates competency and experience is below the expectations of a competent national bank.
Therefore, the highest percentage of employees was not competent. The performance and quality of service in that bank is below the standard especially when one looks deeper into parameters like interpersonal skills, accountability, attention to details and quality, and customer service, which are crucial in the delivery of service in a banking system.
The high percentage of employees who scored below average (94%) is an indication that the National bank of Kuwait offers services that are below standard. In contrast with many other banking organizations, the research also realized that the standards of the national bank of Kuwait targeted only 30 employees to be awarded grade (B ).
Hence, the target of the National Bank of Kuwait is therefore below standards since, if (B ) is the expected performance and it is the grade that should comprise most of the competent employees, more than 3% of employees should attain it. The segment that this percentage represents on pie chart 1.1 is very low.
From table 1.1, the research also indicates that 2% of the employees scored between 100% and 90% to score (A). Only 20 employees exceeded the expectations of the National bank of Kuwait. The research interpreted that, since this data was gathered from a national bank, the number of employees who scored this grade should have been higher. Employees that are self-motivated are likely to exceed the limit.
Therefore, the level of motivation in National bank of Kuwait is below the expectations of the employees. When employees appreciate the motivation offered by their company, they work hard to achieve it. The fact that employees are rewarded in various months of the year does not seem to inspire them to work.
Only 20 out of 1000 employees exceeded the expected results. However, it is also worth to note that the order of the National bank of Kuwait targets only 20 employees to attain grade (A). One can therefore infer that a higher number of employees would not have reached the grade since the principles of this organization did not allow them. Such a limitation can act as a source of discouragement and de-motivation to work hard.
Employees with the ability of scoring between 100% and 90% may not work hard to achieve this target while they know that only two of them will be awarded with grade (A). In fact, employees will completely become disinterested with the rewards emanating from attainment of this score once they realize that certain employees are already scoring better marks or are going to be favored by the supervisors.
This great source of demoralization perhaps reveals why only 20 employees out of a whole 1000 score this grade. On the top-most grade (A ), the research realized that only one employee was allowed by the principles of National bank of Kuwait to be awarded with this grade.
Such a percentage was interpreted to mean that the employee had depicted a very high level of proficiency and was competent in the job. The bank also recommends that special notes be made about such an employee. It is also a requirement of the bank that such a performance be rated among the best 5% in the organization.
From pie chart 1.1, the grade had the least segment. A very small sector of the whole employee was able to attain it (only 1%). Therefore, from the standards of the national bank of Kuwait, it was very hard for employees to attain grade (A ). Attaining this grade would mean that an employee was very proficient in the variables used to measure performance.
The special notes that were to be made mean that such an employee would call for a special attention and consideration by the management. The level of competency and proficiency of employees in the National bank of Kuwait was very low, as many employees did not show any commitment, which is a key requirement for employees. Since the bank is a people-oriented organization, proficiency in execution of duties cannot be an excuse.
Employees in this organization should exhibit great proficiency in areas like attention to detail and quality focus. A banking institution ought to have a very high percentage of employees scoring high marks in this area. Winning customers’ trust calls for great efficiency, proficiency, and attention to details in execution of duties. Having only one employee score (A ) would therefore be interpreted to mean that this was not the case in national bank of Kuwait.
The reward and motivation program that the national bank of Kuwait applies may be a great hindrance to performance. For example, the bonuses that the bank gives every December are awarded to all employees meaning that all the 1000 employees of the bank would receive 25% of their basic salaries as bonus.
From table 1.1, even the 14% of employees who scored (C) are also given the bonuses and hence another reason for laxity in the organization. Every employee is aware that, even when he or she fails to attain the standards that are set by the bank, he or she will still receive the December bonuses.
Every bonus ought to have a score pegged on it to motivate employees. In fact, pie chart 1.1 indicates that the majority of employees (94%) did not attain the standards set by the organization. Consequently, the national bank of Kuwait will have to reward the entire employee with a 25% of each one’s salary amounting to a huge amount of money. The December bonuses may not motivate any employee to work extra hard towards the attainment of the bank’s mission since they are meant for all employees.
The only difference that the bonuses can bring about is that of making the employees want to remain in the organization for long. The December bonus may not increase the output of the organization, but it can reduce the rate of job turnover. Perhaps most of the employees are within below 63%, and between 73% and 63%.
The other bonus that is awarded as special bonuses in March is pegged on profit. From the data collected, the profitability of the national bank of Kuwait may not be very feasible based on the low percentage of employees who scored above 73%. If the performance of the employees is low, it means that their output is low. Hence, the profit of the organization is also low. The officer in charge of these rewards in the national bank of Kuwait awards these bonuses by performance.
Since this research indicated that only one person attained this percentage, the special March bonus will be awarded to one person only. It is also worth noting that 4% of the total profit that the bank realizes is a huge amount of money especially when it is given to one person. Perhaps the national bank of Kuwait should consider increasing the number of people who can attain this grade.
The major problem with performance appraisals in most of the organizations in the world today is that a big number of employees do not appreciate the results. In fact, some past researches show that more than a half of the employees disagree with the results of performance appraisal in their organizations meaning that they disagree with the findings of the evaluation manager (Baroda, Sharma, and Batt 58).
From table 2.0, a considerable number of employees in the National Bank of Kuwait disagreed with the outcome of the November appraisals. The research indicated that employees had various reasons for their disagreements. The pie chart 2.1 also illustrates clearly various segments of employees and the reasons why they disagree with the appraisal results. From table 2.0, 400 of the employees cited incompetence of the human resource manager as the reason that would make them disagree with the results.
These employees comprised a 40% of the total number of employees in the national bank of Kuwait. From pie chart 2.1, the segment that the employees represent is also very huge compared to others. In fact, they take the largest sector in the pie chart. Therefore, incompetence of the human resource manager and other human resource officers in an organization may result in employees discrediting the appraisal processes (Baroda, Sharma, and Batt 61).
Consequently, organizations like the bank of Kuwait need to be very careful when hiring human resource managers and officers. Only the very competent and skillful employees are supposed to be hired as human resource managers.
They should be well inducted into the organization by experienced predecessors. If the human resource officer or manager is coming from another organization, proper induction should be done before such an officer is left to perform his or her duties since every organization has its own culture and that the culture of a banking organization cannot be learnt overnight.
Therefore, new comers in the office of human resource have to be properly inducted into the customs of the organization. The best practice in employee appraisal calls for understanding of the human resource manager on the duties, roles, and responsibilities of employees under him or her, support of on the employees, and cooperation between him or her and employees.
With such knowledge, employees can regain their confidence in the human resource department of their organization. When organizations hire competent human resource managers, they may not experience the problem of employees’ act of disregarding on performance appraisal results. Therefore, from the findings of this research, the national bank of Kuwait needs to hire competent human resource and evaluation managers in order to instill employee confidence in the appraisal results.
This step will lower the percentage of employees who refute the appraisal results citing this problem from 40% to a considerable level. From pie chart 2.1, the next largest segment of employees cited lack of information on the targets and goals set for employees by the bank.
Approximately 30 0employees from this bank cited this issue as the reason why they would disagree with appraisal results amounting to 30% of employees of the national bank of Kuwait. From table 2.0, the reason took a high percentage. In fact, from pie chart 2.1, it is clear that it took the second largest sector after incompetence of human resource managers.
One can therefore argue that 30% of the employees in the National bank of Kuwait do not know the parameters that the human resource managers and other evaluation officers use in appraisals. When employees do not know the goals that they should attain by the end of a given working period, they cannot work towards the same direction that the larger organization is working. Organizational goals can only be attained if they are subdivided among individual employees.
When employees are well informed about the goal and target that they should achieve, they gain a sense of direction. In every step that such employees take, they will be gearing their efforts towards the accomplishment of such a goal. When they reach their goals individually, the organization is also able to attain its larger goal and mission.
The larger goal of attaining larger customer base, offering better quality service, enhancing teamwork, and being proficient in service delivery can only be achieved if these goals are subdivided into sub-goals. Such sub-goals are then allocated to individual employees to ease the realization of the larger mission.
It is therefore important that employees be made aware of their goals and the expectations that the management has about them. Information and communication in performance appraisal is important. Employees should be provided with frequent feedback on their performance. Communication is power. When employees have information, they will know when they are headed for success and or when they are making the wrong progress.
The human resource management of the national bank of Kuwait and other institutions that can infer from this research should therefore ensure clear and complete communication to their employees. It is only through good communication and feedback that employees can raise the performance appraisal of their organization (Baroda, Sharma, and Batt 61). The 30% segment of employees who cited lack of information about goals and targets require being properly informed and their feedback evaluated occasionally for better results.
The third segment of employees cited infrequent appraisal as their reason for disregarding the results of performance appraisals. From table 2.0, the issue comprised 200 employees, which translated to 20% of the total number of employees. Therefore, this reason is also a problem to reckon when carrying out performance appraisal. Performance appraisal should be done frequently and when the employees are aware of the parameters used for evaluation.
Consistencies of performance appraisals make the employees develop a culture of high standard performance at all times. Performance appraisal at the National bank of Kuwait is normally done in November every year meaning that the bank carries out evaluation of its employees only once in a year. Several points of evaluation should be initiated to develop a performance culture in the employees. The intervals of evaluation should therefore be consistent throughout the year.
Whenever the organization decides to remove or add an evaluation parameter, employees should be informed are aware and or be become conscious of their conduct and the quality of service that they deliver. From such a development, the institution develops in terms of performance.
It is important that the feedback of every stage of evaluation be communicated to the employees. Workers should be made to know about information that concerns them before other publics of the bank. Such efforts by the human resource department and the appraisal team make the employees more responsible. It will also make them appreciate the need for continuous competition in performance.
The parameters of evaluation should remain constant over a given period. The inconsistency in evaluation that 20% of employee cited may also be linked with alterations in the parameters of performance appraisal. Finally, from table 2.0, 100 employees comprising a 10% of the total employee were for the idea that they would disagree with the results of performance appraisal if they realize bias or unfairness in the process.
The 100 employees thought that the appraisers were not objective in appraising them. The result of such thoughts were that employees would therefore refuse to sign the appraisal sheet making the human resource manager waste a lot of time in convincing them and the senior officers that the results were accurate. In some instances, employees would accept the results of the appraisal. However, when they realize that their workmates who they deem to be of lower performance than them scored better, they object the results.
Human resource managers are supposed to demonstrate high levels of accuracy and consistency to avoid conflicts with employees. Whenever there is conflict of interest from their point of view, the human resource managers should exempt themselves from evaluating such employees for example when appraising relatives and friends.
Every employee should be fairly and equally evaluated. Employees should also be trained to avoid being jealous of their workmates who perform better. Instead, they should be encouraged to work harder to attain their targets.
Conclusion The process of employee appraisal is crucial to every organization. Performance appraisal enables an institution to know its position in performance, realize the ability in its workforce, develop training programs and predict its future performance. In the performance appraisal of the national bank of Kuwait, the research realized that only 1% of employees scored (A ), 2% scored (A), and 3 % scored (B).
The rest majority scored below the expected standards by the human resource manager and the organization. The research also realized that a high number of employees from the National bank of Kuwait are bound to disagree with the results of performance appraisal.
The research informed that 40% of employees would disagree with the results due to incompetency of human resource managers, 30% would do so due to lack of information on targets and goals, 20% would object the results due to inconsistency, and 10% would object it due to bias and unfairness.
Therefore, report therefore concludes that most of the employees in organizations in the world are bound to object the results of performance appraisal. In most instances, this conflict will be caused by incompetency of the human resource managers, unfamiliar goals and targets, infrequency of appraisals, and biasness by the evaluating officers.
This report also concludes that some institutions like the national bank of Kuwait limit the potential in their employees by setting very low targets and by limiting the number of employees that can achieve high scores. Therefore, the performance of the employees cannot be pegged on the available bonuses or rewards.
Recommendation This report recommends that national bank of Kuwait and other similar institutions should involve direct managers in guiding employees on performance appraisal. Such guidance should indicate to the employee the parameters of evaluation, the points of evaluation, and the need for evaluation to avoid conflicts.
The direct manager should also establish constant communication and feedback with the employee. This strategy will enable them appreciate the results of performance appraisal. Secondly, the report also recommends that National bank of Kuwait and other institutions of the sort should provide their employees with information about their goals and targets. Such moves should be done at the beginning of every financial period.
Employees should be told what to have achieved at a certain time of the year. Informed employees will work hard to reach the goals that the organization sets.
Achievement of individual goals will then translate to achievement of organizational goals. The third recommendation that this research offers is that the national Bank of Kuwait and other similar institutions should hire qualified and competent human resource managers.
The research recommends that such human resource officers should go through a series of personality tests to assess whether they qualify to lead and to appraise others.
It is also the recommendation of this report that human resource managers that are hired from other organizations should have recommendation letters to approve that they are able to perform performance appraisal successfully to ensure that employees gain confidence in the human resource managers. Confidence and trust in the human resource managers will ensure that there are reduced objections and hence conflicts to performance appraisals.
Works Cited Baroda, Syatawan. “360 Degrees Feedback Appraisals: An Innovative Approach to Performance Management System.” International Journal of Management
White Collar Crime Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help
Introduction Champion (2011) defines white collar crimes as “a non violent crime, usually committed in commercial situations, for financial gain.” The Federal Bureau of Investigations cites the use of concealment, deceit or trust-violation as the primary mechanisms for committing these crimes.
Individuals often carry out these offenses in order to access property, services or property. Alternatively, they may do so as a protective measure against the loss of these latter incentives. Others engage in white-collar crime in order to gain an advantage over their colleagues at work or in business.
The public categorizes white-collar crime as non violent. Many wrongfully assume that it is a victimless crime because of this label. However cheating, stealing and deceit are synonymous to the crime, and have the potential to destroy families, companies, investors or even an economy.
Motivations, consequences and punishment for white-collar crime Parties affected by the crime and how it affects them
White collar criminals place more emphasis on their personal needs than their organization’s to the point of downplaying the real costs of their actions. For instance, a lawyer may dishonestly increase the number of billable hours that he did per file. If this same person handles about 70 cases per week, then the organization could lose about $150,000 dollars in revenue. Once the tactic becomes commonplace, then the organization could lose millions in annual returns (Naso, 2012).
Aside from the increased losses experienced by such firms, white collar crimes also shortchange clients. Professionals, sellers and business persons will make promises that they cannot deliver and this will render them uncompetitive. For instance, the above lawyer would claim that he has made a court appearance when he has not.
Clients will keep wondering why their cases are dragging on and may take their business elsewhere. This type of crime also harms coworkers because someone will get credit for work they have not done. The white-collar criminal may seem more hardworking or diligent than their peers, and this could attract incentives like promotions, salaries or other perks.
Honest coworkers may become demoralized over such a state of affairs and the institution will lose out. In the world of business, entrepreneurs who engage in white-collar crime may seem more lucrative for partnership than their honest counterparts. Customers may take their business there under the assumption that they will be better off. In the end, the white-collar criminals rarely deliver while the honest businessmen may become demoralized or even go out of business.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In developing nations, white collar crime manifests as corruption. This stems from the fact that white collar crime is so deeply entrenched in their corporate system that it has become almost a necessity to do business. In places like Russia, a business has no chance of survival if it does not pay bribes to government bureaucrats (Healy
The portrait of Marchesa Brigida Spinola Doria by Peter Paul Rubens Essay best essay help: best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Rubens was born in Siege, Germany, in 1577. He was a prominent baroque artist. He supported Baroque movement of arts and travelled popularize it around Europe. The purpose of this paper is to use visual skills to analyze the portrait of “Marchesa Brigida Spinola Doria”.
Analysis The title of the painting is “Marchesa Broginda Spinola Doria” by Peter Paul Rubens. Although the exact date is not known, Rubens indicates that he finished this work in 1606 at the time he was working in Genoa. The portrait shows a young Marchesa Broginda Spinola Doria in her wedding gown at the age of 22, just after she married Giacomo Massimiliano Doria in 1605.
The extravagant Baroque style, to which Rubens belonged, was one of the most popular artistic movements in Europe in the 17th and 18th centuries. This is because it placed a lot of emphasis on color, movement and sensuality (Andersen, 2006). Although this portrait does not provide evidence of movement, it is easy to analyze it in terms of Baroque movement, with the reference to exaggerations in color, light, emotions and sensationalism (Buci-Glucksmann, 1994).
Like most popular paintings of the Baroque movement, Reuben’s “Portrait of Marchesa Broginda Spinola Doria” was developed using oil on canvas. From an analysis of the portrait, the viewer notes the gaze and the angle of architecture. This indicates that Rubens intended his audience to use a worm’s eye view.
According to the National Gallery of Arts, the painting was initially large and more imposing, but it was cut into a smaller frame sometimes in the 19th century (National Gallery of Arts, 2013). Brigida’s pose is evidently static, with no evidence of movement. However, Rubens emphasized on the exaggerated light, which in this case, is successful in activating the pose.
In addition, some diagonal flow of red curtain behind Brigida provides a good way of activating the static pose. Moreover, it is worth noting how Reuben has used his skills in applying thin but fine brush. For instance, the slivery satin dress worn by Brigida as part of her attractive and seemingly expensive dress was developed using layers of almost translucent glazes.
In fact, to achieve this, Rubens highlighted it with thick and freely painted strokes of brush. It is clear that Rubens must have spent adequate amount of time in developing this portrait because it appears that he combined his bold style of painting with traditional style of focusing on details.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Emphasis on color is evident. Rubens has used both primary and secondary colors. The whitish-grey color of the dress, the bright-red curtain, the whitish brown color of the face, the red lips the black eyes of Brigida are the most eye-catching features of the portrait. Light and dark are also evident in the work. For instance, while exaggeration of light is evident on the particular details of the subject such as the face and the dress, the objects behind her are actually fading to give the subject ability to attract the viewer’s eye.
The symmetrical details of the portrait give the subject its dominance on the plane. Brigida occupies more than 80% of the portrait. The smooth texture of the dress other details shows the preciousness of the wedding gown, while the smooth texture of the face indicate the beauty with Brigida.
Reflection I selected this portrait as an example of age-old portraits that still show the skills and talent of the ancient artists. In addition, it demonstrates the need for appraising Baroque as one style that contributed to the evolution of modern arts. It is clear that Rubens was attempting to show the beauty of women in Genoa and the need for cities and states to appreciate, respect and appreciate their women.
References Andersen, L. (2006). Baroque and Rococo Art. New York: H. N. Abrams.
Buci-Glucksmann, N. (1994). Baroque Reason: The Aesthetics of Modernity. New York, NY: Sage
National Gallery of Arts. (2013). The portrait of Marchesa Brigida Spinola Doria, 1606 by Sir Peter Paul Rubens. Retrieved from https://www.nga.gov/collection/art-object-page.46159.html
Ethical Leader Characteristics Essay best college essay help
In spite of the widespread study that focuses on leadership, the issue of ethical leadership continues to be challenged with inconsistencies, paradoxes, and contradictions. Desire to have ethical leaders has led to numerous changes in leadership styles. One of the recent leadership styles is transformative leadership.
Caldwell et al., posit, “One benefit of becoming a transformative leader is that greater trust will be developed between the leader and their followers” (2012, p. 176). Indeed, “…leadership is more about the followers than it is about the leader” (Bennis Caldwell et al. 2012, p. 176). Without followers, there can be no leader.
An individual becomes a leader if he or she has a group of people that he mobilizes to pursue a mutual objective. Bennis and Nanus allege, “To merit the trust of organizational stakeholders, the leaders of tomorrow’s organization must raise their standards, demonstrate their character and meet the expectations of a cynical but increasingly complex world” (2007, p. 123).
Bennis and Nanus posit that for a leader to succeed one ought to entrust cohorts with activities, transform the cohorts into leaders, and transform the leaders into instruments of change. The sentiment proves that for a leader to succeed, he or she has to depend on his followers.
A leader can hardly succeed in achieving organizational goals without drawing the followers close. The role of a leader is to oversee organizational operations and give advice on areas that require changes. Consequently, a leader has to rely on followers for all organizational activities.
Caldwell et al. (2012) formulated a “transformative leader” model that leads to ethical leadership by emphasizing on the importance of ethical practices like charisma, humility, values, principles, and servant leadership as some of the tenets of a transformative leader. According to Caldwell et al. (2012), a transformative leader is a servant leader. The leader ought to devote his or her attention to the interests of his or her subjects.
Caring about others is one of the organizational ethics. Charisma refers to the ability of a leader to inspire others. By emphasizing on charisma in their “transformative leader” model, Caldwell et al. implies that a leader ought to establish a cordial relationship with followers. Charismatic leaders back an exceedingly moral purpose. Hence, a leader that meets the model would surely be ethical.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Mayer et al. allege, “A good ethical leader should first of all be truthful to themselves before they can effectively lead others” (2012, p. 152). Without moral identity, it would be difficult for a leader to become an ethical example. Moral identity is associated with good behavior like charitable giving.
A leader with moral identity treats all the followers with equality and is trustworthy. Conversely, a leader that does not have moral identity exhibits unethical features like dishonesty and greed. Hence, such a leader does not portray ethical behavior and cannot be an ethical example to cohorts.
Employees learn through observing their leaders. Hence, majority of the employees borrow their behaviors from their leaders (Mayer et al. 2012). A leader without moral identity would lead to employees becoming corrupt. Such a leader lacks self-regulatory mechanisms, which promote ethical behaviors. Consequently, he portrays unethical behaviors, which he or she transfers to cohorts.
For leaders to promote ethical behavior in organizations, they need to appreciate all the followers that behave in an ethical manner and reprimand, or even punish those that behave unethically. Punishing followers that behave unethically would go a long way towards promoting ethical behavior in an organization.
Rewarding employees that behave ethically would not have a significant impact in promoting ethical behavior (Fielder 1986). For instance, some followers could be using their unethical behavior to enrich themselves at the expense of the organization. In such an instance, rewarding followers that behave ethically would not deter the unethical followers from pursuing their immoral activities.
Nevertheless, punishing such employees by dismissing them, imposing enormous financial penalty, or withholding their salaries would compel them to change their behavior. Majority of the employees struggles to get jobs (Fielder 1986). After getting the job, they settle down and forget the challenges they faced when looking for a job.
Eventually, they cease to appreciate their employment and engage in activities that are detrimental to an organization. The best way to prevent such cases happening in an organization is to impose severe punishment on employees or cohorts that behave unethically. This would discourage the employees from engaging in unethical behavior.
We will write a custom Essay on Ethical Leader Characteristics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More While this may sound plausible theoretically, it does not manifest itself in most cases. Even though some followers refrain from unethical behavior due to fear of losing jobs, those that benefit from the behavior hardly abandons it despite the threat of facing severe punishment.
In most cases, such threats only intensify their behavior as they try to reap enough before facing the punishment or losing their jobs. In other cases, such followers change their ways of propagating unethical behavior to avoid being noticed by their leaders. Hence, the organization continues incurring mysterious loses that it cannot blame on a particular follower.
There is a strong relationship between transformative leadership and trait theories of leadership. Trait theories focus on personal characteristics like personality, decisiveness, cooperativeness, and persistence (Derue et al. 2011). A leader with these features is likely to be successful. On the other hand, a transformative leader uses his or her traits to influence others. For instance, the leader applies his or her decisiveness to win trust from cohorts.
A decisive leader makes followers believe in goals they are pursuing, thus, dedicating their energy to the goals. Similarly, individual’s personality determines if one gains support from their followers. Furthermore, transformative leadership is associated with the contingency theory of leadership effectiveness. The theory suggests, “Leadership effectiveness depends on the interaction of two factors: the leader’s task or relations motivation and aspects of the situation” (Fielder 1986, p. 34).
Relations motivation is determined using coworkers that a leader prefers least. If the coworkers score high, it implies that the leader has managed to transform the workers into embracing organizational goals. On the other hand, if they score low, it means that the leader has not transformed the workers. In other words, employee commitment depends on the level of transformation a leader instills in them.
The concept of moral identity discussed in “transformative leader” model devised by Mayer et al. (2012) aligns with trait theories of leadership. Trait theories of leadership focus on personal aspects like personality, judgment, sociability, decisiveness, and socioeconomic background.
These aspects influence how a leader behaves. For instance, one’s judgment and personality are what determine if a leader becomes compassionate, caring, and honest. On the other hand, moral identity is what makes leaders exhibit certain traits. Hence, moral identity leads to either ethical or unethical traits.
Reference List Bennis, W
Concept of Capital Budgeting Research Paper college essay help: college essay help
The financial obligations of a government entity can be planned through effective capital budgeting (Peterson, 2004, p. 56). Most government entities have adopted capital budgeting as a way of enhancing economic stability and debt planning.
The government has been forced to have multiple roles when it comes to capital budgets because of the ever increasing government spending. Government entities are supposed to manage the resources allocated to them in the best way possible by finding a clear definition of capital and current expenditures (Peterson, 2004, p. 58).
The net worth of government expenditures can be improved by having the right tools of fiscal policy. Government entities have to implement all the debt strategies of the federal government and ensure a successful execution of all programs (Pecorella, 2006, p. 112). The New York State Government is a local authority that has been struggling with debts for a very long time and will be the centre of discussion in paper. The debt capacity of a government entity determines whether it can borrow money or not.
Every government entity has a debt limit that should not be exceeded in any way (Pecorella, 2006, p. 120). Government entities accrue some debt obligations in the course of their operations and their ability to repay debt obligations on time using their own revenues is what referred to as the debt capacity. It is important to note that the debt capacity of a government entity can not be determined if there is any kind of revenue deficit.
The amount of debt obligations should not in any way exceed the total government revenues (Pecorella, 2006, p. 120). Some of the most important factors that analysts use to determine the debt capacity of a government entity include annual revenues, the real property value and outstanding debts.
The three factors are used to measure the ability of an organization to borrow funds. Public administrators have the responsibility of ensuring that the allocated funds are utilized in best way possible for government entities to maintain an optimal debt capacity. A government entity that has high revenues and very small outstanding debts will definitely have a thigh debt capacity (Peterson, 2004, p. 145). The New York State authorities should ensure that public spending does not go beyond the debt capacity of the state.
The New York State Government can only deal with its debt problems by refunding or reorganizing existing debt obligations (Peterson, 2004, 2008, p. 166). The effectiveness of this kind of plan depends on how a government entity handles its debt obligations. The New York State Government should make repayment of debts with the highest interest rates the first priority.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Prioritizing debts with high interest rates is one of the most appropriate ways of reorganizing existing debt obligations (Peterson, 2004, p. 166). Debts with high interest rates can prevent a government entity from undertaking other important financial obligations and hence the reorganization strategy of ensuring that such debts are given the first priority brings continuity.
Government entities incur a lot of expenditures in the course of their operations and therefore reducing their total expenditures is the other strategy of reorganizing their existing debt obligations (Ward, 2006, p. 24). A reduction in total expenditures means that extra funds will be available for the government entity to service its debts.
The New York State Government needs alternative funding options in order to reduce its debts. The high debt obligations that are normally accrued by government entities would be low if there were alternative funding options (Ward, 2006, p. 24). The most practical alternative that the New York State Government can use to fund its debt obligation is requesting for assistance from the federal government.
It is difficult for a government entity to fund its debt obligations without the necessary assistance from the government. The federal government can offer its assistance quarterly or annually. The New York State Government can increase its tax base as a way of maximizing its revenues. It is possible for a state to increase its revenues by expanding its tax base and increasing less sensitive tax rates (Ward, 2006, p. 69). The extra revenue collected can be used by the state to fund its debt obligations. There are other alternative funding options but the two that have been mentioned in this paper are the most appropriate for a state government.
In conclusion, capital budgeting by government entities is a very serious issue that needs a comprehensive evaluation. The determination the debt capacity of a government entity is an assessment process that takes into account total annual revenues, real property value and outstanding debts as the most appropriate measures (Peterson, 2004, p. 65). The reduction of the total debt of a government entity depends on how the entity reorganizes its debt obligations.
Prioritizing debts according to interest rates and the reduction of total expenditure are some of the best strategies of reorganizing existing debt obligations. Government entities should establish alternative funding options as a way of reducing their debts (Ward, 2006, p. 112). Government entities with high debts should seek assistance from the federal government for them to successfully fund their debt obligations.
References Pecorella, R. (2006). Governing New York State. Albany: State University of New York Press.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Concept of Capital Budgeting specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Peterson, P. (2004). Capital budgeting: Theory and practice. New York, NY: John Wiley
Stages of Growth Diagnostic Essay essay help
Table of Contents Existence
List of References
Various models illustrate the growth of businesses. The size of a company and stages of growth are used as the standards for determining business growth. This paper will examine a growth framework based on existence, survival, success, take-off and resource maturity phases.
Existence At this stage, the organisation is at infancy and the owner is struggling to attract clients. For a small business, the owner handles all management duties including supervision of junior staff and decision-making. Many small business start-ups fail at this stage due to various challenges. Some businesses that succumb to these challenges are sold off at net present value (Poole 2002, p. 75).
Survival Businesses at this stage have successfully overcome the challenges of the first stage. At this stage, the business has enough capacity of customers who are satisfied. The main objectives for the business are to break even and gather enough funds for expansion. The number of employees start to increase although the decision making function is still performed by the owner.
At the end of this stage, the business may achieve growth in size and profitability. Some businesses however remain at this stage for a long period surviving on marginal returns until they cease operations based on the decisions of the owner (McKeown 2007, p. 61).
Success Businesses at this phase have achieved growth and have collected enough funds that are capable of financing expansion. Market penetration and the volume of customers at this stage are healthy. The business can either expand or remain at this level while providing the owner with funds for diversification since the profits are above average.
An increase in size of operations and the accompanying revenues prompt the owner to hire competent managers to oversee various functions within the business (Singh 2010, p. 15). The systems are developed and financial planning and other methods are introduced to ensure smooth operations.
To ensure survival, the company should adapt to changing conditions in the industry especially competition. For instance, many automobile makers did not make it past the 1970s and 1980s since they could not adapt to changing conditions (Rao 2002, p. 214).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Take Off The company at this stage experiences rapid growth and the main concern is financing the growth. The owners delegate most of the duties to managers to improve efficiency. The managers should be competent enough to handle environmental dynamics. The systems at this stage are under duress from growth and they are therefore improved to accommodate the extra workload. Planning and decision making are improved.
For decisions to be made by the owner, various factors have to be considered due to the increase in stakeholders and independence of the business from the owner. To graduate to the next level, the owner of the business must show maturity in management and financial planning (Churchill and Lewis 1983, p. 126).
Resource Maturity The objectives of a company at this stage are to strengthen and manage well the financial gains achieved from the other stages. To cope up with the rapid growth, the company should also expand the management or it will succumb to the ineffectiveness arising from growth. At this stage, the business should be a separate entity from the owner. The systems should be broad and well developed. Moreover, the company should have adequate staffs who are experienced in their fields.
List of References Churchill, N
The Downfall of Pentheus: The Clash of a Monarch and a God Essay essay help free
Introduction: Pentheus, the Victim of Bacchanalia In his famous tragedy “The Bakkhai,” Euripides brings back the famous story of Pentheus and Dionysos. Although the mythology of the Ancient Greece is full of murder, the story of Pentheus’s death is one of the most shocking of all, which already says a lot, given the shocking brutality of Ancient Greek myths.
Thesis statement Although it is traditionally considered that the key reason behind Pentheus’s death was his denial of Dionysos as a god, it can also be argued that Pentheus’s non-acceptance of Dionysos was only the factor, while the key reason behind his death was taking the tradition of bacchanalias away from the citizen, as well as his acceptance of a feminine role and the resulting mistakes in political strategy, as well as the fact that Pentheus obviously underestimated the power of the crowd.
“The Bakkhai”: Summary and Mythological Background Though the tragic event known as the death of Pentheus, which was later on described by Euripides in his “the Bakkhai” is notoriously famous all over the world, recalling the key events will help analyzing the reasons behind Pentheus’s death more efficiently. Known as the monarch of the Thebes, Pentheus was against bacchanalias as very sinful and indecent events.
After Pentheus captures Dionysos, the latter feels outraged and makes Agave lose her mind and join him. Trying to stop the mother, Pentheus attends the bacchanalia, but his insane mother murders him, thinking he was a lion. As soon as the bacchanalia is over, however, she realizes what she has done and cries. Dionysos turns Agave’s father into a dragon and her mother into a snake, exiling Agave and her sisters forever.
The Reasons for Pentheus’s Downfall: Where It All Started from Though the reasons for Pentheus’s defeat are obvious, there might be some arguments concerning his own fault in what had happened. Even though Pentheus should have given Dionysos more credit, there are other factors that predetermined Pentheur’s downfall.
Pentheus’s refusal to accept Dionysos
The given reason for Pentheus downfall seems the most obvious. Indeed, according to the plot of the tragedy, the monarch is murdered by his own mother in the midst of bacchanalia that has got completely out of control:
AGAVE: Men are hunting us! We’ll fight them with our wands! (Euripides line 1000).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To start with, unless Panthos had prohibited the tradition of bacchanalia and mocked Dionysos, the latter would have not feel the urge to take his revenge on Pentheus; his priestesses and followers would have never become so enraged:
[…] Here’s the truth:
He’s a ‘god’ lightning burned up with his mother as a punishment for her great lie (Euripides lines 358–360).
Therefore, the bacchanalia feats would have not become so uncontrollable; in her turn, Pentheus’s mother would have not decided to join the protesting Bacchantes and, therefore, would have never gone so insane that she would devour her own son.
Playing a more feminine role: Pentheus’s retreat
It could also be argued that the downfall of Pentheus can be explained by the change in his policy as a monarch. If comparing the Pentheus of the first part of the story and the Pentheus that the readers encounter in the final part of the poem, one will see that these two have nothing in common with each other. The Pentheus that the readers see at the start of the poem is strong, powerful and confident:
I have arrested a handful already, they’re tied up now in a public stable (Euripides 336–337).
However, the Pentheus that appears in the final part of the poem is weak and doubting, performing a role that can be viewed as much more feminine:
We will write a custom Essay on The Downfall of Pentheus: The Clash of a Monarch and a God specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More DIONYSOS: […] hallucination fed his desires. That was how I humiliated him (Euripides 854–856).
Such weakness cost Pentheus a life.
When the power of the crowd is underestimated
Another reason for Pentheus to lose not only his throne, but also his life was the fact that he underestimated the power of the crowd. Considering himself above the people who technically were his subjects, he made a huge mistake. Once a crowd is out of control, there is nothing that a single person can do – the crowd will smash the person and continue protesting until it finally gets what it wants:
their voices swelling together, then the whole mountain started to dance for Bakkhos (Euripides lines 995–996).
Dionysos, his pride and his inferiority complex
It would be wrong, however, to believe that Dionysos was the only person to blame for what had happened; no matter how weird and irrational his actions might have become, there was still another person who actually had a lot to deal with the bacchanalia.
As long as Dionysos felt that he was underestimated and, in fact, was not considered a legitimate member of the Greek Pantheon, he would feel the urge to take his revenge on the people who were standing in his way. Therefore, Dionysos’ inferiority complex can also be considered the reason for Pentheus’s downfall:
DIONYSOS: But you, Pentheus, can be certain That the God you call “dead” – Is Dionysos, a god so real He’ll make you answer for every Outrage you do to him (Euripides lines 718–722).
Indeed, if Dionysos had not felt the urge to prove his divinity, he would have never gone so far as to make Pentheus’s mother kill her own son. The more power one has, the more responsible one becomes, realizing that his powers can be the source of not only justice, but also grief and sorrow if used irresponsibly. Therefore, Dionysos obviously lacked self-assurance and responsibility, which cost Pentheus his life.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Downfall of Pentheus: The Clash of a Monarch and a God by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Discussion: Picking the Most Legitimate Reason When defining the point at which Pentheus’s fate becomes obvious, one must admit that Pentheus died because of his refusal to accept Dionysos as a god. If Pentheus did not prohibit bacchanalias, he would have stayed alive and would not have had been torn limb to limb to the enraged bacchantes. However, unless Dionysos would not have felt the urge to establish himself as a god, there would have been no conflict between him and Dionysos, which means that the inferiority complex of the latter serves as a prerequisite to the tragedy.
Conclusion: Pentheus and His Untimely Death Though it is generally accepted that Pentheus was murdered by his mother as a result of his refusal to accept Dionysos, it can also be claimed with certainty that the cause of Pentheus’s death was prohibiting the bacchanalian feasts to honor Dionysos. On the one hand, it is clear that Pentheus’s stubbornness led to his tragic and untimely death.
On the other hand, it would be a mistake to think that the denial of Dionysos was the only reason for Pentheus’s downfall. Also caused by the politics that Pentheus preferred to rule the land, the moods that were brewing among the Dionysos’s adepts, and many other reasons, this death is a graphic example of an unreasonable policy that lacked wisdom and caution. That said, the death of Pentheus still remains one of the most notorious monarch deaths in the Greek mythology.
Works Cited Euripides. “Bakkhai.” Classical Tragedy, Greek and Roman. Ed. Robert W. Corrigan. New York, NY: Applause Theater and Cinema Books, 1990. Print. 367–431.
American Calling Essay (Book Review) college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Technology plays a significant role towards enhancing civilization because everything in the modern world depends on it. Studies suggest that people are recognized with the type of the device they carry indicating the level of civilization of an individual. To many people, living without technology is compared to living without the basic need, such as food. Technology affects life in all perspectives including politically, socially and economically.
This implies that life in the modern society would not be the same without technology. In the food industry, technology has continued to redirect the health of individuals all over the world. In the modern society, the shelf life of food products is augmented by using improved technology. Time taken to make food in the modern society is less as compared to that spent on preparing meals in the traditional society.
In the communication industry, technology has made human beings dependant on gadgets. For instance, an individual would be sitting in one corner of the world and be able to communicate with the other individual in a different corner. The world is now viewed as a global community based on the effectiveness of technology, which is interdependent and highly connected.
For instance, by use of telephone technology, communication among people in remote areas has been made possible. This paper looks at the impacts of technology on human life. To do this successfully, a critical review of the book, “American Calling,” is conducted. The book talks about the technological role of the telephone in the American society.
Summary In the first chapter, the author starts by questioning the real impact of technology on human life. He asks whether the telephone makes people active or lazy. Moreover, Fischer questions the role of the telephone in bringing the families together. In this regard, he observes that technology has both advantages and disadvantages.
Fischer confirms that inventions of previous technologies softened people. This implies that it made life easier because many things were produced with ease. The invention of the radio negatively affected people’s morality while electric lighting immobilized people because they would spend most of their time at home.
In 1926, the author observes that many people in the society were concerned with the rising rates of immorality owing to the technological inventions. By then, Americans were experiencing radical changes, particularly in terms of material changes. He further notes that material innovations are of value as compared to any other innovation because of its role in improving the living standards of individuals.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For instance, innovations in the food industry improved food distribution and sanitation, which lengthened human life. The inventions of cars enabled many Americans to travel to various places that they had never imagined in their lives (Fischer, 1992). This allowed them to interact with various individuals who had different experiences.
Regarding the question whether technology drives social change in the American society, the author has mixed reactions since he notes that technological changes influence the dynamics of all globalization theories. He is of the view that everything in the modern society depends mainly on technology.
For instance, food preservatives and artificial fabrics are the major necessities in the modern society. In his attempt to define technology, the author employs a dictionary explanation, which states that technology is an applied science. In this regard, he posits that technology brings about wealth hence it is not readily shared as compared to the findings of science. The author narrows down to discuss the aspects of technology regarding its application of devices and systems.
He introduces the role of technology in the life of an individual. Incidentally, he perceives technology in terms of material culture as it enables a person to realize his economic potential. Under the impact analysis section, the author presents various views regarding the impacts of technology. He employs Ogburn’s view that technology is a billiard-ball meaning that it originates from an external environment and affects the operations of society in a number of ways.
He gives an example by observing that the emergence of the automobile replaced the need for horses in the modern society. Through this, there is reduced need for feed-grain, which increases the land for planting edible grains. This reduces the costs of various food varieties (Fischer, 1992). By extension, this leads to the emergence of the feudal system of production.
In the second chapter, the author discusses the impacts of the telephone on the American society. He begins by appreciating the role of Alexander Graham, who invented the telephone. He goes on to argue that the telephone system developed rapidly between 1876 and 1940. His focus is on the consumers whose lives have changed greatly since they started using the phone.
He does not talk about the role of engineers, but rather the consumers. One of the impacts of the telephone on customers was that it affected the cost of communicating with other people because it reduced the prices. During the Second World War, consumers in the US and Canada had to subscribe for the telephone services from an expensive operator who had monopolized the sector.
We will write a custom Book Review on American Calling specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Before the invention of the telephone technology, people had to pass information via the traditional means such as yelling or using the mail messenger. Telephone technology brought radical changes that shaped personal communication structures in society (Fischer, 1992). Even though businesspersons and the government still relied on letters, things changed because they also started using the telephone to pass urgent information.
In the third chapter, the author discusses the role of the telephone in educating the public. On the other hand, the introduction of the telephone in society was a complex idea that needed the intervention of the government and other state agencies. This was in the areas of capital and cost of education to disseminate the knowledge.
In the fourth chapter, Fischer shows how telephone technology spread nationally. It was the role of the government and other contracted organizations to spread telephone technology to other parts of the country. Chapter 5 is an extension of chapter four because it narrows down to a local level whereby he talks about the spread of telephone technology within the community.
The telephone affected the lives of many locals because families communicated easily with each other meaning that emergencies could be addressed faster as compared to the previous decades whereby a messenger had to be sent to the neighbour to inform them of an emergency.
He notes in the sixth chapter that telephone technology became a commonplace in the United States since everyone was using it. Each person was in need of the technology because of its role. In fact, few people would survive without the telephone in the house. This changed the relationships and interactions among members of society. In the seventh chapter, he suggests that the telephone had a local attachment, as it had become a basic need.
The telephone was used to fulfil various individual aspirations. In fact, he notes in chapter 8 that people made personal calls, which had personalized meanings. He concludes by noting in chapter nine that technology had a tremendous impact on the lives of individuals because it defined their lives. Without technology, it would be difficult for individuals to conduct their normal businesses (Fischer, 1992).
Critical Review The works of Fischer are of benefit to any historian in at least three major ways. It should be remembered that his writings on the telephone are the most pervasive in the decade. His views were of essence mainly because he offerd an excellent summary of historiography, which were mainly utilized in studies touching on science and technology.
His works are strong because they offer a unique approach regarding the social aspects of communication technologies. This would be of great help to educators who are interested in developing and understanding technology in society. The research methods that he employed are also valid because they offer effective examples to both positivists and post-positivists scholars. In his analysis, the author started by analyzing the methods that are usually employed in historiography.
Not sure if you can write a paper on American Calling by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In his view, the methods that sociologists employ to report the impacts of modernity in the society have too many assumptions meaning that they cannot be relied upon. He observes that sociologists and economists have an assumption that socio-economic and psychological changes take place simultaneously, which is not always the case.
He opposes the idea of using technological determinism to construe the impacts of technology. On the other hand, he is against the view of those who believe that technological developments evolve independently out of social influence. To him, this view is too mechanical. From a soft determinist perspective, technology and social forces have a relationship, which is mutual. However, the author feels that this perspective is too imagery.
Fischer employed a model referred to as the user heuristic constructivist model. He developed this model after reviewing a number of theories carefully. He used this model to comprehend the impacts of the telephone on the American society. In fact, this approach is exceptional and distinct because it follows a clearly established method. He understood the impact of the telephone from a consumer’s perspective.
This is different from other analyses of technology, which view it in terms of technical artefact. In this view, the consumer has the power of deciding the type of technology that would dominate in society. The idea that the telephone is a space transcending technology makes Fischer’s analysis very strong mainly because it connects the telephone technology with other forms of technologies, which have continuously affected the human life.
For instance, he compares the effects of the telephone with those of the automobile, given the fact that their influence on human life is closely related. He makes use of statistical evidence to show that the telephone technology is similar to other forms of technologies. Finally, Fischer employs a mixed method research successfully. Other researchers are able to utilize his mixed method successfully by following his example.
Reference Fischer, C. (1992). America calling: A social history of the telephone to 1940. Berkeley: University of California Press.
New media technologies, ICTs, convergence and digitisation Essay college admissions essay help
Introduction The modern economic development is largely dependent on the investments in new media technologies. New media technologies, ICTs, convergence, and digitisation are seen as the new engines of economic growth for many countries from the perspectives of labour transactions and trade.
The digitisation together with technological convergence era have marked a new era for economic development through alteration of the traditional approaches to organisational governance, production systems, forms of labour organisation, and alterations of means of surveillance coupled with business counter surveillance strategies.
One of the peculiar advantages of new media and digitisation convergence akin to boosting economic development of many nations is attributed to the capacity of new digital communication developments. The argument is the capacity to make it possible for media organisations and or individuals to deliver various audio, text, and even video materials over the same wired, fibre optic, and or wireless connections to a myriad of destinations within seconds or fractions of seconds.
This way, the technological developments of the twentieth century have made it possible for multiple products to be merged together to one product that carries the advantages possessed by all other products. However, as argued in the a paper, although these changes have been instrumental in the propagation of many countries’ economies in terms of effectiveness and efficacy in the management of organisational communications systems, there are still dominant challenges that are associated with any form of convergence.
Such challenges include increased risks to which an organisation can be susceptible to among them being cyber security threats. With this challenge and many others notwithstanding, the main focus of the paper is to discuss and analyse why new media technologies, ICTs, convergence, and digitisation are seen as the new engines of economic growth for many countries coupled with offering an explanation of how countries have responded to the challenges.
New media technologies, ICT, digitisation and convergence as engines of economic growth ICT encompasses a myriad of services coupled with networks, which facilitate the accumulation without negating the flow of both private and public crucial information.
With regard to the United Nations Economic Commission for Africa (2004), ICT involves “internet service provisions, telecommunications, and information technology equipment and services, media and broadcasting, libraries and documentation centres, commercial information providers, network- based information services and other related information and communication activities” (p.11).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Scrutiny of this definition for ICT reveals that it is quite similar to the definition offered for information technology (IT). Chowdhury (2000) also notes this similarity but further makes a distinction that ICT comprises technologies, which capacitate the process transfer of a myriad of information such as data, audio, and textual.
Akwani (2005) notes the importance of ICT in the economic development using case example of Nigeria by claiming, “The fastest growing employer of labour in Nigeria is the telecommunications industry” (p.45). Growth of the telecommunication industry underlines the growth of other sectors of economy by virtue of the fact that telecommunication is an enhancing tool for ardent inter and intra- organisational communications and information sharing.
Researches on how investments in ICT and new media technologies can boost economic development have been advancing over the last two decades (Awoleye 2012). In 1950s, Lau Tokutsu (1992) argues that the economic development recorded in the US is widely instigated by technological changes as opposed to factors such as capital and labour.
Guided by this perception, several studies have also been advanced in the developing world to determine the implication of technological changes on economic growth. Such studies present contradictory findings since, while some people find positive correlations between investments in ICT and economic growths, some others record a negative correlation between the two.
For instance, Berndelt et al. (1998) conducted a research on the implication of ICT capital investments on the productivity growth of selected industries of the US. He found that a negative relationship existed between the two. These findings were reproduction of similar findings by Parsons et al. (1990) who argued that, in the Canadian context, “banks did not yield good benefits from their ICT capital investments” (p.23).
From the US context, Morrison (1997) reported that ICT investments had minimal implication on economic growth of the US-based organisations. However, Chowdhury (2000) contested these findings by claiming, “Many sceptics have not seen the roles of ICTs in the efforts intended to alleviate poverty and bring food security to developing countries” (p.425).
Nevertheless, the author acknowledged that the challenges of alleviating poverty are incredibly complex. However, he insisted that, for this to happen, nations must invest in efficient production systems. Investments in the ICT infrastructures are one of the noble strides to put up such systems.
We will write a custom Essay on New media technologies, ICTs, convergence and digitisation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Despite the negative relationship between economic growth and investments in ICT findings, many countries have not brought to a halt their efforts to invest in the ICT capital. The justification for this endeavour is pegged on the positive findings in the relationship between ICT and new media communications with economic development.
For instance, Lau Tokutsu (1992) investigated roles of investments in ICT in the economic growth of the US between 1960 and 1990. Among the contributors of the growth listed by the scholars, “nearly half of the growth aggregate national output in the US was attributed to ICT investments than the non-ICT or labour” (Awoleye 2012, p.25).
Schreyer (2000) who sought to study the effects of investments in ICT on productivity of G7 nation’s labour echoed similar findings. By employing samples from nations such as Germany, Italy, the United Kingdom, the United States, Japan, and Canada, he found out that the tremendous growth in the labour productivity of the nations registered between 1990 and1996 was attributable by large proportion to the investments in the ICT infrastructures.
On a more general scale, Poh (2001) sought to know how investments in the ICT influenced Singapore’s productivity in overall. His findings indicated that investment in the ICT capital produced substantive rates of economic returns in the end.
Kim (2003) sought to confirm the validity of these findings though he based his research on the Korean context. According to Kim, “ICT capital contributed 16.3% to the output growth of Korean economy and has had strong positive effects on the growth of labour productivity in the long-run” (2003, p.57).
Although the findings are based on research conducted a decade ago, they are significant in the discussion of the current impacts of digitalisation era on economic growth of nations.
In fact, the advents of social media have created an immense opportunity for organisations to reach large numbers of potential consumers who would otherwise be impossible to reach using the conventional forms of media. Surprisingly, the operational platforms for these new media forms are principally rested on ICT and information technology developments.
Many nations, both in the developed and the developing world, have been implementing policies emanating from such research findings discussed above with the noble aim of ensuring that their countries keep at pace with new technological developments in the effort to raise their GDP.
Not sure if you can write a paper on New media technologies, ICTs, convergence and digitisation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Availability of digital-enhanced connectivity is an essential factor that investors consider in the making of decisions to make investments in any country especially the developing nations. Broadband technology being one of the means of interconnecting digital computers across the globe is a major engine that drives economic growth of many nations especially in the era of offshore business, technical support, and manufacturing outsourcing.
Awoleye (2012) contends with this argument by further maintaining that developing nations, which have better ICT infrastructure, are better placed to secure outsourcing, foreign investments, and or off shoring business (p.28). In this sense, internet connectivity is a major enhancing factor for fostering globalisation.
With regard to Paltridge (2008), internet interconnectivity enhanced through broadband is “beginning to have a fundamental impact on how economies work and on the global allocation of resources especially in the developing countries due to their greater integration in the global value chains than ever before” (p.13).
In the same extent, governments in many nations have hiked their investments in the internet and web-based service delivery in the public sector through an endeavour termed as the e-governance. The goal of investments in the e-governance is aimed at ensuring cost effective, efficient, and reliable service delivery in the public sector with noble objective of increasing attractiveness of e-business environments for both local and foreign investors.
E-governance fits within the theory on ICT systems, convergence, and new media technology theory on economic development since it is a tool for boosting economic development through the provision of integrated data centre, shared operation networks, and business processes coupled with one stop service delivery centres to all public consumers.
Another important facet for economic growth tied within the paradigms of the rapid development in the information communication systems developments recorded within the last two decades is the E-commerce. E- Commerce has boosted economic growth of many nations by enabling them to achieve higher levels of development through the creation of a fertile investment climate, which is an incredible catalyst for economic growth.
From national levels, studies, for instance, of Indjikian and Siegel (2005) show that e-commerce can create diverse and valid revenue streams to the governments through the development of new markets and products to trade in the markets. Meeting new challenges for propelling economic growth requires channels for information sharing.
This argument infers that organisations whose growth is influenced by the developments in ICT and new media communications systems deserve to be largely knowledge based. The implication is that they need to be constantly innovative and creative to meet the dynamics of the markets characterised by the influx of products and services that are availed for sale in a competitive mode on a daily basis.
E-Commerce as tool for economic development is immensely effective in this end since, through it, “new channels of knowledge diffusion and human interactivity in the work places are opened with an enhanced flexibility and adaptability” (Indjikian
Emergence and up rise of street gangs Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help online: college essay help online
This article reviews two writings, Karen A. Joe and Meda Chesney’s article “Just Every Mother’s Angel”, an analysis of gender and ethic variations in youth gang members and another article by Suudhir Alladi Venkatesh, “The Social Organization of Secret Gang Activity in an Urban Ghetto”. I am going to review the two articles separately. I will also show the relation that the two documents share. First of all it is notable that both documents are based on the general impact of the street gangs to the society where they exist.
The article “Just Every Mother’s Angel” was written by Karen A. Joe and Meda Chesney in 1995 and published by Sage Publications. The article is based on analysis of a research that was conducted in Hawaii on 48 former ethnic gang members. In their study, the authors were in a bid to determine if membership to a gang group is in any way affected by gender, age or any variation in ethnicity and if there is any relationship between them.
The article reports of the results from the interviews which covered areas such as the cause of the increase in the number of street gangs, challenges facing the members of the gangs and any correlation between gender and gang membership. The article records a dramatic increase in the rate by which youths are joining the gangs.
This is also evident by the police records in the increase in crime rates around the cities. Majority of the members of the gangs have been documented to be black Americans. The article also indicates that gender and ethnic background also plays a great part in gang participation. Gangs are majorly made up of the males while the female members are always more dedicated to softer chores such as food preparation.
In the article it is noted that the media is always interested in the “girls in gangs”. This is so because the media always want to find out more about the enlightened “female crook”. Other causes for involvement in gang groups are as a result of seeking popularity, peer pressure and being poor.
This is from the emphasis of the society on male toughness, braveness and protectiveness. Though in most cases gangs are always formed for financial and property extortion from their victims, a number of gangs are also known to be for revenge and security reasons.
Sudhir Alladi Venkatesh’s article “The Social Organization of Street Gang Activity in an Urban Ghetto” on the other hand is an essay that shows results made after the analysis of data collected on both street gangs and the general community. The essay tries to identify any relationship between the neighboring community and the street gangs.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Among the questions the article seeks to address include: Why do gangs tend to rise from specific communities? Did rural street gang action form autonomously or through contagion as well as the shifting of urban street gang groups? The article tries to identify if there is any organizational structure in the activities of the street gangs in the urban setup. In detail, the essay focuses on how the members of the street gangs correlate with their immediate neighbors.
The article incorporates the group characteristics with the social point of view. In this article the authors focus on data collected from Blackstone and further look at the patterns of activities displayed by the street gangs. To fully cover their scope of data collection, the writers considered factors such as response of the tenants, response to the presence of street gangs and also about the management of the community facilities.
The article notes that although the street gangs play a great role in community interactions, they do not get much public recognition when it comes to decision making. Their roles are majorly expressed in lowly considered activities such as drugs peddling and other negatively viewed activities.
This article dates the introduction of the rise in street gangs to have been caused by the massive loss in blue collar job employment in the 1960s. This resulted into scramble over casual jobs. Migration to urban areas also added to the effect of the rising numbers of the street gangs.
The rise in the number of street gangs is also as a result of the failing representation of the residents by both the law enforcers and the housing authority. Among the issues raised by the residents against the police include their unwillingness to conduct street and hallway patrols.
The residents believe that most fights among different gang groups are majorly as a result territorial conflicts. The article also bases its data collection on understanding the street gangs through their identity, culture, sexual relations and even their organizational structures. The author was able to identify that the gangs, apart from their primary goal of earning an increased amount of money extorted from the community and also tried to be accepted by the local community.
This was evidenced by the study where the author was able to identify that the gangs usually take part in social activities and in some cases provide security services to the local community. From the study, the author was also able to discover that though most of the gangs have revenue generation as their main objective, a number of them however maintain their values in providing security and defending themselves.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on Emergence and up rise of street gangs specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The author however insists that to fully understand the interactions among the street gangs and other members of the society, it requires investing much attention in the organization structure and on how they co-relate. The article has in detail covered all the factors that influence the existence of street gangs.
The article summarizes that gangs in most cases arise where there are youths facing financial, family or social problems such as overpopulation, rising poverty level and racism. The gangs generally start as a source of console, friendship and acceptance to the youth facing these problems. The groups also provide a home and food to those physically, sexually and psychologically abused. The groups have indeed a commendable characteristic of providing protection to their members.
The two articles both address the issue of the rise in the number of street gangs. The articles seek to address the importance of the street gangs to their members in the provision of security and general protection. The both articles address the factors that have led to the increase in street gangs.
From both articles it is evident that the authors have the same feeling that financial problem is the major cause of the rise in street gangs. Other causes identified by both articles include peer pressure, rising level of unemployment, drug abuse and general societal pressure on men for their masculinity.
Brownson and Debs Essay (Critical Writing) college admission essay help: college admission essay help
The subject of slavery and its different forms had been a thorny issue before the American Civil War. The country was divided into two factions. The South favored the slave labor system in which slaves were the property of their masters who took care of them. On the other hand, the North was in favor of the free labor wage system in which individuals were paid on the basis of their work done.
According to Orestes, in due consideration, the slave labor had several advantages over free labor (Dolbeare,
Global Leadership and Business Environment Essay scholarship essay help
Introduction Global leadership refers to the study of various disciplines, where future leaders in the personal experience field are informed of the principal elements they require. This enables them to familiarize effectively with globalization impacts (anthropological, psychological, sociological, geopolitical, geographical, and physiological).
In global leadership, individuals assess the collaborative efforts of various stakeholders amidst environmental challenges, and develop a vision that incorporates a worldwide mind- set.
Trends begin with colonialism, and are accelerated by innovation and mass media. This leads to a variety of novel concerns, which mankind has to solve. This paper aims at assessing whether majority of the leaders adhere to global leadership, and the future requirements these leaders need to survive in the global business arena (Ghemawat, 2005: 98).
Do Majority of the Leaders Follow Global Leadership? Considering all the uncertainty and volatility present in the current workforce and world, there is a great need to create successful global leaders.
The world has increasingly become complicated, unpredictable, and volatile (Morrison, 2000: 120). It is worth pointing out that there is extreme urbanization, growth in the population, and assorted combination of young and old employees, which has resulted to changes in the universal workforce. The workplace is increasingly being shaped by social learning and mobile technology (Jokinen, 2005: 221).
Globally, leaders and their workforces are linked together by economic uncertainty. Majority of the leaders are aware of the shifts in the present world and workforce. Therefore, they have adopted global leadership, which is necessary for organizations to traverse transformation and complexity. Global leadership involves ensuring multicultural effectiveness, cultivating a sense of self- being in every human encounter, embracing personal differences, and efficiency in managing paradoxes (Mendenhall et al, 2012).
Presently, leaders possess a greater purpose, where they encourage employees to improve their output, and make them feel emotionally participative. Leaders aim at making the company a place where employees are proud of. For companies to build trust and acquire operational licences, they have increasingly become responsive to societies.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition to educating probable future workers, there is a need for companies to respond to the local people’s needs (Oddou, Mendenhall
Identity, Culture, and Organisation Essay essay help: essay help
Introduction Organisations have recently encountered forces from some sources that encompass rivals, shareholders, and clients, which have caused them to adopt a “lean on mean” policy. For workers, this move has caused rationalisation and cutting back every expression demonstrating real or potential unemployment. Irrespective of the expression selected, this tendency has made many employees to reconsider concerns of dedication, faithfulness, and the identity of workers.
The usual mental treaty was typically relational with shared confidence supposedly at the core of the union between workers and employers (Gioia et al. 2010). In line with this comprehension, workers at National Health Service in the United Kingdom showed faithfulness and dedication whereas employers provided job security, future of the profession, as well as training and development.
The sense of the new psychological treaty argument affirms that there exists a decrease in the dedication and fading away of identity with bosses. The notion of reduced identity has also been studied in academic literature, which discloses that identity in organisations is associated with motivation, confidence, dedication, and nationality (Zachary et al. 2011).
Due to identity in organisations, there could be a great improvement in performance. In academic research, there are two different points of views, viz. the view of multiple identities and that of trade off. This paper discusses these two competing perspectives in the context of National Health Service and explores the function of identity dynamics at occupations, stating their significance, and elucidating them theoretically.
Organisational identity At the level of an individual worker in the National Health Service, the termination of organisational mooring lines denotes the lack of logic, belonging, and management, and thus the optional focal points for identity have turned out to be higher-flying. There are implications that workers presently focus on the externalities of organisations with adherences to the line of work or the internalities of organisations in the form of occupation or project teams.
Therefore, apparently the concern of identity has recently turned out to be more intricate with dissimilar concentrations on identity (Clark et al. 2010). Research vividly offers varying concentrations on identity and loyalty with the occupation or career.
Additionally, numerous academic advancements exist in the National Health Service though there is a lack of empirical activities specifically concerning the subject of nested identities. Two different points of view can be obtained from abiding academic research (Ravasi
Matewan and Harlan County USA Essay (Critical Writing) argumentative essay help
Matewan ‘Matewan’ is an American drama film by John Sayles that narrates a story of the events of struggle to unionize the West Virginia coal-minors in 1920s. According to Sayles, the Stone Mountain Coal company was the only dominant company in the Western Virginia in the 1920s. Sayles (1987) notes that the Stone Mountain was the only mining company in the region at the time an advantage it used to monopolize every mining business opportunity in the region.
This monopoly forced miners into bondage contract with the company since they had no alternative with regard to employment. In addition, since workers had no alternative place to seek employment, it became easy for the Coal Company to oppress workers by offering low pay and making them work under poor conditions.
To make matters worse, employees did not even know their employers who did not even bother to show up in the company. Instead, company representatives took of every responsibility of supervising their work. Nonetheless, Sayles reveals that the representatives remained excessively oppressive as they used intimidation to force workers to deliver what they wanted (Sayles, 1987).
Sayles noted that apart from threats from company representatives, miners took home petty remuneration with no complaints. In addition, the Coal Company restricted workers freedom as consumers in, which miners had to buy everything from the company from food to clothes.
Equally, the management team forced workers to buy tools from the company to ensure that all the money they obtained circulated back to the company. Further, the Coal Company in most cases charged workers higher prices for their purchases than normal market charges (Sayles, 1987).
Therefore, growing intolerant of the hash and unjust rules, the miners decided to strike against the company. Strike motivation aimed at forcing the Coal Company to offer better working conditions. However, in order to drive their agenda, the miners found it prudent to unionize in order to form a stronger presence and opposition against the Coal Company. This is because the miners felt that it was only through union that they could mount a strong and formidable opposition to force the company to recognize their rights (Sayles, 1987).
Harlan County USA ‘The film Harlan County USA’ dramatizes a coal miner’s strike at the Brookside mine in Harlan County, Kentucky. According to the film director, the Brookside mine belongs to a private owner run under the Eastover Mining Company.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Unlike in Matewan, where workers found motivation to form a union to enable them push their agenda, Harlan County’s workers already belonged to a union called the Southern Labor Union. The union drew membership from the entire Eastern Kentucky to propagate the plight of the workers before company authorities (Kopple, 1976).
The documentary reveals that workers of Brookside mining company felt unhappy with the working condition at the mining site as observed in Matewan. This is because, despite doing a lot of hard work, they received extremely low salaries compared to what their unionized counterparts got.
Kopple (1976) reveals that these workers received a salary ranging from $17 to $32 per day, which was way below the $45 that their counterparts got. In addition, the company had not assured them of safety as several injuries used to occur, estimated at three times above the national average.
Therefore, they opted to strike demanding the right to form their own safety committee elected by the union members. They also wanted their salary increased to $45 per day as received among their counterparts. In addition, the miners wanted the company to pay the standard UMW rate of 75 cents for every ton, remitted directly to their medical and retirement benefits (Kopple, 1976).
The two films also share many similarities with regard to worker motivation and sustenance of morale in the mining industry depicted in US history (Blanchflower and Freeman, 2001). As witnessed in both films, workers unionize in order to form a formidable force to push for the recognition of workers’ rights.
However, the two films differ in the sense that whereas the Matewan workers struggle to unionize, Eastover readily allowed workers’ union. Despite unionized approach, workers in Eastover still fight for their rights seemingly violated by the company in breach of union terms.
References Blanchflower, D. D.,
McDonald’s Operations and Supply Chain Management Essay college essay help near me
Table of Contents Executive Summary
Executive Summary McDonald’s is one of the leading fast food brands worldwide. The first McDonald’s restaurant was opened in 1955 in Illinois, USA. The restaurant has since grown and expanded its operations to more than 119 countries in the world. The number of outlets has also grown to more than 31,000 serving an estimated 47 million customers (Yang et al. 2010).
McDonald’s serves a variety of fast food cuisines such as hamburger, chicken products, French fries, cream deserts and coffee, just to name but a few (Rtel and Härtel 2012, p.6). The company is today viewed as a symbol of globalization, as well as the American way of life.
Introduction McDonald’s is the first ever first food restaurant whose origin dates back to 1955. The restaurant has since emerged as the restaurant of choice among many customers going by its presence in many countries and the number of customers it serves.
However, the success of the restaurant has mainly been attributed to its best operation practices and supply chain management, which has given it a competitive edge over its rivals in the industry. This paper seeks to explore ways in which McDonald’s operations and supply chain management has given it an edge over its competitors.
To begin with, McDonald’s is a restaurant synonymous with famous hamburgers and other cuisines such as chicken McNuggest, Egg McMuffin, Quarter Pounder, Big Mac, French Fries and the recently introduced McCafe coffee (Boyer and Verma 2009, p.507). Despite the fact that other restaurants have also come up that serves similar cuisines, McDonald’s has since remained the most preferred restaurant of choice for many.
This is because its food and drinks and prepared based on quality and value for money. In this regard, the company has always ensured that its food meet the quality standards expected by customers. McDonald’s has been able to achieve this by employing professional chefs that ensure that quality standards are maintained (Boyer and Verma 2009, p.507).
Additionally, McDonald’s always seek for customer feedback as regards the quality and the manner they have been served so that adjustments can be made where necessary. Moreover, McDonald’s ensures that its food meet the health standards, which is one of the pillars in which the restaurant operates.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More McDonald’s also ensures that its customers are served on time and not kept waiting for too long, as is the case among some of its competitors. This is because the management of the restaurant ensures that all foods are available all the time, and no customer is turned away for lack of food. The waiters and chefs of the restaurant are also very customer-friendly something that has made many customers prefers the restaurant to others that serve similar cuisines (Li 2007, p.216).
The success of McDonald’s restaurant is also attributed to its supply chain, which is arguably the best. This is because, despite selling millions of items on a daily basis, McDonald’s has always ensured that all its customers get what they want. It is worth noting that all the supply chain of McDonald’s are outsourced since the company owns neither a factory nor a distribution center. In addition, McDonald’s owns about 30% of the restaurant while the rest are franchised (Raj 2013).
Singh 2012 reveals that McDonald’s has 16 major suppliers for its raw materials. However, the company has been able to ensure that all items are available based on its supply chain principle which states that no items need to be out of stock (Vitasek, Manrodt and Tillman 2012).
However, to ensure that this is achieved, the company has developed supply chain strategies, which ensures that enough stock is available all the time. The company has been doing this through the application of JDA Manugistics 7, as well as conducting regular analysis of its stock levels.
In this regard, McDonald’s has instituted a daily point-of-sale (POS) data at the product list, item level, and inventory level (Singh 2012). The POS is also used shipment so as to aid in forecasting. The application of this supply chain principle has ensured that McDonald’s do not run out of stock, which might affect the operation of its restaurants.
McDonald’s supply chain also focuses much on understanding how their supplies are brought to the restaurant. To ensure that this becomes a success, McDonald’s has maintained a close relationship with its suppliers by trusting them to the extent that the company finds no need of signing contracts with them (Saravanan 2011, p.4).
Report indicates that, despite the fact that McDonald’s currently operate about 14,000 restaurants in the U.S., it has not signed any contract with its suppliers to ensure that the restaurant gets what it orders from its suppliers every day (Saravanan 2011, p.4). Indeed this is a very good strategy since it has given McDonald’s a competitive edge over other companies operating in the same industry.
We will write a custom Essay on McDonald’s Operations and Supply Chain Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, McDonald’s ensures that the supplier’s products are not completely knocked out as this will make it hard working with such suppliers again. However, McDonald’s has been striving to ensure that it builds a positive and lasting relationship based on ethics, environment, and economies (Cheema 2010).
Another striking feature of McDonald’s supply chain pertains to how the company decides the menu items on offer. For instance, McGrath (2011) noted that McDonald’s served Blueberry Banana Nut Oatmeal over the summer as a breakfast choice. This is despite the fact that oatmeal has not been on offer for quite some time.
However, before this menu item could be adopted by other restaurants, McDonald’s sourced enough suppliers to plant blueberries, which was to be used in the restaurant during the summer. The adoption of this approach gave it an edge over other restaurants that were in short of the blueberries (McGrath 2011).
McDonald’s, unlike many other restaurants, have developed a peculiar Cold Chain, which ensures the integrity of food products are maintained, as well as ensuring that freshness and nutritional value of products are retained (Relph 2012). In addition, McDonald’s has also set up e-procurement, which allows the company to purchase and sell its products online.
The e-procurement has also made it easy for McDonald’s to find buyers and suppliers of its products with ease. Saravanan (2011, p.6) observed that the Emac Digital launched in 2001has given McDonald’s franchises all over the world the opportunity to purchase everything they need for the effective running of the restaurants, be it uniforms or hamburgers.
Edwards, the chief executive of McDonald’s argues that the installation of e-procurement has enabled the restaurant cut down its operation cost by over 85% (Saravanan 2011, p.6). This has also given McDonald’s a competitive edge over its competitors in the fast food industry.
Conclusion The world has experienced unprecedented upsurge of restaurants in recent time. The high growth has mainly been experienced in fast food industry that has flooded many cities across the world today. Nevertheless, McDonald’s, being the first ever fist food restaurant has maintained a competitive edge over the rest of the restaurants that have come after it.
This is attributable to its strong operation and supply chain management principles that have helped in building customer loyalty, as well as ensuring that the company maintains a close relationship with its suppliers. Based on these principles, it will be very hard for any restaurant to edge out McDonald’s in terms of operation and supply chain management.
Not sure if you can write a paper on McDonald’s Operations and Supply Chain Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More References Cheema, P. 2010, The big idea; McDonald’s unravels its supply chain. Web.
Boyer, K. K.,
International Human Resource Management Report essay help free: essay help free
Introduction International human resource has gained a lot of attention among the researchers in the recent past. The world has been reduced into a small village due to technological advancements. Technological advancements, especially in the field of transport and communication have had a massive effect on human resource.
Human resource can therefore, move from one geographical location to another with a lot of ease.1 The improved communication system has also brought about scenarios where a firm can employ individuals who are miles away from the company. It is currently a common phenomenon to find a situation where an Australian company employs an Indian staying in India as a customer service officer who receives calls and give direction to customers on phone.
This has resulted in what is popularly referred to as international human resource management.2 There is need to manage employees beyond the borders. This is especially so when it comes to globalized firms which have operations going beyond the borders of the parent country.
The world is experiencing radical changes in the labor environment. International human resource management globally is an area that is vital and requires special attention for it is the backbone of all sectors of the economy of any given country.3
This has become one of the legislative areas, calling for many political leaders to spend much of their time and brains in finding solutions to issues that emanate from work and labor. In search for the same, countries like the Australia have established several education centers that aim at expanding public understanding on important issues affecting the working group. In these institutions they admit under graduate who take studies in areas related to human resource management.
In Australia, laws have been enacted to guide the labor market. Managing employees in this century needs an understanding of various societal factors within the organization. It is important to understand different social settings of different employees in order to be able to understand their behavior within the organization. Understanding organizational behavior is the key to having employees working as a unit.
Managing and Developing Employees in International Setting The current world is experiencing a lot of changes in the labor market. The competition in the international labor market is becoming stiff each day.4 Globally, technology has posed both positive and negative impacts in the global labor market. Although it has made the work easier, it has again replaced the human labor that is vital in the world market.5
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Economically, international or local trade is the backbone of any stable nation. In the working environment, employees have been faced with several challenges that need to be addressed by any nation seeking to compete in the world market. It is important to understand how both the expatriate and local employees. This is elaborated as stated below.
The current world has greatly encouraged international trade. People from different countries meet together in the world market, competing with an aim of maximizing their output. There is an exchange of business experts from one field to another moving from one country to another, others reside in foreign countries for business purposes.
When dealing with the expatriate, it will be important to understand their social background in order to predict their behavior. The management should act having a clear understanding that expatriates have a number of factors that make them unique from the locals. This should be put into consideration when managing them.
The local employees are always easier to manage than expatriates.6 Managing the locals involves understanding the local forces that affects their behavior. This would involve understanding the social factors that have direct impact to the human resource. Local employees have the capacity to transform the parent firm which should be a guide to other branches.
There are regulations that the Australian government has put in place to ensure that the rights of employees are respected, irrespective of their citizenship. These regulations protect both the locals and the expatriates working in this country. The following are some of the highly observed regulations in this country.
Regulation of Employment Relationship
The law clearly spells the type of relationship that should exist between various institutions within an organization. Within an organization, the two common types of relationship that exist are the employer-employee relationship, and employee-employee relationship.
There is a way in which the employer should relate with his or her employees.7 There should be mutual respect between the employer and the employee and each should ensure that they do not infringe into the others right. The employer should respect the right of the employee and ensure that he or she is appropriately compensated for the work done.8 The employee on the other hand has the responsibility to meet the standard expected of him or her at the workplace.
We will write a custom Report on International Human Resource Management specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Regulation of Discrimination in Employment
Discrimination of whatsoever form is strictly prohibited by the law of the land. The law clearly states that the employer should not discriminate on any basis when hiring or directing the employees. The country has enacted law that prohibits employers from discriminating employees based on race, gender, religion, age or any other demographic basis.9
The affirmative action was meant to demonstrate further that employers are not allowed to discriminate against women at their workplace simply because they are women. This is so even when a firm is dealing with expatriates. Legislation was enacted that protects employees both locally and in the international forum. Such an employer who engages in discriminative acts may face litigation in a court of law.
Regulation of Employment Environment
It is always very important for an employer to ensure that the working environment is safe enough for the employees. In various occasions, employees are always subjected to working environments that are not conducive to their health or such other factors based on their country of origin.10
The employees have right to their privacy. As such, it would be going against the law for the employer to intrude into the privacy of the employer. It would be wrong for the employer to demand information that can pass as confidential from the employees if the information does not directly relate to the task. This is irrespective of whether this information is gotten directly from the employee by inquiry, or through the third party, the employer is not allowed obtain information from the employer against the employees wish.
Occupational Safety and Health
An employee should be safe when working in various units of the organization irrespective of their country of origin. At no given point should the general well being of the employee be at risk. The employer has the responsibility to ensure that the safety of all employees is well taken care of both within the plant and when sent on duties outside the firm. The employer must also factor in health of the employees.11 At no point should the employees be subjected to working conditions that may have adverse effects on their health.
Fair Labor Standards Act
The Fair Labor Standards Act was a legislation that was meant to help the employer and the employee relate well. The employer needs perfection from the employees for the compensation paid on a monthly or weekly basis. On the other hand, there is a capacity that an employee should have. The law regulates the expectation of the employer and the output of employee to ensure fairness.
Importance of IHRM to Organizations and Individuals from a Practical Perspective
From a practical perspective, international human resource management is very important both to individuals and organization. To an organization which hopes to venture into international markets, there is need to understand international human resource management in order to operate successfully in the international market.12
The organizational factors that are considered locally are very different from that that affects the labor market internationally. It would therefore, be important to understand the labor market of each individual country because it would always be unique from others. This would require unique treatment in order to achieve the desired results.
Not sure if you can write a paper on International Human Resource Management by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Implementing the Strategies
For a long time, labor has not been given its rightful position in many organizations. Many of the managements have not thought of viewing their employees as very important asserts. However, the happenings of the recent past have proven that labor force is one of the most important asserts to any given organization.13
When the management lays down objectives to be achieved, it is always the employees who are expected to implement the policies that would bring the desired results. It is this work force that would be expected to turn the policies from paper to reality. Therefore, retention of employees is very important. Employees should be retained within the organization to ensure that the firm’s operations are consistent. High turnover rate of employees is not healthy for the firm’s prosperity.
This is because it does not only affect the smooth implementation of policies within the firm, but also leads to increased cost of training new employees. It is even worse that the employees would go away having learnt the strategies of the firm, making the firm vulnerable to its competitors.14 The management should therefore device methods of hiring qualified employees and retaining them within the firm. One of the best ways to achieve this is through motivation. It is through motivation that employees will feel attached to the firm and therefore feel committed to the firm. Motivation is very important in international human resource management.
Relationship between Employee Motivation and Success of a Firm in the Global Market
Employees are the implementing arm of the organization. While the top executives formulate the policies to be implemented by the organization, most of their tasks always end in the paper.15 It is upon the employees to make these blueprints a reality. In his words, employees are the engine of the organization.
When well taken care of and put in a proper condition, they would always give the best of the results to the organization. However, when they are neglected and left to ‘rust’ they will always give leap service and the output will be very disappointing. Motivating employees within the organization is very important.
There is a direct link between employee motivation and success of a firm. It is very important that a firm increases the rate of employee motivation because of a number of reasons. In most of the occasions, policies are always developed to last for one whole year.16 However, these policies are always units in the larger vision of the firm.
A vision may be developed to be achieved in a time span of say thirty year or so. This duration is long and the firm may not take a direct approach towards achieving this vision. It therefore has to split this vision into yearly strategic objectives. When the year begins, the firm would plan with its current work force.
When some of the employees leave along the year because of lack of motivation, it would be a blow to the success of that year’s strategic objectives. The firm would be forced to look for a replacement and train them and make them understand the objectives to be achieved. This is time consuming and costly venture that would reduce the success of the organization. Changing the employees on a yearly basis is not good either.
This is because in so doing, the vision of the firm will be lost. It will not be possible to realize the vision because every year, the firm would be forced to start with new employees who may not understand the vision, and how it was developed in the first place. This minimizes chances of achieving expected goals within the organization.
Strategies of Employee Motivation
To ensure that there is a constantly motivated workforce, it would require the management to employ the right strategies that would ensure that it succeeds in this. It may appear as a simple task of making employees happy.17 However, it goes beyond this, especially when it comes to managing employees in overseas countries.
To motivate employees within the firm, there are a series of strategies that a firm should employ in order to ensure that employees are constantly satisfied. The secret behind retention lies in ensuring that the employee is satisfied and feels challenged with the present task. This will cause the drive in him to want to come tomorrow and beat the challenge.18 The recommendations below gives a detailed strategy of how to employ the right individuals to the firm, and how such individuals should be retained, once employed.
Conclusion International human resource management has become very relevant in the current global society. The world has been reduced into a small global village where labor can move from one part of the country to another. Firms are also investing in the global market. This means that human resource managements should have a sound understanding of the global labor market in order to operate successfully in the global market.
Bibliography Arthur, Joan. “Effects of human resource systems on manufacturing performance and turnover.” The academy of management journal, 37.3 (2008): 670-687.
Barney, John. “Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage.” Journal of management, 17.1 (2010): 99.
Baruch, Yusuf. “Response rate in academic studies-A comparative analysis.” Human relations, 52.4 (2006): 421-438.
Boselie, Paul. “Commonalities and contradictions in HRM and performance research.” Human Resource Management Journal, 15.3 (2005): 67-94.
Brewster, Charles. “A continent of diversity.” Personnel management London, 5.9 (2008): 36-40.
Budhwar, Prisca. “Rethinking comparative and cross-national human resource management research.” The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 12.3 (2006): 497-515.
Cutcher, Gershenfeld. “Impact on Economic Performance of a Transformation in Workplace Relations.” Management Journal, 44 (2007): 241.
Evans, Paul. The global challenge: international human resource management. New York: McGraw-Hill Irwin, 2011.
Fey, Cecil. “The effect of human resource management practices on MNC subsidiary performance in Russia.” Journal of International Business Studies, 32.1 (2012): 59-75.
Grobler, Pieter. Human resource management in South Africa. London: Thomson Learning, 2006.
Guest, Daniel. “Human resource management and performance: a review and research agenda.” The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 8.3 (2009): 263-276.
Guest, Edwin. “Human resource management and industrial relations.” Journal of management Studies, 24.5 (2001): 503-521.
Guthrie, James. “High-involvement work practices, turnover, and productivity: Evidence from New Zealand.” The Academy of Management Journal, 44.1 (2002): 180-190.
Hamill, Jane. “Labour relations decision making within multinational corporations.” Industrial Relations Journal, 15.2 (2006): 30-34.
Hedlund, Gerald. “The hypermodern MNC—a hierarchy?” Human resource management, 25.1 (2004): 9-35.
Jensen, Titus. “The impact of human resource management practices on turnover, productivity, and corporate financial performance.” Academy of management journal, 38.3 (2011): 635-672.
Marchington, Moses. “Involvement and participation.” Human Resource Management: A Critical Text, 7(67): 280-305.
Stahl, Günter. Handbook of research in international human resource management. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishers, 2012.
Footnotes 1 Hedlund, Gerald. “The hypermodern MNC—a hierarchy?” Human resource management, 25.1 (2004): 9-35.
2 Pieter Grobler, Human resource management in South Africa (London: Thomson Learning, 2006), 28.
3 Marchington, Moses. “Involvement and participation.” Human Resource Management: A Critical Text, 7(67): 280-305.
4 James Guthrie. “High-involvement work practices, turnover, and productivity: Evidence from New Zealand.” The Academy of Management Journal, 44.1 (2002): 180-190.
5 Titus Jensen. “The impact of human resource management practices on turnover, productivity, and corporate financial performance.” Academy of management journal, 38.3 (2011): 635-672.
6 Edwin Guest. “Human resource management and industrial relations.” Journal of management Studies, 24.5 (2001): 503-521.
7 Daniel Guest. “Human resource management and performance: a review and research agenda.” The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 8.3 (2009): 263-276.
8 Jane Hamill. “Labour relations decision making within multinational corporations.” Industrial Relations Journal, 15.2 (2006): 30-34.
9 Paul Evans, The global challenge: international human resource management (New York: McGraw-Hill Irwin, 2011), 34.
10 Cecil Fey. “The effect of human resource management practices on MNC subsidiary performance in Russia.” Journal of International Business Studies, 32.1 (2012): 59-75.
11 Prisca Budhwar. “Rethinking comparative and cross-national human resource management research.” The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 12.3 (2006): 497-515.
12 Gershenfeld Cutcher. “Impact on Economic Performance of a Transformation in Workplace Relations.” Management Journal, 44 (2007): 241.
13 Paul Boselie. “Commonalities and contradictions in HRM and performance research.” Human Resource Management Journal, 15.3 (2005): 67-94.
14 Charles Brewster. “A continent of diversity.” Personnel management London, 5.9 (2008): 36-40.
15 Günter Stahl, Handbook of research in international human resource management (Cheltenham: Edward Elgar Publishers,( 2012), 56.
16 Joan Arthur, “Effects of human resource systems on manufacturing performance and turnover.” The academy of management journal, 37.3 (2008): 670-687.
17 John Barney. “Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage.” Journal of management, 17.1 (2010): 99.
18 Yusuf Baruch. “Response rate in academic studies-A comparative analysis.” Human relations, 52.4 (2006): 421-438.
Case of Debenhams Report essay help
Introduction Business marketing has become one of the integral business features that organisations use as a competitive advantage to strive through market pressures. The mechanisms of businesses and corporations normally determine companies’ present success and expectations. The physical appearances as well as customs governing a business are good determinants that anticipate the growth and development of any single business with such prospects mutually influencing multinational corporations as well as small and medium business units.
Minor decisions, as they may seem, frequently have long lasting influence on businesses and may automatically determine the growth and development of such enterprises. Central to this argument, any business unit inclusive of retail stores principally requires comprehensive marketing planning from product determination and product arrangement to the final selling.
For several decades, the impact of store layout and design, merchandise assortment, and store location as retail managerial aspects have constantly remained undervalued. Therefore, this essay seeks to examine these aspects in a survey of three retail stores: Debenhams, Saks Fifth Avenue, and Marks and Spenser.
Industrial synopsis of retailers The three retail stores operating in major economies including the United States and the United Kingdom and other parts of the European continent belong to the fashion and design industry, an internationally acknowledged industry that employs millions of designers. They compose the topmost designing companies across Europe, with reports indicating that most of these companies have stretched beyond the European continent.
Fashion and designing typically refers to the art of applying techniques in aesthetic or even natural beauty to garnishes and garments. The fashion and designing industry streams from social-cultural persuasions and for numerous decades, the industry is proving substantial in connecting different cultures to the international limelight through socio-cultural designs.
Fashion and designing commerce has constantly proven one of the most imperative apertures to cultural growth in a more sophisticated manner with different industries rapidly growing to meet the dire needs to consumer interests. Over the years, this industry has been influential in peoples living styles with numerous changes constantly taking place in this industry each successive year.
Concerning Debenhams Company Debenhams is an internationally renowned fashion and designing company currently operating in over 28 countries globally. The history of Debenhams fashion and Designing Company “dates back to the 1778, when William Clark established a store of drapers, along 44 Wigmore Street in the west of London, selling luxurious gloves, bonnets, fabrics and parasols that constantly grew to a company” (Debenhams Plc. Para. 2).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As early as 1813, Debenhams grew exponentially through William’s innovations and the firm, Clark and Debenhams emerged, followed by the emergence of the first store in the London’s outskirts, Cheltenham in 1818, giving an exact facsimile of Wigmore Street Stores.
Came 1851, Clement Freebody “invested heavily in the firm and renamed it Debenhams
Third World War will be Over Water Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Introduction According to Robert et al. (1027), the quest for a cleaner and sustainable environment is ongoing. The reason for the growth of environmental activism is that the resources that are vital for the sustenance of human life, like water, have been declining at a quick pace. Taking an example from the issue of climate change, it is noted that one of the impacts of the degradation of the environment is growing desertification.
This denotes a decline in the supply of water to the population in areas that are affected by desertification. The rate at which clean water sources are declining is quite high, leaving populations exposed to waterborne ailments. Cases of waterborne diseases are often reported in the developing world.
The severity of the case of water scarcity can be best explained by the inclusion of the problem of water as one of the main goals of one of the greatest development frameworks in the world- the Millennium Development Goals (MDGs). The issue of access to safe drinking water occupies goal seven in the millennium development goals (UNICEF and World Health Organization 5).
According to Third World Academy of Sciences (6), approximately 75 percent of all diseases in the developing world emanate from the consumption of unclean water. According to the United Nations Report of issue of sanitation and safe drinking water, there is still a large gap between the demand and the supply of safe drinking water.
While the efforts of meeting the demand for clean drinking water are ongoing, the report revealed that approximately 780 million people in the world do not have access to safe drinking water (UNICEF and World Health Organization 5). This denotes an improvement on the research that was conducted by Basani, Isham and Reilly (953) in the year 2008, which showed that over a billion people across the world did not have access to safe drinking water.
This implies that there is still a need to speed the efforts of assuring the global population of the supply of clean and safe water. The implication of the observation that was made by the UNICEF and WHO is that most people in the world still use contaminated water for drinking and accomplishing a series of other domestic chores, irrespective of the risks of using that water. It should be noted that these people use contaminated water out of desperation.
They cannot access clean and hygienic water, while at the same time they cannot do without this basic necessity. By extension, this means that people are caught in desperate situations, implying a smouldering crisis. In this paper, it is argued that the demand for clean water far much surpasses the ability of governments to offer clean water to their citizens, leading to the struggle for access to clean water.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The continued contamination and the subsequent usage of clean water are likely to compound the problems that are associated with the demand and supply of clean water.
This paper explores the issues surrounding the scarcity of drinking water and the implications. The paper brings out findings on the problems and trends of demand and supply of clean water to the global populace and the likely impacts of the quest for clean water.
Health Issues Water Borne Diseases
The provision of clean and safe drinking water is part of the initiatives of most governments, especially in the developing world. Governments are often backed by international agencies and non-governmental organizations in fulfilling the obligation. As observed in the introduction, there are a substantial number of people in the world today who do not have access to clean drinking water.
As people continue to strive for clean and safe water, the usage of unsafe water continues to cause harm to millions of people around the world. Unclean water, as noted in the introduction, is the cause of most of the maladies in the developing world.
Cases of the spread and prevalence of waterborne diseases in the world cannot be overemphasized. Millions of people in the world succumb to diseases that emanate from the consumption of polluted water. Common waterborne diseases that are reported include cholera, diarrhoea, typhoid, and dysentery (Tulchinsky and Varavikova 339).
The question that ought to be asked is what the source of contamination of the water is and the reasons to whether people are informed of the risks of consuming such water. What happens is that people often find themselves in dire need of water, while the environment in which they inhabit cannot offer them clean water.
Thus, they are forced to utilize the available water, which is often contaminated, thence, a health hazard. The prevailing conditions of hygiene in the world are a predisposing factor for waterborne diseases. This makes water borne diseases as one of the main epidemics in the developing regions of the world.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Third World War will be Over Water specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Natural sources of water are often polluted through exposure to un-hygienic compounds that come from sewers and poor disposal of refuse. The state of health and productivity of the affected populations is put in jeopardy, thereby exposing the global population to economic problems (Basani, Isham and Reilly 954).
While a lot of efforts are directed towards treating the conditions that emanate from the consumption of unclean water, research reveals that the main means of controlling the spread of diseases that are caused by consumption of polluted water is by ensuring that populations are supplied with adequate volumes of clean water. This mainly applies to the water-washed diseases, where patients require to be supplied with adequate volumes of cleans water.
Water-washed diseases are another complication that emanates from the prevalence of poor conditions of hygiene, which comes from insufficient supply of clean water to a given population. Contamination with a number of diseases is caused by contact of the infected people with the healthy population.
The diseases are spread by virtue of direct contact of the skin, mucus membrane and conjunctiva. Amidst the rise in the cases of disease transmission through contact, there is a clear pointer to the fact that the supply of clean water to populations is paramount if a stoppage it to be put to the break-up and spread of water-washed diseases.
However, attending to such a situation is quite hard, bearing in mind that most populations, especially in the developing regions of the world, are still struggling with food insecurity. This makes the issue of clean water supply a secondary issue, meaning that water-washed diseases are likely to prevail within these populations (Webber 72).
Water based diseases
Water is one of the most common mediums of passage of infectious diseases from one person to the other. Given the nature of the social environment in which global populations prevail, water-based diseases cannot be easily stopped because the conditions of water supply are poor.
This predisposes the global population to poor hygienic conditions and the spread of water based diseases. The socio-environmental characteristics of the global population make it difficult to plan and maintain the required standards of hygiene. The carrying capacity of most ecosystems in the world surpasses the recommended standards, yet there are no better plans to maintain the recommended size of population. This leaves the populations prone to water-based diseases (Yang et al. 1484).
According to Juuti (136), water storage comes out as one of the means of preserving water and guaranteeing populations of supply of water. However, the main concern is whether populations have the capacity to safely store water. There have been a lot of cases on the capacity of populations to store water.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Third World War will be Over Water by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The means of water storage is a critical issue. While the developed world is doing well in terms of developing technologies of storing water, a different scenario is witnessed in the developing world. The capacity to safely store water is quite low, which in most cases increases the vulnerability of the populations.
The mechanisms of water storage are hazardous. For instance, dams are left exposed, making them harbour other disease causing vectors like mosquitoes. Malaria, which is spread by mosquitoes, is one of the ailments that affect a substantial number of lives of people in the developing world and the tropics. The stored water is also not properly treated, thus it is contaminated with other disease causing pathogens (Juuti 136).
Agriculture Shortage of water and food
Food security is one of the main problems that are crumpling development in the world. Most households in the developing world cannot afford food, which is one of the basic needs for human beings. There is a close relationship between scarcity of food and the shortage of water supply. This issue can be approached from two perspectives.
One perspective is the issue of lack of food, which makes most of people to concentrate on the search for food, leaving out the issue of seeking for clean water. Shortage of water has been termed as the main impediment to the practicing of agriculture. The second issue, which is perhaps more broad, concerns the scarcity of water.
This scarcity jeopardizes the production of food. Reliance on primary agriculture in most parts of the world makes water an essential factor in the production of food. In most parts of the developing world, there is a lot of reliance on the rain as a source of water for agriculture and the production of food.
With the changing patterns of rainfall as a result of climate change and the effects of environmental pollution, the sequence of rainfall keeps changing, thereby impeding the practice of agriculture. Secondary means of water supply are impeded by the lack of technology and resources. This results in the problem of food insecurity. Conflicts over natural resources also arise as a result of the strife for favourable land for agriculture (Behnassi, Draggan, and Sanni, 25).
Farming/ toxic farming
Farming cannot be done without supply of water. The growth in the challenge of water supply results in the constriction of farming activities in most of the regions of the world. The shrinkage in farming has several implications for local communities in different parts of the world.
One of the main implications of minimal farming activities is reduction in the amount of food supply. The other notable thing is that the lack of active farming weakens the economic base of communities, thus predisposing them to a series of other social derived conditions. However, different tactics of producing food are deployed by population in the regions with scarcity of safe water.
Some of the methods that are deployed in farming are argued to be unsound for agriculture production since they result in the production of food that has toxic substances and unfit for human consumption. This is what is referred to as toxic farming (Schulzová, Hajšlová, Botek and Peroutka 2763).
According to Bilibio, Hensel and Selbach (356), more than ten percent of the global population consumes food that is produced using toxic water. This is a critical observation as people continue to seek for alternative means of enhancing the production of food. An example is the use of sewer water in urban areas to irrigate vegetables.
The toxic chemical compounds in the water are often deposited in the food that is produced, making the food harmful for human consumption. Also, the natural sources of water like rivers that are deemed to have clean water are no longer safer sources of water since the water is contaminated with chemical deposits that are released from industries that are mushrooming across the world. Animals are also affected by the population of water, thus they are also exposed to diseases (Bilibio, Hensel and Selbach 357).
The seemingly solutions to water shortage in agriculture
As mentioned earlier, there are a lot of efforts that have been directed towards attaining a solution to the problem of water shortage in agriculture. The most critical question that ought to be posed at this point is how sustainable the solutions are, amidst the growing challenges of environmental conservation.
One of the solutions to the scarcity of water for agriculture has been the construction of water reservoirs like dams in the tropics. However, dams have outstanding negative impacts on water ecosystems. Among the impacts is the increased concentration of mud/sand flats, which encrypts on the survival of the animal species like fish.
This implies that the solutions that are devised are not workable since they result in other complexities that hinder food security. The balance of flora and fauna in ecosystems where dams and other water reservoirs are built cannot be guaranteed. (Thorpe 244).
Population Growth and urbanization Demand for energy
The growth of population results in population pressure. Population pressure means that the carrying capacity of the ecosystem is far less than the amount of the population that is accommodated in by ecosystems. A common example of this problem is witnessed in urban centres.
The growth in the number of people in urban centres results in the increase in demand for resources in the urban centres. Resources that are demanded for in the urban areas include water, food and energy. The scarcity of water in the urban centres is attributed to the population pressure, which supersedes the capacity of the institutions that are responsible for supplying water in the urban areas.
As observed earlier, scarcity of water results in unhygienic conditions, which brings about water-based diseases. The other angle to the issue of urbanization and water scarcity is that the demand for energy in the urban centres keeps growing with the increase in the number of people moving into urban areas. These cases are common in the developing world (Mathew et al. 7444).
Growth in urbanization and pollution
According to Mathew et al. (7445), urban centres are deemed to be the main location for industries, which give people employment. With the reliance on water as the main source of energy in the urban areas of the developing nations, it becomes quite challenging to meet the demand for energy.
The rationale behind this observation is that the need for energy keeps rising amidst a constant or even in some cases a reduction in the main resource that is used to generate energy- hydroelectricity. The number of industries in the developing world is growing. The number of people is also growing.
This denotes a swell in the demand for energy. The available options of power generation seem to be expensive, leaving the water-drawn power as the main source of power for industries and for domestic consumption. Increased industrialization puts pressure on the available water resources by virtue of the number of people who reside in the urban centres. The other dimension to the problem of increased industrialization is that the amount of pollution rises with the rise in the level of industrialization in a given country.
A proper mechanism of disposing of toxic waste gases and other substances from industries has not been fully developed. This case prevails both in the developed world, which has a higher number of industries, as well as the developing world, which has fewer numbers of industries.
Water is often on the receiving end when it comes to contamination from industries. There are other direct impacts of industrial actions on water resources. An example that can be given in this case is the BP Oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico. Both industries and population pressure combine, resulting in massive pollution of the available sources of clean water. These two factors are the primary sources of pollution of water resources (Mathew et al.7445).
Urge to save water in urban areas
Urban populations are encouraged to save water as a means of conserving water resources in the urban areas. Water saving is used a means of augmenting the supply of water amidst the problems of water shortage on urban areas. The main concern over the usage of water in the urban areas is whether the demand can meet the needs of the urban population.
This is what can allow the urban populations to save water, thus conserving this precious resource. Water conservation is a misnomer, considering the rate at which urbanization and industrialization are taking place and the scale of pollution that results from households and industries in the urban populations. Initiatives of saving water have materialized in a substantial number of the developed countries (Thoren, Atwater and Berube 1202).
Ways of Conserving water Cooperating in water conservation
Water conservation has been one of the main areas of focus by a substantial number of environmental scientists across the world. The reason why researchers focus on the area of water conservation is that it is the main means of conserving water resources amidst the rise in the demand for clean water across the world.
The level of participation of diverse groups in conserving water is quite pleasing. This denotes the scale of the impact of the destruction of the global ecosystem, which calls for the application of ecological economics in the attendance of the desired state of the ecology.
The cooperation in the conservation of water is quite broad. It ranges from collaboration in the development and exchange of water conservation technology to the support in capacity building of populations. Both technology and the creation of awareness among the population are playing out well in as far as the conservation of water is concerned.
Different stakeholders, among them national governments, local populations, local organizations, non-governmental organizations and academic institutions are working together to ensure that there is a high level of water conservation (“Public Participation in Water Demand Management and Conservation” 60).
Water infrastructure and training
Part of the efforts of dealing with the impacts of unsafe water consumption ought to be directed towards the development of water infrastructure. Part of the initiatives in dealing with such problems is ensuring the delivery of clean water through the construction of water lines in order to deliver clean and safe water to populations in both rural and urban areas.
The other critical thing in curbing the problem of safe water scarcity is the training of populations on water purification and conservation techniques. However, a number of challenges are witnessed in training and empowerment. The challenges revolve around the scarcity of resources to sustain such initiatives (Heare 24).
Conclusion Water is one of the most critical resources for the sustenance of human beings and other living creatures. Scarcity of water has been termed as one of the main problems that are facing people in the world. The scarcity of clean water has a negative connotation on the supply of other human necessities like food, energy and sanitation.
The problem of scarcity of clean water is compounded by a number of activities like industrial development and urbanization, which result in the pollution of the available clean water sources. From the research conducted, it can be concluded that shortage of clean water remains to be one of the greatest challenges of the 21st century.
Most of the efforts that are directed at solving the problem do not target the underlying issues like pollution, which is one of the key factors in limiting the availability of safe water for consumption. Therefore, a number of issues need to be addressed in order to limit the problem of clean water shortage, which causes a lot of pressure in human population groups.
The first thing that needs to be done is paying attention to the root causes of the problem of scarcity of safe water. The main problem of water scarcity is the pollution of the environment. Addressing the issue of pollution is one of the means of curbing the pollution of the available sources of clean water.
A lot of efforts have been directed towards the development and application of water conservation technologies. There is need for increased cooperation in the minimization of pollution, which is one of the means through which water resources become unfit for consumption.
There is also need to increase research in the field of ecological economics to develop more solutions and better techniques for utilizing water for production like it is used in agriculture. Such solutions have to be built around the populations in areas that have water problems.
Works Cited Basani, Marcello, Jonathan Isham and Barry Reilly. “The Determinants of Water Connection and Water Consumption: Empirical Evidence from a Cambodian Household Survey.” World Development 36.5(2008): 953-968. Print.
Behnassi, Mohamed, Sidney Draggan, and Yaya H. Sanni. Global Food Insecurity: Rethinking Agricultural and Rural Development Paradigm and Policy. Dordrecht: Springer, 2011. Print.
Bilibio, Carolina, Oliver Hensel and Jeferson Francisco Selbach. Sustainable Water Management in the Tropics and Subtropics -And Case Studies in Brazil. Vol. I. Fundacao Universidade Federal do Pampa: Brazil, 2011. Print.
Heare, Steve. “Achieving Sustainable Water Infrastructure.” American Water Works Association Journal 99.4(2007): 24-26. Print.
Juuti, Petri S. Environmental History of Water: Global Views on Community Water Supply and Sanitation. London: IWA Publ, 2007. Print.
Mathew et al. “Fracking vs Faucets: Balancing Energy Needs and Water Sustainability at Urban Frontiers.” Environmental Science
Love and Relationships Research Paper best essay help: best essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
What Constitutes Love?
Importance of Passion in a Relationship
Introduction Try to immerse yourself into the following scenario: you are a boy and you have been friends with a girl for the past 5 years. You know almost everything about her and she knows almost everything about you. Not a single day passes without the two of you talking and you start to believe that what you feel is love.
One day you go up to her and confess your feelings thinking that she must feel the same way about you since you have both been so close over the past 5 years. She accepts and the both of you start dating, however, she refuses any and all sexual advances and says that she wants to wait for marriage before having sex.
She says she loves you and you know you love her as well so you wait and wait even more till the point that she breaks up with you and a few months later you find that she had sex within the first month of being with her new boyfriend. Does this sound familiar to anything you have experienced so far within your life? The answer to that is most likely “yes” since many of us out there have mistaken feelings of love for friendship and have even thought that what we feel is reciprocal when in fact it was not.
The end result has always been a depressed state of affairs where one has not only lost the person that they have loved but the friend that they have cherished for so long. Many out there would state that what occurred between the two of them was a normal and healthy relationship, that a woman’s decision to wait is her right and should be respected by the man in the relationship if he respects her.
While this paper agrees with the notion that a man should respect the desire of a woman to wait, he should not automatically think that they are in a healthy relationship or that love truly exists between the two of them. It is based on this that this paper presents the assumption that a relationship without sex is one where true love does not exist.
Understanding Love Researchers such as Bauermeister et al. (2011) explain that love is not unilateral (meaning that it is observed and acted upon by one individual) rather love is something that is bi-lateral (i.e. given and espoused between two people) or multi-lateral (between family members) (Bauermeister et al., 102).
Bauermeister et al. (2011) goes on to explain that love requires reciprocity, that it should be reflected and given back at you by the person that you love. However, what most people fail to realize is that love encompasses not only intimacy in the form of liking a person and having feelings for them but encompasses aspects related to passion and commitment as well.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More If such conditions are not in place then what a person has is merely affection or at the worst of times obsession, however, it is not love. I believe the poet T.S. Eliot said it best when he stated in the poem The Love Song “Arms that lie along a table, or wrap about a shawl. And should I then presume? And how should I begin?” The poem in its essence is about a man, J. Alfred Prufrock that has spent his entire life hesitating to confess till the point that he actually never winds up doing so and dies.
He focused so much on presumption over the “what ifs” that he failed to notice the “what is”. In the case of relationships where a man says that he is willing to wait till marriage to have sex with a woman he ignores the present “what is” and focuses on the “what will be”. He believes that by respecting her that he is showing his love for her yet he neglects to think on the lack of passion in their relationship which is symbolized by sex.
He does not take into consideration that his own needs are not being met and he focuses on the presumption that things will work out in the end just like Prufrock in the poem. However, just like the man in the poem it does not, such a relationship is filled with frustration, doubt and continues on since what a person thought of as love has regressed into obsession with the future rather than loving someone at the present.
What Constitutes Love? One of the best ways of understanding love is through the triangular theory of love by Robert Sternberg who states that love is a direct result of three distinct factors: intimacy, passion and commitment. Intimacy is related to the feelings of attachment that one person feels for another, this can encompass feelings which make them feel like they are close, connected and have a distinct bond with one another.
However, as Sternberg explains these feelings should not be mistaken for love since they are normally found in friendships (Shimp and Madden, 163-168). It is the presumption that the affection one feels for a friend is love that causes them to confuse love and friendly relationships. The end result is at times a relationship that does have intimacy but lacks passion and commitment resulting in an eventual breakup since what they have is not love at all.
The second factor in Sternberg’s triangular theory of love is passion. This aspect encompasses aspects related to sexual attraction at which point there is a certain degree of reciprocation resulting in sex (Shimp and Madden, 163-168). It is often times that those with “crushes” feel this particular type of love, however, it should be noted that this is not true love either since it lacks the closeness brought about by the intimacy factor and completely lacks the commitment aspect as well.
The end result is that infatuation usually disappears quickly over time due to the lack of any solid type of love. The last factor in the Sternberg triangular theory of love constitutes commitment which encompasses a decision to remain with another person (in the short and mid-term) and to incorporate them into plans and achievements in the long term (Lemieux and Hale, 1109).
We will write a custom Research Paper on Love and Relationships specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A relationship that is completely composed of the “committed factor” is often seen in the case of arranged marriage where a form of “empty love” is present wherein there is no intimacy or passion, rather, what is present is merely the desire to be with the other person out of necessity or obligation.
For, Sternberg what constitutes true love is an incorporation of the aspects of intimacy, passion and commitment into what is known as consummate love (Diessner, Frost and Smith, 683-690). This is a “complete form of love” so to speak which symbolizes the ideal type of love that people should strive towards.
Sternberg even goes on to state that sex is one of the fundamental aspects of this form of love since it encapsulates the passion aspect that is necessary in order to make this type of love work (Diessner, Frost and Smith, 683-690). Without sex, there is no passion, there is no feeling of closeness and what they end up having is something close to companionate love which is what is found among family members or with a long term friend that you have a platonic relationship with.
Importance of Passion in a Relationship So far it has been shown that there are different kinds of love yet the love that encompasses an actual relationship with another person needs a sexual element in order for it to be considered real love. Researchers such as Madey and Rodgers (2009) in their study involving infidelity has shown that one of the primary reasons why men cheat is due to a lack of passionate love in their relationship.
Madey and Rodgers (2009) explains that humans in general crave passion when they are in a relationship and this often takes the form of sex (Madey and Rodgers, 76-84). Without sex, a regression in love occurs where only aspects related to intimacy and commitment are present making the people more like long term friends rather than husband/wife or girlfriend/boyfriend (Madey and Rodgers, 76-84). Passion for Madey and Rodgers (2009) is a solidifying factor that helps to people feel connected beyond simple words and gestures.
It is an affirmation of love and is necessary in order to complete the triarchic theory of love which creates consummate love. A lack of passion in a relationship often causes men to seek it out from other sources resulting in what we know as infidelity. Love is not defined simply by affection; rather, it is distinctly influenced by action which requires passion and intimacy.
It is based on this that when looking at someone that says that true love exists between him and his girlfriend, despite the fact that she has stated that she wants to wait for marriage before having sex, is to look at someone that is lying to himself. A lack of passion in the form of sex in a relationship is an indicator that what a person has at best is companionate love or at worst a mere friendship.
To continue to mistake what they have as love is to delude one’s self into thinking that this is how love is suppose to work, that it is sacrificial and that you should be able to understand your partner’s wishes. The fact is though, that a lack of desire for sex from your partner is an indicator that there is no desire or passion in your relationship. Without such factors in place your relationship is doomed from its inception since you would be acting exactly like J. Alfred Prufrock.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Love and Relationships by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Waiting for marriage before having sex is almost similar to the case of Prufrock since he keeps on waiting for the right opportunity to confess to the person he has feelings for. However, just like Prufrock, you wait and wait for your need for passion to be fulfilled till the point that it will never manifest itself since the person that you think you love simply does not have the same feelings you have for them.
Conclusion Based on what this paper has shown so far, it can be stated that a relationship without sex is one where true love does not exist. Such a case is nothing more than a friendship since passion, intimacy and commitment is necessary for true love.
Works Cited Bauermeister, JosE A.Johns, Michelle M.Pingel, EmilyEisenberg, AnnaSantana, Matt LeslieZimmerman, Marc. “Measuring Love: Sexual Minority Male Youths’ Ideal Romantic Characteristics.” Journal Of LGBT Issues In Counseling 5.2 (2011): 102. MasterFILE Premier. Web.
Diessner, Rhett, Nellie Frost, and Titus Smith. “Describing The Neoclassical Psyche Embedded In Sternberg’s Triangular Theory Of Love.” Social Behavior
Raising Minimum Wage Essay scholarship essay help
Table of Contents Summary
Examining the Validity of the Articles Arguments
The Current Competitiveness of the American Workforce
Summary The article “Raising minimum wage would ease income gap but carries political risks” examines the proposal of President Obama to raise the current minimum wage within the U.S. from $7.25 an hour to $9 an hour (Lowrie, 1).
His argument centers around his view on how American minimum wage at the present has failed to keep up with the increase in the price of goods and services and, as a result, needs to be increased in order to address the issue of income disparity between the various consumer groups at the present (i.e. the poor, the middle class and high income families) (Hicks, 24).
However, the article goes on to mention that despite the justification behind the request to raise the minimum wage, the author believes that it would be difficult given that the issue is not only a political one (i.e. the Republicans within Congress are sure to veto the request) but an economical one as well given the potential on how higher minimum wages would result in companies leaving the U.S. for destinations abroad where it would be cheaper to manufacture their goods (Lowrie, 1).
Critic When examining the article there are two distinct factors that come to mind:
a.) The competitiveness of the American workforce
b.) The current economic recession that continues to impact the U.S. economy
The main problem with the proposal of President Obama lies in what the article states as the possibility of companies leaving the U.S. due to the increased cost in business that would come with higher minimum wage levels.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With globalization in effect enabling a company to transfer its manufacturing and operations divisions from one country to the next, it would be easy for a company to transfer their current operations from the U.S. into some other country. Not only that, with the ease of outsourcing at the present, this would result in job loss for millions of workers within the U.S. as companies attempt to find cheaper labor alternatives.
Examining the Validity of the Articles Arguments On the other end of the spectrum comes the article “minimum human wages” which states that due to monopsony power within the labor market is it likely that increases in minimum wage at the lower end of the employment scale would actually cause an increase in the higher end of the spectrum as well (The Economist, 1).
This comes about as a direct result of employees becoming motivated to work harder due to higher minimum wage levels resulting in increased company productivity. In fact, the article even compares the situation between the U.S. and Britain and explains that increases in minimum wage may not necessarily result in a considerable level of outsourcing but would instead result in greater levels of automation.
For example, jobs that used to require people such as tellers and greeters could eventually be replaced by automated processes. The only reason why this has not been done yet is due to the fact that some companies still perceive employee wages as a more affordable alternative to automation. With a minimum wage increase this may in fact tip the balance resulting in more automated processes which would create better operational savings for a company.
It is based on this that it can be stated that while the article was able to show one of the possible scenarios that could occur, it neglected to delve into other possible outcomes some of which may in fact be positive.
It should be noted though that in a labor market that is controlled by a monopsony seller, the establishment of a minimum wage would actually result in a reduction in unemployment as the seller adjusts rates based on the established wage. However, this is based on a monopsony market and not all markets within the U.S. are classified as such.
The Current Competitiveness of the American Workforce When taking into consideration the section on outsourcing and comparing it to the competitiveness of the U.S. workforce, it immediately becomes obvious that an average American worker is simply paid far too much as compared to their counterparts in the other countries who do the same level of work.
We will write a custom Essay on Raising Minimum Wage specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Aside from salaries, companies need to take into account extensive healthcare benefits, 401K plans as well as an assortment of other costs associated with hiring someone from the U.S.
While some companies continue to base themselves in the U.S. through various cost cutting measures such as workforce reductions and creating more efficient methods of operation, the fact is that as soon as an increase in minimum wage will be applied the cost of operations for them would increase by several million dollars. This creates the possibility that in order for them to survive they would need to shift operations to other countries where the cost of doing business is lower.
Conclusion Overall, I would have to say that the article was right in stating that an increase in the minimum wage of the U.S. could possibly result in companies leaving the country. While President Obama is right in thinking that wages should match the increased cost of products, the fact is that right now is the worst possible time to implement such an endeavor.
Consumer demand within the U.S. has yet to increase to significant enough levels while at the same time companies are all too willing to leave the U.S. due to the increasing cost of doing business. Based on what I have learned about labor economics, I would have to say that this is a terrible idea and would result in job loss as companies scramble to find some degree of profitability which usually consists of terminating workers to do so.
Works Cited Hicks, Mike. “Stagnant Pay For Low-Wage Workers A Problem.” Indianapolis Business Journal 33.53 (2013): 24. Regional Business News. Web.
Lowrie, Annie. “Raising Minimum Wage Would Ease Income Gap but Carries Political Risks.” New York Times. 13 Feb 2013: 1. Web..
The Economist. “Minimum human wages.” The Economist. Theeconomist.com, 15 Feb 2013. Web.
MGM Grand Hotel college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Name, Date and Location of fire
The 5 W’s of fire
Codes and technologies in existence at the time of the fire.
Safety features in the building
Codes changes that were prompted as a result of this fire.
Proposals to avoid another fire like this
Name, Date and Location of fire In the history of the United States, MGM Grand Hotel and Casino experienced one of the largest fire tragedies that claimed eighty five lives and injured a dozen more.
The fire tragedy was named as the MGM Hotel Fire which took place on 21 November 1980 in a town called Las Vegas, Nevada. “The MGM Grand Hotel/Casino was located at 3645 Las Vegas Boulevard South, City of Las Vegas, County of Clark, Nevada (southeast corner of the intersection of East Flamingo Road and Las Vegas Boulevard South (“MGM HOTEL FIRE REPORT” par. 3)”.
The first units that came to put out the fire were the Clark County Fire Department and it got assistance form the local fire department. At the time of the fire, there were approximately five thousand people in the hotel including staff of the hotel. Some of the people were able to evacuate the building on their own while approximately three hundred people were evacuated by use of a helicopter that answered the police call for assistance. Many other people were evacuated by fire fighters and people of goodwill who had come to help.
The 5 W’s of fire The people who were involved were the firefighters, the local people, the police department, the guests and the staff. What was involved was the fire that broke out in the Deli of the hotel. The fire took place in Las Vegas, Nevada in Clark County. The people who died were as a result of smoke inhalation and burns. The fire happened because of an electrical fault in the restaurant (Craighead, 2009).
Codes and technologies in existence at the time of the fire. There were emergency evacuation plans in the MGM Hotel that were meant for fire evacuation in case of an emergency such as fire or a terrorist bomb attack. The security statement stated the route to be followed in case of an emergency, and people were to follow the outside stairways. The security statement was categorical that only the outside stairway was to be used and not the inside stairway (Mirkhah, 2010).
Safety features in the building The safety policy of the hotel stated that safety glasses had to be worn in some areas within the hotel in order to protect the eyes. It was also required that one had to wear protective gear such as gloves, apron, helmet and gumboots when they were undertaking any task requiring them to wear this protective gear.
It was against the policy of the MGM Hotel and Casino to wear high heeled shoes, soft shoes, moccasins and tennis shoes. Also, loose clothes and neck-tie were not permitted in the area of work especially in the kitchen and when someone was operating a machine that would easily catch them (Stewart, 2010).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It was also required that those employees who had hair longer than the collar had to cover it properly. It was required that, where safety equipment was a requirement in ones place of work, then the employee had no alternative but to wear them.
Codes changes that were prompted as a result of this fire. Since the hotel had partial sprinklers, it was changed such that the whole building would have fire sprinklers all over. The other code to be implemented was to put in place a fire assembly point where people would converge in case of a fire in the hotel. It was also agreed that all hotels that were taller that fifty five feet were to be with fire sprinklers (Craighead, 2009).
Proposals to avoid another fire like this The following are proposals to avoid this kind of fire in the future,
Fire prevention duties. It is of paramount importance to conduct fire preventions to protect the larger society. This is safe for the citizens as well as for the firefighters.
The fire prevention unit should be part and parcel of fire department. It should be actively involved in all phases of a development project from planning to review. Non-code compliance can have adverse effects if an accident was to occur.
The fire prevention and plan review units should be highly financed. This would ensure that the fire department is well equipped and financed.
Works Cited Craighead, Geoff. High-Rise Security and Fire Life Safety. New York: Butterworth- Heinemann, 2009. Print.
MGM HOTEL FIRE REPORT 1990. Web. .
Mirkhah, Azarang. Lessons from the Past: MGM Grand Fire. 2010. Web.09 April 2013 .
Stewart, James. Lessons from the Past: Learning Fire Prevention Basics from the MGM Grand Fire. 2010. Web. .
We will write a custom Report on MGM Grand Hotel
Marijuana: The Issues of Legalization in the USA Essay college admission essay help
The legalization of drugs is one of the most controversial social and legal issues which can be discussed from two opposite perspectives. The legalization of marijuana is discussed during a long period of time, and the debates are based on the complicated history of using marijuana in the USA.
To understand all the possible effects of the marijuana legalization, it is necessary to pay attention to the definition and classification of the drug with references to determining the most important social and legal aspects of the problem. Marijuana, or cannabis, is the specific mixture made of the plant Cannabis sativa, and it can be classified as the psychoactive drug which changes the person’s mood and often relives pain.
The active constituent of Cannabis sativa is also used to make the synthetic variant of this drug. Thus, marijuana can affect people negatively while changing their moods and provoking socially deviant behaviors, and it can influence the people’s physical and psychological state, relieving pain and helping cope with depressions.
From this point, focusing on the advantages and disadvantages of legalizing marijuana in the USA, it is necessary to pay attention to the potential causes and effects of the process. In spite of the fact the discussion is still not resolved, it is possible to observe the changes of the public’s attitude to the issue because of becoming more tolerant toward the usage of marijuana within the society.
The chain of causes and effects associated with the legalization of marijuana can be rather long. It is stated that marijuana influences the changes in the people’s moods while affecting their brain processes. As a result, people can feel relief from pain, the raise of the mood, and the improved appetite.
These effects of marijuana are significant for medicine (Klofas). The opposite side of the process is the uncontrolled behavior, anxiety, apathy, anger, and the negative effect on the cognitive processes. Thus, discussing the usage of marijuana as a cause, it is possible to observe the variety of different effects on the mental and physical health of people.
Furthermore, these effects are more intensive in relation to youth because young people’s organisms are more exposed to the harmful effects of marijuana. The medicinal value of marijuana is one of the key arguments to speak about the legalization of the drug in definite states of the country (Klofas). The usage of marijuana becomes more typical for the American society that is why the definite examples of tolerance in relation to the question can be observed.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moreover, “legalizing marijuana for medical purposes has … higher levels of support, according to Gallup, with 70 percent of Americans favoring making cannabis legally available for doctors to prescribe” (Steve 42). From this point, marijuana can be classified as the medicine and drug at the same time. The problem is in the fact that the negative social consequences of marijuana legalization for medical needs should be taken into consideration.
Paying attention to the social effects of legalizing marijuana, it is necessary to pay attention to the fact that today marijuana can be discussed as medicine rather than drug, and this situation can influence the changes in the social visions of the problem. According to Steve, “an October 2010 Gallup Poll showed 50 percent opposed to legalizing pot and 46 percent in favor.
The number of people favoring legalization has grown to today’s 46 percent from 12 percent 40 years ago” (Steve 41). The opinions of the public are divided, and both the variants of the situation’s resolution are discussed as equally possible. The effects of resolving the problem in relation to this or that opposite point of view can be rather difficult to predict.
The usage of marijuana is based on the necessity to reduce the social anxiety and raise the people’s moods as a kind of medicine prescribed by a doctor. On the one hand, the effect is the stimulation of the person’s activity and the improvement of his or her social relations. On the other hand, marijuana can provoke the intensification of the social anxiety with references to the high-risk population (Buckner et al.).
Marijuana which is used to decrease anxiety can provoke more anxiety and socially deviant behaviors. It is rather difficult to find the balance of the cause and effects while using drugs to change the people’s moods.
Being impossible to control their reactions and behaviors while using marijuana, a lot of young people provoke workplace incidents, and they become the victims in the car accidents. People are also inclined to agree that marijuana causes the antisocial behavior and make people commit a crime because the drug affects the person’s significant addiction.
There are also effects of using marijuana not only on the social life but also on the economic development of the country. The legalization of marijuana can lead to changing the economic situation because of taxing the production and selling the drug. It is necessary to look at the problem from the larger perspective.
We will write a custom Essay on Marijuana: The Issues of Legalization in the USA specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The popularity of marijuana in the USA leads to the worsening of the situation in such countries where the production of this drug is one of the main illegal financial sources. Marie Javdani states that the demand for drugs in the USA directly affects the development of the drug production in Colombia, and this process influences the lives of millions of people (Javdani). That is why, it is impossible to limit the discussion of the marijuana legalization only to the issues of its medical use and effects on the people’s health and behavior.
The drug production depends on the complicated system in which many people are involved. The addiction of one person can affect the lives of many other people because of their economic and social connections. If the legalization of marijuana becomes the reality in the USA, people should be ready for a lot of unexpected positive and negative effects because the controversy of the question makes it difficult to discuss the issue only from one perspective.
It is possible reduce the spread of the drugs in the American society, but there are several approaches to the problem. If marijuana is legalized, patients with cancer receive the necessary relief, the psychological and physical recreational practices become more effective, and the country’s economy becomes stronger.
However, if marijuana is legalized, it becomes more available for different social and age groups, and the risk of the uncontrolled and violent social behaviors increases. From this point, if the legalization of marijuana can be discussed as the cause, the effects can be numerous. That is why, the opinions of the American public are not only different, but they are rather opposite.
Works Cited Buckner, Julia, Richard Heimberg, Russell Matthews, and Jose Silgado. Marijuana-Related Problems and Social Anxiety: The Role of Marijuana Behaviors in Social Situations. Psychology of Addictive Behaviors 26.1(2012): 151-156. Print.
Javdani, Marie. “Plata o Plomo: Silver or Lead”. The Bedford Reader. Ed. Dorothy Kennedy and Jane Aaron. USA: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2005. 448-455. Print.
Klofas, John. The Social and Legal Effects of Medical Marijuana: State Legislation and Rules. 2012. PDF file. Web.
Steve, Elliott. The Little Black Book of Marijuana: The Essential Guide to the World of Cannabis. USA: Peter Pauper Press, Inc., 2011. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Marijuana: The Issues of Legalization in the USA by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Air Pollution Characteristics and Effect Essay essay help free
Table of Contents Classification of Air Pollutants
Characteristics of Air pollutants
Effects of Air Pollution on Human Health
Effect of Air Pollutants in the Environment
Air pollution occurs when gaseous substances are released into the atmosphere. Industrialization is the major source of air pollution. An alteration in the gaseous composition of the atmosphere is called air pollution. Air pollution is caused by the release of gaseous elements into the atmosphere (Schwartz 7). The gaseous substances contaminate the atmosphere and causes harm to living and nonliving things.
The chemical composition of the atmosphere can be seen below:
Gas Symbol Percentage Composition Nitrogen N2 78.1 Oxygen O2 20.9 Neon Ne 0.92 Argon Ar Helium He Krypton Kr Xenon Xe Carbon dioxide CO2 Methane CH4 Nitrous oxide N2O Water vapor H2O 0.004 to 4 (Variable) The composition table shows that gaseous elements can combine to cause adverse effect on humans and the atmosphere. Gaseous emissions from the atmosphere can cause short and long-term hazards. Air pollutants can be divided into primary and secondary pollutants.
Classification of Air Pollutants Air pollutants can be classified into two types namely: Primary and secondary pollutants
Primary Pollutants: Gaseous substances released into the atmosphere are called primary pollutants. These substances have direct access to the atmosphere and can cause great danger to human health and the environment. When these gases are released in large quantities they combine to form a harmful product. These substances include compounds of carbon, Nitrogenous compounds, compounds of sulphur, compounds of halogen and solid particles (koop 4).
Secondary Pollutants: Primary pollutants react to form secondary pollutants. The accumulation of gaseous elements produces secondary air pollutants. Secondary pollutants include acidic oxides which are formed from the release of nitrogen oxides.
Characteristics of Air pollutants Particles of matter: Pollutants in this category consist of residues from bush burning, construction sites, combustion engines, dust particles, soot or smoke and heavy metals. When this particulate suspensions are inhaled there cause harm to the respiratory system.
Nitrogen oxides: Oxides of nitrogen are released from heavy-duty engines. Accumulation and deposition of this substance can damage the ozone layer and affect the visibility of the environment.
Oxides of sulphur: The emission of this substance produces a pungent smell. Oxides of sulphur are released into the atmosphere during gas flaring. Sulphur dioxide cause irritation of the skin and affects the lungs.
Oxides of carbon: This gas is not visible; it is a colorless gas and has an adverse effect on human health. Oxides of carbon are produced from the combustion engines. High volumes of this substance can cause brain damage and immediate death.
Depleted Ozone: when gaseous substances are released into the atmosphere, they cause depletion of the ozone layer. Ozone depletion is caused by the emission of primary pollutants into the atmosphere. The ozone becomes depleted and causes damage to the central nervous system.
Lead particles: The burning of crude oil produces huge deposits of lead. The accumulation of this pollutant in the atmosphere can cause severe damage to the reproductive organs, lungs and the central nervous system.
Toxic and radioactive pollutants: Toxic pollutants are found in products containing gasoline. Toxic substances increase the mortality rate in children and affect the female reproductive organs. Radioactive pollutants can cause breast cancer and other respiratory diseases (Wai 4).
The table below shows a list of some common pollutants and their sources
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Common pollutants Sources Particulate matter suspensions Heavy industries, cement plants, power plants, automobile industries. Fluoride Components of fertilizer, aluminium chippings, heavy metals. Chlorine Deposits from water plants. Sulphur dioxide Petroleum plants, heavy metals, power plants. Lead Battery manufacturing plants, Ore plants. Peroxyacetyl nitrate Indirect pollutant. Oxides of nitrogen and its compounds Heavy metals, power plants, automobiles Carbon monoxide Combustion engines. Hydrogen sulphide Power plants, paper industries. Ozone Indirect pollutants. Formaldehyde Indirect pollutants. Ammonia Fertilizer, deposits from fertilizer plants. Hydrocarbons Crude oil plants, automobiles. Effects of Air Pollution on Human Health Previous literatures indicate that air pollution is a major source of health problems globally (Daly and Zannetti 3). Air pollution has short and long term effect; it affects the climate and human beings. Depletion of the ozone layer is a long-term effect of air pollution. Health workers believe that the rate of gaseous emission has increased geometrically, this account for the health hazards and death of children.
Children are more vulnerable to air pollutants because the accumulated chemical substance would reduce the metabolic rate in the body (Daly and Zannetti 5). Health workers argue that the high rate of infant mortality and abnormalities is caused by the accumulation of gaseous substances in the atmosphere. Children have been diagnosed with lung cancer, a trend that began with industrialization. There are many other ailments associated with air pollution.
The table below summarizes the effects of air pollution on human health.
Pollutants Effects on human health Particles of matter Cause heart diseases, affects the lungs, and causes premature death due to prolonged exposure and cardiac arrest. Ozone depletion Affects the respiratory organs, induces symptoms such as cough, breath disorders, lung infection. Lead Causes renal failure, affects the memory of children, can lead to anemia, causes nervous breakdown. Oxides of Nitrogen Causes renal failure in children, affects the lungs. Oxides of sulphur Can lead to asthma, causes chest pain in children and the aged. Reduces the lifespan of children, can cause serious respiratory problems in pregnant women. Carbon monoxide Affects oxygen circulation in the body, causes respiratory disorders. Ammonia Associated with heart failures and low blood pressure. Organic compounds Volatile compounds cause cancer, affects the metabolic breakdown of the body. Causes renal failure and respiratory infections. Mercury Induces brain damage, causes liver and kidney failures, affects the growth of children. Toxic wastes Causes lung cancer, affects the reproductive organs, can lead to death of the victim. The table below summarizes the effects of air pollutants on the environment
Effect of Air Pollutants in the Environment Pollutants Effects in the environment Particles of matter Affects visibility and the ecosystem, distorts the pattern of rainfall, damages the soil structure and affects plant growth. Ozone depletion Affects vegetation cover, affects leaves and flowering plants, reduces photosynthesis, reduces crop yield, affects carbon dioxide uptake in plants. Causes stunted growth in plants. Lead Harmful to aquatic life, reduces the availability of trace elements in the soil. Oxides of Nitrogen Causes climate change, increases ozone depletion, affects soil nutrients when the accumulated in higher amounts. Oxides of sulphur Reduces the vegetation cover, damages soil structure. Carbon monoxide Influences the formation of carbon dioxide and affects greenhouse compounds. Ammonia Influences the eutrophication of soil water, leads to contamination of ground water, and affects climate change. Organic compounds Influence the ozone process, affects the greenhouse process. Mercury Distorts aquatic life and the deposits in rivers affects the vegetative cover. Toxic wastes Affects wildlife and reduces the growth of livestock, affects the ecosystem. Finally, air pollution must be controlled in order to guarantee a safe environment. Burning of fuels must be controlled and proper care must be taken to ensure proper management of these air pollutants.
Works Cited Daly, Arter and Zannetti Paker 2007, Introduction to Air Pollution. PDF file. Web.
Koop, Gary 2002, Measuring the Health Cost of Air Pollution. PDF file. Web.
We will write a custom Essay on Air Pollution Characteristics and Effect specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Schwartz, Joel 2006, The Health Effects of Air Pollution. PDF file. Web.
Wai, Wong 2008, Air Pollution and Health Studies in China: A Literature Review. Web.
Need for Authoritarian Rule Research Paper college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Authoritarian Rule in Yugoslavia
The African Case: Genocide in Rwanda
Main Features of Authoritarian Regimes
The Need of Dictatorship
Introduction Recent studies on international relations reveal that the world is troubled with primeval ethnic conflict. This implies that tribal groups lie in wait for one another. Ethnic groups nurture a long-standing revulsion, but they cannot engage in war because powerful authoritarian leaders control them. From this perspective, it is difficult for tribal groups to coexist without the use of force, which can only be implemented by powerful leaders who have absolute authority.
In Eastern Europe, former Yugoslavia serves as an example whereby the Serbs, Croats, and Bosnians coexisted yet they belonged to different ethnic groups. The groups lived for several years peacefully, but they rose against each other without a valid reason. This was after the fall of the authoritarian rule, which held them together for a long time. Serbs, Croats and Bosnians share a common language and history, but they differ in terms of other cultural aspects.
They have always viewed each other with suspicion as regards to resource distribution. Ethnicity becomes nationalism when various groups attempt to control major state resources, such as land and power. The Serbs and Croats advocated for their rights by joining other European nations that demanded self-governance.
While Serbs drew examples from the short-lived nation-state, Croats were in advanced stages of developing a nationalist ideology (Geertz 67). Croats believed that their rival regarding resource allocation were the Serbs. Therefore, the best alternative was to eliminate them. This could not materialize given the fact that a powerful authoritarian leader could not allow this to happen.
This paper evaluates the statement that antagonistic ethnic groups can live together for years due to the presence of the authoritarian leader. The article therefore supports the hypothesis that soft authoritarianism is needed to maintain peace and political stability.
Authoritarian Rule in Yugoslavia Yugoslavia was formed after the First World War following the despicable conflicts that characterized the region. Serbs dominated the state since they owned major businesses. This was never received well by the Croats who felt that their position was under threat, as they owned nothing.
In this regard, the Croats formed a militant organization referred to as Ustashe, which aimed at fighting for the rights of all Croats. The militant organization could not do much before the Second World War because of the presence of an authoritarian leader. Following the collapse of the state during the Second World War, the Croats collaborated with the Nazis to exterminate the Serbs. The Serbs were forced to work in concentration camps together with the Jews while others were expelled from the region.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Serb leader Slobodan Milosevic declared war on the Croats when he noticed that his people were dying in large numbers. After the Second World War, a strong authoritarian leader took over in Yugoslavia, who controlled occurrence of another massacre until 1990s when the two warring communities rose against each other once more. Marshall Tito ensured that civil groups were not formed in the country since they could easily derail the peace efforts.
Instead, he developed shared political values that were to be observed by both communities. Political opposition was expected to obey certain political values, irrespective of the region. This meant that both the Serbs and the Croats were to abide by the national political principles (Friedman 56). Moreover, the authoritarian ruler ensured that Croats owned land in Serbia while Serbs also owned land in Croatia.
The African Case: Genocide in Rwanda In Africa, the issue of ethnicity started with colonialism whereby the settlers ensured that each African identifies him or herself with a certain ethnic group. This was to enable easy identification, which was perceived to be a strategy for preventing conflicts with the whites. Belgian administrators supported the Tutsis when they gave them a monopoly regarding state power. Tutsis accumulated power to an extent of making the Hutus the poorest in the country.
Hutus had to wait for an opportunity to revenge because the Belgian administration could not tolerate any conflicts. In this case, it is true that authoritarian rule prevented conflicts in Rwanda. Colonialists noticed that they could govern the African continent by collaborating with certain ethnic groups.
In many cases, they collaborated with groups that embraced Christianity or minorities. Europeans applied force in Africa because they did not have numbers. Authoritarianism was applied successfully to safeguard their rule. Nationalism is closely related to culture and industrialization, something that encouraged many colonialists (Spencer and Wollman 34).
When African leaders took over power, particularly in Rwanda, authoritarianism was applied successfully to keep the Hutus and the Tutsis together. Things changed in 1994 when authoritarian rule was condemned, paving way for openness, which resulted to the genocide (Hintjens 21).
Since authoritarian leaders have absolute control over the state machinery, they will always ensure that peace prevail in society. Such leaders do not give ethnic groups time to reorganize in order kill many people. Individuals would be reluctant to participate in violence once they realize that the consequences would be stern. Groups would be waiting for opportunities to come for them to engage in violent demonstration that usually result to deaths.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Need for Authoritarian Rule specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It should be understood that strong leadership at the top determines whether ethnic groups rise against each other in any society. The Rwandan (Hutus and Tutsis) and Balkan (Croats, Bosnians and Serbs) cases would be used as example to show that powerful leadership, which is complimented with authoritarian, does not give room to violent conflicts.
In Rwanda, the president started assembling gangs in 1990 in order to wipe out his closest opponents, who were the Hutus and the Tutsis. He formed a militia group referred to as the Interahamwe, which conducted a massacre in 1992. Since the Tutsis were accused of siding with colonialists to deprive the Rwandese of their wealth, all radio stations were ordered to spread hate messages against them. This resulted to systematic killing of the Tutsis and the Hutu moderates.
Main Features of Authoritarian Regimes As earlier noted in the introduction section, authoritarian leaders are always in opposition of multiparty politics mainly because they fear competitive politics. They do not allow divergent views to infiltrate the electorate because their leadership would be in danger. Such leaders would do everything to ensure that the opposition does not exist in the country.
For instance, they would incorporate other unscrupulous techniques such as political assassination and constant frustration of the opposition. To these leaders, the end will always justify the means implying that their techniques of rule do not matter so much, but what matters is the acquisition of power and its subsequent maintenance (Diamond 117).
Another feature that characterizes authoritarianism is that a group of few individuals control all state organs implying that the idea of checks and balances do not apply. Usually, the president is in charge of everything that should be undertaken in government. Separation of powers plays a critical role in checking the excess of the executive.
Unfortunately, this principle is not observed in an authoritarian regime because the legislature will never challenge the decision of the president, even though it has a mandate of ensuring that the law-making process is smooth.
In extreme cases, the legislature would be used as a rubber stamp meaning that its role is to approve the bills that originates from the executive arm of government. Any politician that opposes the decision of the executive is viewed as an opponent of the state and is often subjected to inhumane treatment whereby security forces would harass him or her frequently.
Authoritarian regimes are also referred to as the single party states because of certain features. One of the features is that the freedom of speech is highly controlled whereby an individual is not allowed to assemble without the permission of the government. This implies that demonstrations, strikes, and picketing are not allowed.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Need for Authoritarian Rule by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More People found demonstrating without obtaining necessary documentation from the state agencies are arrested and would be charged in the court of law (Bremmer 110). The judiciary is always dependent because it observes the instructions issued by one arm of the government, which is usually the executive. In this regard, it is eminent that freedom of assembly is not permitted in an authoritarian regime because an individual cannot hold a meeting without approval from the police.
In other authoritarian regimes, an individual would be expected to obtain a local travelling document, which means that the freedom of movement even within the state borders is highly restricted. The opposition leaders perceived to be a threat to the authoritarian ruler are often denied passports to travel within the state boundaries.
Apart from local restrictions regarding travelling, an individual must also receive approval from the government before travelling abroad. Authoritarian leaders fear the pressure of the west or developed countries meaning that they will always ensure opposition leaders do not meet with foreign donors (Huntington 68).
Regarding the media freedom, the press is only allowed to report matters that are positive whereby information is censored before being reported. Any information perceived to go against the will of the government is always subjected to close scrutiny before being allowed to reach the public.
Corruption, misappropriation of funds, poor governance, neglect of the rule of law, non-observance of the bill of rights, and inequality regarding resource distribution are some of the features that characterize authoritarian regimes. The media must always be guided on what to report concerning the performance of the government. Those that go against the wishes of the government are harshly punished by being detained for long periods without trail.
Others are frustrated to an extent of fleeing the country in fear of assassination. The opposition should never operate within the state borders because its leaders are considered political dissidents who must operate outside the state borders. In the African continent, authoritarian leaders are usually referred to as personal rulers because their major aim is to fulfil individual needs, such as resource accumulation.
It should be noted however that authoritarian rulers differ in their style of leadership because some may possess all the above-mentioned qualities while others might be having just some of the features. Moreover, some might be more oppressive while others might be accommodative meaning that they allow some political competition of opposing views.
Nevertheless, all authoritarian leaders tend to employ similar strategies regarding the control of state. In fact, they all use the state machineries, including the police, the military, the courts, and government ministries to frustrate the opposition. The main aim of all authoritarian leaders is to hold on to power hence they would be willing to use all available methods.
The Need of Dictatorship In the 1960s, many scholars and even religious leaders called for the establishment of authoritarian regimes because they were efficient in terms of managing the country’s security, as well as realizing the economic and socio-political dreams. The influential Buddhist Rajakeeya Panditha suggested in his works Sinhala that dictatorship would be the perfect form of leadership in some parts of Asia because it would bring sanity and efficiency in matters related to resource management and distribution.
In Sri Lanka, the religious leader commented that authoritarianism would perhaps guarantee prosperity in the country, as well as help the country regain its socio-political and economic glory. Many people supported the view that dictatorship would ensure growth in Sri Lanka mainly because democracy had flopped. Leaders in government welcomed the views of this religious leader because they aimed at clinging on to power for long.
However, the views of many leaders regarding the works of the cleric were misplaced because he gave his own reasons for opposing democracy. Democratic regimes had failed to address the issues that affected the people of Sri Lanka. The cleric questioned why the country was still crippling with human problems that would be avoided, such as poverty, drought, poor representation, and even misappropriation of public funds.
Some studies suggest that authoritarianism brings out the best from an individual, which means that its results are instantaneous. If an individual is deprived his or her right and fear instilled in him or her, an alternative survival means would be sought. This means that an individual will have to work hard to avoid the negative consequences.
If people were informed that a tsunami is approaching, they would scamper for their lives because they understand its dangers. Similarly, people would have to fight for their survival if they are informed that they would be arrested if they do not achieve certain objectives. Under ordinary state of affairs, an individual would not engage him or herself in busy work because there are no repercussions. Therefore, authoritarianism plays a critical role in ensuring that people join hands in realizing certain aims and goals.
Democracy is the worst form of leadership that would force individuals to work together because it relies on people’s consent. One of the major tenets of authoritarianism is that it does not allow people to question the authority, unlike democracy, which allows the populace to be involved in designing major decisions. If development were to be achieved, people should not be allowed to argue over some common facts.
Other scholars are of the view that authoritarianism is the perfect form of leadership as far as resource creation and accumulation is concerned. In order to proper, any give society should create and accumulate wealth. People should not be allowed to spend everything they produce because they would not have anything to invest and use in the future. In the 4th century, an Indian scholar tried to understand the role of authoritarianism by using aphorism.
His examination was that a monster could only be controlled using another giant. Democracy would not promote wealth creation and saving for the future because it allows people to spend their resources without state intervention. Democracy is an illusion that does not achieve anything for the state. In fact, it compromises the interests of the state (Ramsay 168). The use of force would definitely help people in the end because they would have something to spend.
Hitler has always been cited as an example of economic development because he applied authoritarian rule successfully to develop Germany. He ensured that Germany developed from poverty to riches since it was considered an economic powerhouse during the Second World War.
Through his efforts, the country was able to develop some of the mostly admired infrastructural deigns in the world. Hitler utilized forced to mobilize resources, which accelerated economic growth. He transferred resources belonging to Jews to the government, which was utilized effectively to develop the military.
The military would bring glory to the state, unlike the Jews who were self-centred. The regime took over the fixed material goods, such as office blocks and industrial units, which were utilized in developing the country. Germany could not have attained its goals of conquering the world were it not for Hitler’s authoritarian rule. Hitler forced the Jews to work in concentration camps mainly to produce weapons and other valuable products that would be used in developing the country.
After death, the bones of Jews were used in making fertilizers for the German famers meaning that their bodies were not wasted. However, this is the worst example of using authoritarian rule to ensure that state interests are met. This could not have been achieved in a democratic society because people have the right to do as they wish (Kagan 112). Therefore, Germany could not have challenged the existing the international system at the time.
The civil society has always been a menace as far as realization of state interests is concerned. Forced labour camps in China, the Soviet Union, and Kampuchea received criticism from civil groups because such camps were considered slavery. Workers were not paid, but they were provided with adequate basic needs including food and clothing. The proceeds attained through forced labour would be used to develop the country.
The civil groups demanded that all workers be given what belongs to them meaning that they had to be paid suitable salaries. Regarding environmental degradation, civil groups claimed that the government, as well as private investors, had to keep off the forests. Moreover, investors had to use production methods are environmentally friendly.
This would actually derail production because the methods suggested could perhaps be inefficient. In a democratic society, leaders must be willing to accommodate divergent views. In reality, extensive consultations and unnecessary arguments are likely to derail economic development.
Totalitarian rule is well placed to control the affairs of the social groups and disobedient trade unions, which seem to compete with the state for power. In an authoritarian regime, decisions are made faster because the chain of command is always reduced. In fact, bureaucracy and hierarchies have contributed to the failure of many policies and programs, which would have otherwise contributed to economic development.
For development to take place in an urban centre, population must be evicted to pave way for reconstruction. In a democratic society, extensive consultation would be undertaken, which would even discourage potential investors from committing their funds. However, the case would be different in an authoritarian regime because people would be ordered to live within a specified time. Issues of court cases would not surface.
Under a dictator, a city planner would have powers to evict people at will hence paving way for city development. In China, this idea was effectively utilized to develop Shanghai, which is currently one of the most respected cities in the world. Shanghai is the world’s populous industrial city because subsequent authoritarian leaders in China have always ensured that land is available for investment.
In 2008, similar rule was applied in developing Beijing given the fact that it was expected to host the Olympics games. People were relocated to pave way for the extension of the city. China could not have hosted the Olympic Games were it not for the authoritarian rule that ordered forceful eviction of the locals to pave way for expansion of the field. In China, it is always believed that a little bit of authoritarian rule would guarantee prosperity.
Research shows that authoritarian regimes are better placed to implement unpopular reforms as compared to democratic regimes. This is because the central authority has monopoly over decision making and implementation process. This is compared to the democratic regimes, which must always seek the views of the majority before implementing any policy. The writings of various political philosophers suggest that authoritarianism is the best system of governance because the central authority has the power to act unilaterally.
Plato observed that democracy is the worst form of governance because it amounts to the tyranny of the multitude given the fact that the majority might sometimes be wrong. The populace is usually appetitive meaning that they only support something that seems to be pleasant yet they do not understand its tenets. Plato suggested that a good leadership is the one that is based on a certain system, such as an education system.
The leader should be knowledgeable for him or her to make effective decisions. Therefore, it is justifiable for a leader to exercise full authority without consultation if only he or she is knowledge. In the modern society, authoritarian leaders are in a position to resolve the many issues that affect both the state and non-state actors. For instance, an authoritarian leader would be in a position to deal with issues related to the environment, such as climatic change and resource deterioration.
In China, the policy suggesting that an individual should have only one child has been successful as compared to the similar policy being applied in India. Similarly, China refused to give in to the demands of the west regarding the sale of opium due to nationalism (Maalouf 78).
Authoritarianism has played a major role in ensuring that the governmental program on population management is effective. Similarly, antagonistic communities in various parts of the world have been able to coexist peacefully mainly because of the authoritarian rule. In Rwanda, the Tutsi and the Hutu communities fought each other in 1994 because there was a power vacuum in the state. The communities could not rise against each other because of the presence of the authoritarian authority.
Works Cited Bremmer, Ian. The J Curve: A New Way to Understand Why Nations Rise and Fall. New York: Simon and Schuster, 2006. Print.
Diamond, Larry. Introduction: Persistence, Erosion, Breakdown, and Renewal. Boulder: Lynne Rienner, 1989. Print.
Friedman, Andrew. “Kagame’s Rwanda: Can an Authoritarian Development Model be squared with Democracy and Human Rights”. Oregon Review of International Law, 253.2 (2012): 113-212.
Geertz, Clifford. The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays. New York, NY: Basic Books, 2000. Print.
Hintjens, Helen. Explaining the 1994 Genocide in Rwanda. Journal of Modern African Studies, 37.2 (1999): 241-286.
Huntington, Samuel. The Third Wave: Democratization in the Late Twentieth Century. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1991.
Kagan, Robert. The Return of History and the End of Dreams. New York: Vintage, 2009. Print.
Maalouf, Amin. In the Name of Identity: Violence and the Need to Belong. New York: Arcade Pub, 2000. Print.
Ramsay, Fey. Africa. Guilford: McGraw-Hill, 1999. Print.
Spencer, Philip, and Wollman, Howard. Nationalism: A Critical Introduction. London: Sage, 2002. Print.
Synopsis and Critical Evaluation of Angel Investment Criteria Essay best college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction and Overview
Introduction and Overview Entrepreneurs often need external funding to grow. Angel Investors is one of the groups that provide financial support for start-up businesses. The Journal of Small Business Strategy shows the outstanding elements in Angel’s investment criteria. This paper provides a synopsis of the journal and indicates a personal crucial evaluation of the journal.
The journal uses a two-phase approach involving a qualitative first phase and a quantitative second phase to evaluate the investment criteria. The journal is based on a survey and observation of members of Tech Coast Angel organization (TCA). TCA is the largest US Angel organization. As of August 2004, it consisted of 173 Angels (Winter 89).
Qualitative Method Qualitative phase was used to identify decision criteria of Angel that could be helpful in the quantitative phase. The study used observed screenings and associated discussions, which led to the emergence of common themes. The leading theme was passion. Entrepreneurs who showed passion for their work received more funding than those who may have had good business plans but showed no passion. Angel believes that dedication and passion can make a business succeed.
This is particularly because it believes that managing business start-ups is challenging and requires passionate and committed managers. The journal uses an example of financial services entrepreneur who impressed Angel when he said he had put almost all his money, including residential house mortgage, into the business. Subsequently, trustworthiness played a role in Angel’s success.
From its perspective, if an entrepreneur is avoiding a question, he/she is not trustworthy. Further, entrepreneurs who provide contradictory answers lose reliability and trust. The survey showed that lack of trust would lead to cancelling of the merits of the investment venture.
Another theme was the effectiveness of the management team. Angel did not investigate the shortcomings of the current team. It was interested in finding out if the team had passion, devotion, and understanding of their responsibilities. Management that was part of a previous successful team had an added advantage. Moreover, Angels often inquired from the entrepreneurs if they understood the team they needed for success.
It also wanted to know the characteristics of the management teams that are important to the client. The easiness to coach the team was another important theme that featured. Teams that were perceived to be easy to train always had an advantage over the others.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other essential themes that were discussed were experiences of advisors, experiences of the teams, records of accomplishment of members of the team and corresponding skills of the advisors. Finally, Angel seeks to know who the potential acquirers for a particular venture would be (winter 95).
Quantitative Method The qualitative method was used to confirm the results of the quantitative phase. It confirmed that the top most important themes are trustworthiness (4.81), management team (4.64), enthusiasm (4.81), and exist (4.53), five being excellent and one low rating.
The journal indicates that these results are similar to those of Van Onsnabruggle, which showed that enthusiasm ranked first and trustworthiness second. Moreover, exist which emerged top in the qualitative study ranked fourth in the survey. Onsnabruggle reported that exist is at the 24th. Most researchers hold that the management team ranks high in investment criteria. However, this study indicates that it ranks second (Winter 97).
Critical Evaluation The journal has both positive and negative aspects. Investors can use it with care and successfully identify viable entrepreneurs. First, the article provides that having a vast business model is not sufficient to help organizations obtain funding. Moreover, a good model is not a guarantee that the business will succeed.
Notably, an entrepreneur’s ability to convince an investor that he/she understands the challenges ahead and are prepared to deal with the challenges is highly crucial. Further, the traders’ management teams must consist of those who are qualified. In everyday life, one understands that an effective plan that is not fully implemented serves no purpose. As a result, Angel is right to gauge business success by evaluating the passion, trustworthiness, and competency of management teams and the entrepreneurs.
Start –up businesses face exceptional challenges and, as a result, passion is a leading theme. Despite the useful information the journal provides, it fails to address certain investment concerns. For instance, the respondents were predominantly male (sixty-eight males against four females).
Therefore, no evaluation was carried out relating to gender disparity. Moreover, only one Angel investing organization out of 173 was surveyed (Winter 89).
We will write a custom Essay on Synopsis and Critical Evaluation of Angel Investment Criteria specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The sample size was, therefore, inadequate to predict accurately the investing behavior of the US population. This possibly indicates the reason for the disparity in the results of the study and the results of other surveys. The study simply confirms that effective management is useful in determining the future of a business, but fails to confirm that the difference in the rating of certain themes is accurate.
Conclusion Angel’s investment criteria correspond to those in the findings of Onsnabruggle and other researchers. The two-phase approach consisting of a qualitative first phase and a quantitative second phase shows that Angel’s main investing criteria include passion, honesty, and trustworthiness of the entrepreneurs. Most studies confirm that honesty and trustworthiness are some of the main themes that determine the successes of a business.
Work Cited Winter, Fall. “Angel Investment Criteria.” Journal of Small Business Strategy 17.2 (2007): 89-101. Print.
The Influence of Twitter as a Social Perception Driver in the 2012 U.S. Presidential Election Campaigns Proposal college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Research Questions
Research Questions One of the most recent surveys by the U.S Department of State indicates that approximately 50% of the American population is actively involved in social networking. However, existing data is inconclusive on the extent to which social networking, especially twitter, has an influence on social perception (Ridout 2013, p.48).
This research therefore seeks to quantify the influence of Twitter as a perception driver by evaluating the use of Twitter as a source of information and sentiment. In particular, this research will focus on the 2012 U.S. presidential election campaigns and seek to explore the impact of the tweets disseminated by Barrack Obama and Mitt Romney Twitter accounts on their supporters and on swing voters (Ridout 2013, p.46).
It is hypothesized that Twitter played a major role in consolidating votes by underscoring the agenda of the candidates and this proposal therefore seeks to answer the following questions:
To what extent did Twitter influence the results of the 2012 presidential election?
Which presidential candidate benefited the most from using Twitter?
To what extent is the effect of Twitter to particular demographic such as age, gender, ethnicity, race and religion?
How far has Twitter as a campaign device penetrated society with regard message segmentation as compared to previous campaign years?
Topic Description In America today two thirds of all social network users are now using twitter which is now not only limited to the youths but has also being adopted by older people as a social network tool. Recent statistics show that 35% of Americans who are 65 years old and above use twitter (Krugman 2009, p.212).
There is a change in the age bracket of Twitter users which was initially composed of individuals aged between age 30 and 40 but in the recent years, the population is now composed of young people in their 20’s and teens. It is true that the 2012 elections campaigns were greatly discussed on Twitter, however not everyone who is on Twitter is interested in political campaigns (Ridout 2013, p.51).
Most of them indulge in socializing with friends thus reducing the percentage of those engaging in political discourse via Twitter to 39%. Nonetheless, despite the low percentage of Twitter users who engage in politics, this group is able to indulge their friends who are not interested in politics into discussions and even argues their views increasing the total percentage to those interested in political talk by 16% (Giuliani 2007, p.20).
There has been a positive move towards effective use of Twitter as campaign handle but sadly 18% of Twitter users have dropped their accounts as a result of friends who tweet too much politics and/or do not agree with the users’ point of view. The research on the effects of Twitter as a campaign strategy has been put under observation since 2000 (Tocqueville 2000, p.95).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the past years the use of internet to campaign was ignored and other channels like television and radio were prioritized but in the year 2008 there was a change. The candidate Barrack Obama wanted to reach out to the youth and this was achieved through the use of Twitter. Since then the internet has continued to be used as a fundamental campaign tool (Powell and Persico 2010, p.260).
Approaches Qualitative and quantitative research will be applied to analyze the research data whereby the research data will be obtained from diverse sources that are concerned with different areas of study. The development process of the research will require the objective analysis of relevant data which will be support decision making process.
The data will require qualitative approval which will necessitate organizing the data and deriving cogent interpretation of the research in an articulate and structured configuration. The data will be sourced from both materials and online secondary sources from well-known authors and publishers.
Quantitative data will be attained through a survey with a 5 point Likert scale from -2 to 2.The survey will be presented to Twitter users who will be selected at random N=200. Questions such as “How often did you the 2012 presidential candidate on twitter”, “How far did the presidential candidates’ twitter sentiments influence your voting decision” will be presented and the answer rated on a 5 points scale of “very often, fairly often, once in a while, very few times and never” or “very high, high, average, low, very low”.
The scale will be reversed across questions in the survey to ensure the participants pay attention to the questions. Statistical software and regression models will then be utilized to evaluate the correlation between voting decisions and use of twitter.
If the correlation is positive whereby the correlation coefficient between variables and either progression and alignment variables is between 0.1 and 1, then we will be able to deduce that twitter has a positive influence on these variables. If the correlation is negative, we can affirm that twitter has a negative or non-existent influence on political decisions.
Annotated Bibliography Giuliani, R 2007, Leadership, Miramax Books, Boston.
We will write a custom Proposal on The Influence of Twitter as a Social Perception Driver in the 2012 U.S. Presidential Election Campaigns specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This book evaluates the values of good and effective leadership and all the available tools to make a leader effective. The book provides essential material for this research that illustrates the use of social network in leadership.
Krugman, P 2009, The Conscience of a Liberal, W. W. Norton, New York.
Written from an economic perspective this book evaluates the development of American society in a historical context. This book will be essential to this research by providing an economic point of view through which political alignment and social perceptions can be analyzed.
Powell, C and Persico, J 2010, My American Journey, Random House Publishing Group, Washington D.C.
This biography examines a person’s own experience on penetration of social media tool into the political sphere. It offers empirical data on the progression of internet based campaigns. The author provides useful information on recent political strategies that utilize social media as a key campaign platform.
Ridout, N 2013, New Directions in Media and Politics, Routledge, New York.
This book evaluates the impact of social media on the political sphere. It evaluates the influence of demography on political agenda through the internet. In this text, it provides information on how media and politics interact and creating a starting point for the research.
Tocqueville, D 2000, Democracy in America, University of Chicago Press, Chicago.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Influence of Twitter as a Social Perception Driver in the 2012 U.S. Presidential Election Campaigns by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This is a book that majors on praising the United States of America for the continued expansion of civil rights and democratic space. It is rated to be among the best books in U.S. and is useful to the research by offering insight into the expression of legal ideas through social media without fear of political ramifications.
How the Way of Reading Books Changed due to Rapid Evolution of Technology Research Paper essay help: essay help
Technological evolution has led to the development of electronic sources that are about to replace hardcopy books. The discovery of tablets and e-readers has completely changed the way people read (Mayer 34). The use of reading devices such as iPads and computers has increasingly become very popular among readers and there are no signs of this changing in the near future.
Authors and publishers have been forced to adapt to the new development in order to guarantee their survival in the industry. The development of electronic sources such e-books, blogs, websites and e-journals provides readers with a very rich reading experience because of the interactive nature these kind of sources (Mayer 34).
Technology has transformed reading from just being a passive experience into a very interactive experience where the reader can watch and listen to content apart from reading. Technology has enhanced content by offering a variety of electronic sources (Nord 74). Electronic magazines and books have enhanced content compared to print sources. Technological advancement has a significant impact on reading practices and habits.
Many publishers have changed from the traditional printing of hardcopy books to the more efficient and stylish electronic formats such as e-books, e-journals and other digital publications (Nord 74). Technology has made it possible for book buyers to buy any book they want online without visiting a bookstore. This is a clear indication that many people are willing to embrace the use of technology when it comes to buying and reading books (Nord 74).
The fact that the most popular titles are found in their e-book format means that many readers will have to shift from the traditional hard copy format to the e-book format (Nord 112). Although print books still control almost 80 percent of the book market, the number of e-book sales keeps on growing every year. This is a clear indication that many readers are embracing the use of technology in reading.
Students claim that it is more convenient to use e-books while travelling compared to traditional books because they can easily access content from their digital devices such as laptops, mobile phones and iPads without moving around with large volumes of books (Nord 112).
E-readers allow the multi-tasking and converging of technology which enable the user to access a variety of applications that make the reading process very interactive (Nord 128). The introduction of digital reading has led to an increase in the number of readers because e-books and other online publications are cheap and more accessible (Liu 64).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The development of technological devices such as iPads and tablets will continue to increase the variety and number of e-readers (Liu 66). Technology has really enhanced the reading culture because many people can now access digital sources on their computers without going to the bookstore.
The iPad is a new revolution in the world of reading because of its numerous applications (Liu 79). Although an iPad has many uses, the device is in most cases used to read e-books. An iPad can be used to read content during official duties and even leisure time. The device can be used to read e-books and other online publications depending on the type of applications that that the user has (Liu 79).
The number of newspaper and magazine readers has increased because readers are only required to have a computer with internet connectivity to access magazines in their electronic format. The majority of newspaper and magazine publishers have online electronic versions meant to satisfy the needs of internet users. The reading culture has been changed in a great way because of the internet (Nord 137).
The internet revolution has changed the scope of reading sources and in the process making the reading experience to be more interesting.
The internet has got a variety of multimedia documents that include web pages, blogs, e-journals, websites and e-books which provide readers with a lot of options to choose from (Nord 137). The internet has emerged as major source of content in recent years that is attractive to the digital generation of readers. Readers are able to download a lot of information in electronic form for present and future use.
Internet surfing enables a reader to access interconnected information from different sources in one instance (Raven 122). The internet revolution has been of great benefit to students because they can access a variety of reading materials form different online sources. Research findings have shown that many students prefer doing their academic research using internet sources compared to print sources form bookstores.
Many young people have grown up in the digital environment and this has a very significant effect on their reading habits (Raven 122). Applications such as e-readers have led to selective reading where readers can move directly to their preferred content as opposed to extensive and in-depth reading associated with print sources. Internet sources enable readers to read in all directions because the arrangement of content is non-linear. This kind of arrangement makes reading to be very interesting, flexible and interactive (Raven 145).
We will write a custom Research Paper on How the Way of Reading Books Changed due to Rapid Evolution of Technology specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The digital generation of readers can not read continuously for a very long time because of the type of devices they use (Raven 145). It is not easy to read for a prolonged period of time from an iPad or a computer screen because of visual fatique. Reading has become very superficial because readers using digital devices are always tempted to explore different topics in one instance.
The need to carry out extensive reading within the shortest time possible does not allow for an in-depth exploration of content (Richardson 106). Reader software enhancements have been developed to solve the problem of poor screen resolution which discourages many digital readers because of visual fatigue.
The advocates of digital reading are doing their level best to ensure that reading from the screen becomes very comfortable. The new reading software and devices have enhanced features such videos, animations and a variety of images that are meant to introduce fun in reading (Richardson 106).
Online reading materials affect the choice of content. Readers have a variety of information to choose from compared to hardcopy books. Readers no longer depend on print sources because they have access to both local and foreign content through the internet. Technological advancement has enabled users to develop an interest in reading news because of affordability and accessibility (Richardson 109). Sequential and continuous reading has significantly decreased as a result of digital reading that is very flexible.
In conclusion, the traditional reading culture has completely changed as a result of technological advancement. The internet revolution has had a significant impact on the reading practices of many readers (Nord 115). Digital reading has encouraged superficial and interactive reading.
In-depth reading is no longer possible because electronic sources provide very little room for that. Online readers can not concentrate for long periods of time because of the temptation to read a variety of sources. Online sources do not encourage sequential reading because of their non-linear arrangement.
General knowledge reading has increased in recent times due to internet surfing (Richardson 156). Digital devices such as iPads, mobile phones, computers and tablets have introduced convenience in reading because readers can access information in the comfort of their homes (Richardson 159). The majority of bookstores will soon close down because many readers prefer electronic sources.
Works Cited Liu, Ziming. Paper to Digital: Documents in the Information Age. London: ABC-CLIO, 2008. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on How the Way of Reading Books Changed due to Rapid Evolution of Technology by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nord, David. The Enduring Book: Print Culture in Postwar America. New York: UNC Press Books, 2009. Print.
Raven, James. The Practice and Representation of Reading in England. London: Cambridge University Press, 2007. Print.
Richardson, Judy. Reading to Learn in the Content Areas. New York: Cengage Learning, 2011. Print.
Mayer, Richard. Handbook of Research on Learning and Instruction. New York: Taylor
The Roots of Religious and Social Opposition between Catholicism and Pentecostalism Essay best college essay help
The question of opposition between religions is rather controversial because religions are based on the system of beliefs which are associated with the human spirituality, but not with any rationales and efforts to achieve the definite goal. In reality, religions in their association with such institutions as churches have more similarities with the market brands than with the aspects of the people’s spirituality.
From this point, modern churches compete within the market of the people’s beliefs, and this statement is not a metaphor because the victory in the competition guarantees the progress of the church not only in the religious sphere but also in the social and economic fields. Today, churches are closely connected with the social aspects of the people’s life within communities. As a result, it is possible to speak about ‘winners’ and ‘losers’ of the religious competition.
This idea is discussed in detail in the book The Churching of America, 1776-2005: Winners and Losers in Our Religious Economy written by Finke and Stark. According to the authors, traditional religions or mainline denominations lost their positions when upstart sects developed in the field as ‘winners’ (Finke
Current Trends Affecting Marriage and Family Formation in Asia Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
The average age at first marriage has been increasing in Asia over decades. Though this phenomenon is worldwide, it is more prominent in Asia. Related to timing of marriage is family structure. The outlook of Asian families has been changing alongside the timing of marriage. This paper will explore various trends that affect timing of marriage and structure of families.
Socio-economic variables like education and religion have important impact on the timing of marriage and timing of marriage (Quah 7). However, it is important to note that these factors are not universal across the continent. Asia is vast continent with various cultural and religious groups.
Education is by far the influential factor. Education influences marriage both directly and indirectly. Educated Asians tend to delay marriage regardless of gender. However, other gender related factors influence how people view marriage. Young people in Asia may decide to delay marriage in order to enjoy government subsidies.
Available resources are limited and people could wish to pursue education first before they settle down. In addition, many young people may find it hard to balance the demands of married life with those of studying. Young people find it easy delaying marriage up to a time in future when they have completed their education.
Educated women tend to delay marriage as compared to their less educated counterparts. This may be attributed to the fact that education enables women to break away from the traditional mindset. Traditionally, most cultures expected women to be married early to a man of her parents’ choice. Education has enabled both men and women to choose their own spouses based on personal values sand expectations.
Previously women were expected to perform domestic chores while men were expected to be the providers. This greatly restricted women’s access to formal employment. To overcome this challenge many women opted to delay marriage until such a time when they have established carriers. Others may opt not to get married at all. This is related to the fact that women are expected to take care of their families after work.
Education also provides economic empowerment to women. Women who are educated are more likely to have well paying jobs than women with little or no education at all. In most parts of Asia, women are increasingly being empowered through education. In some parts women literacy levels is almost equal to that of men. Since employed women can provide for themselves, economic gains previously attached to marriage have greatly disappeared.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Women are free to choose whether to and when get married. Therefore, economic empowerment is accompanied by freedom of choice. Economic outlook of individuals is a reflection of the overall economy of a country. In rich Asian countries like Japan and South Korea, women tend to delay marriage by a large margin as compared to their developing counterparts.
Education has also influenced the view on extended family. The extended family had profound influence on when a member of the family got married. Girls were married off early. On the flipside women’s education may affect men negatively. Less educated men may encounter difficulties in finding a mate.
Age at first marriage influences the number of children one is likely to get. Generally, people who get married late are likely to have few children (Jones 90. This is more applicable to women than men. This in turn affects the structure of the family. Focus has been shifting from how many children one has to the quality of life. People are likely to postpone marriage until when they are economically stable (Gubhaju 20). Single parent families have also become acceptable.
Economic difficulties also influence when people get married. Harsh economic realities have made many men to delay marriage (Bajracharya
The Colonial War in Southwest Africa Essay (Critical Writing) custom essay help
The colonial war in Southwest Africa in 1904-1907 is the example of genocide against the Herero people realized by the German authorities and military within the territories of Southwest Africa. The Herero people rose up to bring down the suppressive order of the German rulers to become the independent nation in 1904.
The actions of the German authorities and military leaders as a reaction to the revolt were too radical and oriented to the mass destruction of the Herero people. This fact allows speaking about genocide against the African people based on the threat of losing power by the German leaders.
Furthermore, this situation became the first example of genocide at the beginning of the twentieth century. In the article “German Military Culture and the Colonial War in Southwest Africa, 1904-1907”, Isabel Hull states that the reaction of the German militaries to the revolt in Southwest Africa can be classified from the point of the destructive extremes, and the source of this reaction is in the German military culture, usage of typical military practices, focus on doctrines and order, and inability to adapt to the non-European methods of war.
From this point, genocide against the Herero people became the result of the focus of the German military leaders on destruction, pursuit, racism, and mass killing in order to confirm their state’s power.
Genocide can be discussed as one of the most controversial global problems which is based on the issues of people’s intolerance and racism in relation to some nations and ethnicities. The revolt of the Herero people against the German rule in Southwest Africa was the reasonable reaction of the people to the suppression of the colonialists.
However, the German leaders focused on the quick victory in order to overcome the revolt and accentuate the country’s power. To achieve the goal and to become winners in the war, the German military concentrated on the traditional or habitual methods of the fighting and warfare patterns typical for the Western world.
Nevertheless, the approaches of the African nations to fighting are rather different basing on their culture and society’s development (Walther, 2004). Focusing on the European patterns, the German military did not expect a lot of difficulties associated with developing the war at the African territories. As a result, the German soldiers were destabilised psychologically when the Herero people were in their comfortable environments.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From this point, it is possible to speak about the psychological effects of the risk to be defeated by the non-organized African people (Steinmetz, 2003). Thus, the focus of the German military on the policies of destruction can be considered as the extreme approach to state the power of the country’s with the effective military and organizational culture.
The conflict of two different cultures ended in the opposition of two military cultures which methods were aggressive and destructive. Therefore, ideologies, psychological factors, and social impacts are significant for forming the military culture of the country.
The quick victory became impossible for the German military that is why the course was changed to mass killing and pursuit. From the point of political concerns, mass killings of the Herero people and their pursuit were effective methods to stabilize the situation in the region and state the power of the country which can overcome any revolt. The main political idea of the war was the statement of German superiority.
Nevertheless, discussing the situation from the point of the historical development, it is necessary to pay attention to realizing the principle of achieving the definite goal “by all means” at the beginning of the twentieth century (Hull, 2011). Thus, the concentration on emphasizing the state’s power made the German military able to kill thousands of people without following the traditional principles of the war.
If the actions of the German army are the example of achieving the goal “by all means” from the point of military culture, the situation with the Herero people should be discussed as genocide from the sociological perspective. There are no political or military goals which can justify mass killings and racism realized in Southwest Africa in 1904-1907. The actions of the German military destroyed the life of the whole community because of the authorities’ fears to lose the power and status (Walther, 2004).
The colonial war in Southwest Africa in 1904-1907 can be discussed from many perspectives, including historical, psychological, sociological, and political ones. The role of the colonial war in Southwest Africa in history is significant because it is the vivid example of the country’s usage of all the means in realization the definite goals.
Losing its position at the stage of preparation for the war, the German military focused not only on overcoming the revolt but also on destructing the nation with the help of mass killings. Nevertheless, the end results of the war could be less dramatic. From this point, it is necessary to pay attention to the psychological discussion of the problem.
We will write a custom Critical Writing on The Colonial War in Southwest Africa specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The German leaders chose the extreme methods of warfare because of the fear to lose the status within the European colonial countries. The fear became the driving force for developing the war and realizing mass killings of the Herero people.
Being ready to sacrifice everything to emphasize the political power of the state, the Germans not only re-established the German authority in the region but also contributed to the development of one of the main social problems for all the historic periods. This problem is genocide based on racism.
According to Hull, the origins of the German authorities’ violence are in the vision of the Africans as inferior peoples and in the focus on the order and power (Hull, 2011).
The colonial war in Southwest Africa should be examined from the all the mentioned perspectives because of the role of the experience for the development of the global citizenship. There cannot be reasons for any extreme human destruction when the war leads to killing soldiers as well as civilians. Focusing on the aim to defeat the enemy completely, the German military pursued the goal to develop the war according to the standard procedures and principles.
Nevertheless, the plan did not work within the environments of the Southwest Africa because of the people’s specific identity, culture, values, and visions of the world (Steinmetz, 2008). Thus, it is possible to speak about the responsibility of the authorities for actions which can be threatening for the life of local communities.
The German leaders ruling the territories of the Southwest Africa failed in relation to their responsibility as local citizenship because they followed the principles of colonialism and mass destruction. As a result, not only the Herero people but also German settlers became the victims of the German soldiers’ inhuman actions.
However, the actions by the German military can be explained from the point of the military culture and social patterns typical for the German society. Thus, the German authorities used to win quickly because of their unique order, effective organizational structures, planned actions, and developed strategies.
Nevertheless, all these principles were ineffective to fight with the Herero people who did not follow any specific war principles (Steinmetz, 2008). The inability to adapt to the specific war environments made the German military focus on mass destruction without focusing on any principles in order to avoid the loss by any means.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Colonial War in Southwest Africa by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As a result, the decision-making process realized by the German militaries in relation to the Herero people is based on the differences in cultures. From the sociological perspective, the decision-making process regarding genocide actions was planned and used as the effective method to defeat the nation physically and psychologically.
The colonial war in Southwest Africa is the dramatic example of genocide against the nation because of discussing it as inferior and unable to build the independent state. The destructive actions and pursuits of the German military led to the catastrophic outcomes. Thus, genocide as one of the issues of global development was based on the elements of the German military culture, practices, and doctrines.
References Hull, I. (2011). German military culture and the colonial war in Southwest Africa, 1904-1907. In W. E. Lee (ed.), Warfare and Culture in World History (pp. 143-164). New York: New York University Press.
Steinmetz, G. (2003). “The Devil’s Handwriting”: Precolonial discourse, ethnographic acuity, and cross-identification in German colonialism. Comparative Studies in Society and History, 45(1), 41-95.
Steinmetz, G. (2008). The colonial state as a social field: Ethnographic capital and native policy in the German Overseas Empire before 1914. American Sociological Review, 73(4), 589-612.
Walther, D. (2004). Gender construction and settler colonialism in German Southwest Africa, 1894–1914. Historian, 66(1), 1-18.
Political Consequences of Globalization Essay college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Foundations of Globalization
Globalization and Politics
Introduction While there is little consensus on a precise definition, globalization usually refers to a multidimensional process whereby markets, firms, production, and national financial systems are integrated on a global scale (Brawley 2008, p. 12). This definition, however, emphasizes the economic aspects of globalization.
Globalization in other areas of life such as communication, has ramifications in non-economic too, as in cultural affairs, and these can have subsequent political consequences. According to Müller (2003, p. 7), globalization may be described as a new social architecture of cross border human interactions. It breaks down the old international division of labor and the associated hierarchy of rich and poor countries.
Through the process of globalization, the integrity of the national territorial state as a more or less coherent political economy is eroded, and the functions of the state become reorganized to adjust domestic economic and social policies to fit the exigencies of the global market and global capitalist accumulation.
Foundations of Globalization Although theoretical concepts offer useful insights and directions for inquiry, specific social arrangements are always historical. That is to say, in inquiring into the issues of that have been resolved in the building of globalization; it is important to remember that what exists today has emanated from previous experience.
Among the conditions that have supported the concept of globalization include power, institutions, authority, and democracy. As the fundamental concept of politics, power has been thought of in many ways. One prominent conceptualization stresses the domination of one person or entity over others, whereas another emphasizes the construction of power through interactive speech that leads to acting together.
A favorite of political scientists focuses on the specific acts by which one individual or group induces another to do things that the other would not otherwise do. In addition to power and identification of interests in a global context, different nations have desired to lead the way and gain the cooperation of other states through institutional arrangements that make the coordination of policies easier and steadier.
According to Prechel (2007, p. 35), institutionalization has followed a practical and quite diverse course. In the late nineteenth century, the United States helped to found the Pan American Union as a means of gaining the cooperation of western hemisphere states. At the same time, the United States retained its discretion to intervene in those same states when its interests led it to at unilaterally. Authority has also been considered a key pillar of globalization.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When power is exercised by some people over others in circumstances in which both sides agree that there is an obligation to obey, one party has a right to act with authority (Cohen 2001, p. 21). In states with established governments and ordered societies based on justice, authority tends to be recognized to such an extent that citizens obey laws even when they disagree with them, and violators of law recognize that they are doing wrong in the face of legitimate authority.
The basis upon which those running a political system claim authority to rule and those subject to it find an obligation to obey forms one important line of inquiry in political philosophy as well as an important practical issue for political leaders and followers. Finally, there is democracy. In an ideal democratic society, power rests with the people. As a result, governments are often pushed to act in a way that takes public interest into consideration.
Globalization and Politics The politics of globalization includes two dimensions. The first embodies the efficient distribution of power and the constraints imposed by existing arrangements. Ordinarily, these constraints flow from choices that have established and now manage existing structures and processes.
The second dimension embraces a more visionary quest for alternative arrangements in the future. As is true of all politics, both cooperation and struggle are involved, domination and resistance are evident, and contestation abounds. To a large extent, globalization is most commonly presented as an inexorable process that consists in bringing the world together through technology.
Although the fundamental processes bringing human beings into contact with one another have been at work for millennia, high-speed transport and especially the computer have speeded up the process in the last quarter-century or so (Lindquist
Global Capital Markets in Crisis Case Study college application essay help: college application essay help
Since the beginning of the financial crisis, the big question is whether the crisis will ever reoccur. Many players in the financial sector fear that re-occurrence of the crisis is imminent given the fact that the full stability have not been achieved. In addition, weak growths in almost all sectors of the economy have been persistent particularly in the major economies (Kalter and Holland 145).
Moreover, unemployment rates have remained persistently high as investment banks and individuals continue to pay back the excessive debts they accumulated during the bubble years. The result is stifled investments, slowed economic growth that in turn negatively affects the rate of employment (Kalter and Holland 146).
The problem has been exacerbated by lack of international co-operation on ways through which the crisis can be brought to an end. More worse is the high possibility of the global economic recession because of the US economic slow growth and the divisions in the euro zone. The major European economies require political determination to enforce international co-operation required to prevent breakdown of the euro as a single currency (Eichengreen 16).
In addition, major economies such as US and the euro zone are reluctant to co-operate with emerging economies such as China, which are still immune to the global financial crisis and can inject more capital flows into the global capital markets.
Moreover, countries are planning for short-term measures such as austerity measures rather than long-term policies that can finally end the crisis. The reluctance by countries to borrow for fiscal stimulus packages offered by major investment banks deepens the possibility for the re-occurrence of the crisis (Kalter and Holland 147).
The deregulations in the capital markets can still lead to the re-occurrence of the crisis. The regulatory measures that have been put in place are short-term while long-term measures and policies have not been formulated. In addition, many countries are still indifferent on whether to apply regulatory measures that can avert the crisis in the end or to live the whole problem to the market forces, which have failed in the past (Kregel 5). Given these failures, the likelihood of the re-occurrence of the crisis is high.
The re-regulations of the capital markets Though the capital markets crisis was blamed on longer periods of deregulations, the debate whether the re-regulations should be imposed still rages on. The fact is that there were regulations that governed the capital markets institutions that brought about the crisis.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The problem was poor implementation of the regulatory measures and the non-compliant of the regulatory measures by the capital markets institutions (Watt and Botsch 1007). Financial history indicates that there are greater gains when the financial markets are deregulated. Therefore, the gains of deregulations cannot easily be devalued.
However, following the crisis, there have been calls by the public and the players to develop and better implement the regulations that were put in place. Nevertheless, there have been problems with the re-regulations. The first problem is the where to re-regulate. The second issue is how to effect re-regulations and finally how to deal with effects of restrictive regulations.
With these complexities and the failure of the complicated and elaborative measures, regulatory institutions have been pondering over the best policy or regulatory measures to adopt (Eichengreen 17). Whether to go back to the old gold standards or to continue with the complex and elaborative measures such as that of Basel II or to innovate simple measures.
The old gold standards have already been taken over by events and the Basel II is too restrictive and costly (Eichengreen 17). The only option is to adopt simplistic measures that minimize the lines of businesses that investment banks can engage in and the types of assets in which they can invest.
Moreover, investment banks are required to balance the ratio of their assets to their capital or this ratio should not exceed the required number the regulators feel could not affect the banks liquidity. In addition, the investment banks should implement short-term liquidity measures to stabilize the asset values (Kregel 6).
All these measures are regulatory though not stringent as was before. In essence re-regulations are necessary, however, in a more flexible and innovative way. In other words, capital markets institutions must comply with the regulatory measures and appropriate policies that have been put in place in order to avert further crisis (Eichengreen 17).
The future of Eurocurrency and Eurobonds The Eurocurrency has expanded enormously in the past two decades because of many factors. The growth was due to the belief that the currencies can earn more interest in other countries as opposed to being deposited in the domestic banks.
We will write a custom Case Study on Global Capital Markets in Crisis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In addition, the US regulations policy that discouraged lending to the non-US nationals encourage investors to borrow outside the US thus enhancing the growth of Eurodollars market (Watt and Botsch 1014). Another factor is the oil crises in the 1970s that led to the increase of dollars within the London banks enabling the Eurodollar market to expand considerably.
Due to its un-regulatory operations by any governments, the Eurocurrency market has remained attractive to many investors as banks can charge higher interest rates on deposits of the Eurocurrency compared to home currency and lower interest rates to any borrowers of the Eurocurrency as compared to the home currency. Further, the interest rate spread between the Eurocurrency deposits and lending is less as compare to that of domestic lending and deposit rates. As a result, the Eurocurrency banks become more competitive over the domestic banks (Watt and Botsch 1005).
Eurobond market also lacks regulatory interference thereby reducing the cost of issuing the bonds. In addition, Eurobond markets have less disclosure requirements saving the cost and time as compared to the domestic bond markets (Watt and Botsch 1007). Eurobonds can be sold directly to the investors making the bond to become more favorable from the perspective of taxes. These attributes have made the Eurobond market becomes more attractive hence its rapid expansion in the last two decades.
However, this rapid growth in the Eurocurrency and the Eurobonds markets will be hampered by many factors majorly the continued global uncertainty within the capital markets. The uncertainty increases risk of depositors losing funds as banks continue to take measures to prevent collapse or failure in case of a crisis (Watt and Botsch 1007).
Though the risk can be reduced by lower returns on the domestic deposits, the domestic banks are also faced with the similar situation. The current global financial uncertainty has double effect on the Eurocurrency and the Eurobonds markets.
In addition, hedging companies can go under due to the global financial uncertainty exposing borrowing companies to foreign exchange risks. In essence, the crises in the capital markets have heightened sensitivity to corporate exposure and probable international volatility (Watt and Botsch 1007).
Works Cited Eichengreen, Barry. “Overcoming the Crisis: Financial Re-regulations.” Economic Development Quarterly 14.1 (2011): 15–35. Print.
Kalter, Elio and Allison Holland. “The Global Financial Crisis: Implications for Emerging Capital Markets.” Journal of International Business Studies 18.2 (2008): 145-175. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Global Capital Markets in Crisis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Kregel, Jan. “Is Regulations of the Financial System an Oxymoron?” Management International Review 33.4 (2009): 5-13. Print.
Watt, Andrew and Andreas Botsch. “After the Crisis: Towards a Sustainable Growth Model.” Economic Journal 39.11 (2010): 1005-1016. Print.
Risk Management in the Health Sector Research Paper essay help free
All organizations aim at making profits in the long run. In this regard, efforts are always directed towards the activities that can not only increase income to the organization, but also activities that reduce expenses. However, in doing this the organization comes across various risks that might be detrimental if they are not properly addressed. It is important to note that health organizations are not special as far as risks are concerned.
They are faced with a variety of risks that can negatively impact the organization or its clients. Therefore, health organizations have to choose the risks that they have to take in their endeavors to earn income. More importantly, the organizations need to implement mechanisms that will help in risk avoidance or control. As a result, risk management is an integral part in health care organizations throughout the process of health delivery.
Arguably, the change in technology that has led to changes in the way health services are offered has greatly influenced the risks that health organizations face. It is becoming increasingly difficult to predict the costs that organizations will have to incur whenever they are offering health services because of the increasing number of services that are offered as well as the number of people covered.
On the same note, there has been increase in health care service providers in recent times. This increase in competition within the health care sector has also increased the effects of risks while reducing income margins (Dyro, 2004). Health organizations have to make the decision of either avoiding risks which means reducing their profit margins or taking some risks and increase their chances of making high profits.
The emergence of electronic medical and health records also poses a new challenge to health organizations. Health organizations have to find a way of securing confidentiality of their patient’s health information while at the same time making it available to other authorized parties. It is important to note that electronic health records are susceptible to cyber criminals.
Furthermore, it is important to ensure that patients and employees are safe throughout that process of health services delivery. Unfortunately, health mistakes occur more so due to the improved technology that is currently used in health delivery. Challenges are being witnessed in the efforts of health organization to reduce medical mistakes.
Notably, the health sector is becoming even more fragmented as time goes by. This is in itself a problem because getting other services or information from other professionals is a challenge. Nonetheless, sharing of information is vital in enhancing health care quality. On the same note, policies have been implemented which define certain offences of health care organizations and define the civil and criminal penalties of each activity (Kavaler, 2012).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, not all organizational employees know which activities can be classified as civil or criminal offences. Similarly, health professionals are very scarce and shortage of staff is the order of the day for health organizations yet they are expected to provide services according to the health reforms.
Moreover, operational efficiency has to be ensured yet the organizations are increasing in size. The increasing threats of terrorism as well as the probability of medical malpractice have to be taken into consideration. In a nut shell, the high rate risk dynamism is a risk in itself.
Some people will ask why risk management is such an important issue in health organizations. To begin with, technology has advanced and many people are becoming technologically advanced (Youngberg, 2010). As a result, patient information especially the ones stored electronically can easily find their way to unauthorized hands if care is not taken. Cyber criminals are increasing their activities of hacking into various organizational systems and disrupting important functioning of these organizations.
It is therefore crucial to have information systems security upgraded to avert any such attempt. On the same note, financial crisis has hit various health organizations in recent times. While the health care industry was assumed to be shielded from financial crises by the nature of its formation, increase in the health care cover has opened it to any kind of economic downturns. As a result, it has become important to have financial risks also included in the risk management process (Kavaler
Scientific Approach of Collecting Biological Evidence in Criminal Investigation Essay custom essay help: custom essay help
Forensic science is one of the accurate methods of collecting and analyzing evidence from a scene of a crime. Since courts require substantial evidence, investigators ought to use the most accurate forensic equipments and to follow all the necessary steps. Investigators use different approaches to collect biological evidence at the scene of a crime.
Chisum and Turvey posit, “All biological evidence is subject to deterioration and requires a lot of care” (2000, p. 23). Investigators may collect a number of biological evidence ranging from blood, hair, seminal fluid, to bones and organs. In case the investigators collect blood sample as their evidence, they do it using two five-milliliter tubes. Saferstein alleges, “The blood should be collected in vacutainers with Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) as anti coagulant” (2000, p. 45).
On the other hand, if researchers are to collect a blood sample from a postmortem subject, they ought to “get it from the non-body cavity areas such as heart or chief internal blood vessels” (Saferstein, 2000, p. 46). For easy identification, researchers need to label all blood samples accordingly.
In case the researchers wish to collect liquid semen as their evidence, they use disposable pipettes or clean syringes to put it into disinfected tubes. Otherwise, they may use cotton wool to collect the liquid semen. They can use the cotton wool to absorb the semen, air-dry the content, and utilize it in forensic investigations.
In many cases, scientists use swabs to collect trace samples (Chisum
Democratic Racism in Canada Essay online essay help: online essay help
Despite historical and modern displays of racism as an intractable and pervasive reality in Canadian society, the overt denial of racism is delusionary because it allows Canadian to neglect the abhorrent reality in which a community is divided into white, privileged population and ethnical minorities. Indeed, the country ignores its rich historical background in which a rigid confrontation between the representative of the First Nations people and non-native population was presented.
The Canadian residents and institutions function on the basis of collective denial of the existing racial confrontation, which admits the presence of democratic racism. Canadians have forgotten their racial issues, including laws, practices, and policies that previously shaped their political, social, cultural, and economic institutions for more than three centuries.
The phenomenon of democratic racism will be analyzed through two lenses of social institutions – justice system and police to define how policy respond to the concerns of Aboriginal population and what role individual’s racial identity plays in their actions.
In fact, police officers are law enforcers that should develop an objective, unbiased attitude to all groups residing in Canada, irrespective of their racial affiliation. Nevertheless, racialized practices and beliefs are often implicit to everyone, except to those individuals who face them. The situation appeals to the importance of the dominance of white population, which does not only premise on race, but also on the construction of social identity.
However, victim’s testimonies and unrecognized experiences are still on the current agenda. Recently, a plethora of documentary films has been launched to discover the evidence of inappropriate treatment and give the experiences of the Aboriginal population to publicity. Specifically, the documentary Two World Colliding, centers on the story of Darrel Night, an Aboriginal man, who faced cruelties on the part of the police officers.
The representatives of the police department dumped the man in the outskirts of Saskatoon in January 2000, when the temperature reached 20 º C below zero. However, Mr. Night managed to survive and testify to the cruelties he had to experience. Moreover, the victim was shocked to find out that his case was not unique and there were many other Native people who had been frozen in the barren fields.
In response to unequal treatment, the Aboriginal community decided to resist to a police force and make it be responsible for the deaths of Native Canadian population. Despite the fact that the police officers were accused of improper treatment of Mr. Night, the court found them not guilty. They spent eight months in provincial correctional centre. So, the justice system failed to acknowledge the fact of racism, and therefore, this case is underestimated and biased because of unequal treatment and negligence on the part of official justice bodies.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A significant change in ideology dates back to 90s of the past century, the time when the Canadian government introduced its anti-racism reforms and encouraged funding programs. Apparently, the electing a neoconservative government was considered the most tangible change that occurred in Ontario.
The government was headed by Mike Harris who put an end to racial resistance. These initiatives were spread among other governments, but racial inequality and improper treatment of Aboriginal people is still on the rise in Canada. Biased and prejudiced assumptions are displayed and are apparent, both in the classroom and in the workplace, as it is presented in the film Race is Four Letter Word directed by Sobaz Benjamin.
Specifically, the movie focuses on the skin color as the apparent feature that allow the white population to divide the Canadian community into privileged and inferior strata. The director also highlights conflict and controversies around race by exploring his personal experience as well.
Benjamin steps away from the disguised nature of racial policies in Canada concerning whiteness and blackness and reveals the actual attitude of white people to minorities in cultural and psychological terms. Specifically, the author makes the point about the fact that white people take their identity for granted to dominate over the black community. As a result, such an attitude enhances social racism.
There are many other concerns with the concept of social identity in Canadian society that is specifically connected with the concept of whiteness. At this point, the analysis of the connection between racial issues and the white population is presented to discuss whiteness as an advantage over racial groups.
The patterns of attitudes and immigration policies toward the Canadian minority communities across the country are still predetermined by racial discrimination, leading to unequal treatment of certain groups, including Indigenous and black peoples (Justice System/Policing 2).
In the presentation, it is argued that the justice system fails to provide equal and fair treatment of the Native population because Eurocentric restrictions hamper the delivery of appropriate and acceptable services by health care agencies (Seline 2). As a proof, the movie The Mishuau Innu: Surviving Canada written and directed by Ed Martin provides evidence for extremely low living standards among the Indian population in Canada.
We will write a custom Essay on Democratic Racism in Canada specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The legislature policies reinforce neoliberal practices that put the welfare of racial groups under the threat. Overt discrimination of the Native population is not recognized by the Canadian government, although there are numerous cases of inappropriate consideration of the problems that occurred to the representatives of the minority population.
Although the country is considered as one of the most developed economies in the world, many representatives of indigenous people suffer from social exclusion. However, this inferiority exercised by the white population is denied due to the existence of social democracy.
Widespread resistance to anti-racism policies are presented at various levels, including individuals, communities, organizations, and systems. At the governmental level, the failure to introduce substantive policy against racism leads to even more challenging situation. Multicultural dimensions of legislative policies create a solid framework for consideration racial and cultural diversity and developing a new set of regulation for Canadian community, regardless racial and national affiliation.
Nevertheless, although multicultural awareness refers to the pluralistic nature of the community, there is explicit ambivalence about acknowledgement of other cultures to sustain unique identities and insure the equality of rights among all members of Canadian society.
Although the Canadian government recognizes the problem of racism, the reforms failed to progress because stereotypical beliefs remain unchanged (Justice System/Policing 3). In film project Miss Canadiana by Camille Turner, the focus is made on the Canadian outlook on democratic racism that overtly denies the presence of stereotypes and prejudices.
In conclusion, racism in Canada can be considered as the driving force of misconceptions and conflicts between the Native and Non-native population. It emphasizes the challenges that society faces while espousing such principles as social harmony, equality, tolerance, and respect for human rights.
At the same time, the Canadian community is reluctant to recognize racial prejudice and discrimination, which leads to a failure to develop the corresponding policies. Canadians are deeply committed to the policies and provisions regarding democratic society. However, the democratic principles contradict the recognition of physical differences as the basis for valuing individual rights.
More importantly, those people who face unequal treatment hold responsibility for the existence of racism in society. The controversies between collective and democratic racism shape the underpinning for Canadian racial heritage and, these issues should be considered in terms of the evidence of various forms of resistance to anti-racial policies.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Democratic Racism in Canada by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Works Cited Justice System/Policing. Presentation. n. d. pp. 1-6. Miss Canadiana. Ex. Prod. Camille Turner. Canada: Toronto Film Festival. 2012.
Race is Four Letter Word Ex. Prod. Sobaz Benjamin. Canada: National Film Board of Canada. 2006. DVD.
Seline. Presentation. Section Three. n. d. The Mushuau Innu: Surviving Canada. Ex. Prod. Ed Martin. Canada: Best Boy Productions. 2004. DVD.
Two Words Colliding. Ex. Prod. Tasha Habbard, Canada: National Film Board of Canada. 2005. DVD.
The Age of Hyperspecialization Report college essay help near me
In their article, Thomas Malone, Robert Laubacher and Tammy Johns discuss such a concept as hyperspecialization. This term can be defined as breaking or decomposing the work that is usually performed by a single person into separate elements or pieces. Moreover, these pieces should be done by two or more people.
The authors believe that this approach can greatly increase the performance of many businesses. In my opinion, this question is very important nowadays when business administrators try to find ways of raising the productivity of their firms, especially manufacturers. Moreover, this question can have significant implications for employees who want to find work that suits their interests or expertise.
The discussion presented by the scholars is based on the model of comparative advantage that originates from the ideas of Adam Smith. This theoretical model implies that individuals and groups are more likely to succeed, if they are engaged in the activities in which they are most skilled.
Furthermore, the authors rely on such a concept as the division of labor which means that by dividing the manufacturing process into several short tasks that should be completed by several workers. From their standpoint, the principles of labor division can be applied to many modern companies in which employees do not have an opportunity to display their expertise. These are the main arguments that the scholars put forward and they should not be neglected by managers and executives.
One should take into consideration that the authors of this article do not claim that their idea of hyperspecialization is entirely innovative. As it has been said before, they recognize the influence of Adam Smith on their discussion. Nevertheless, they want to show that many firms can benefit from hyperspecialization.
This issue is particularly relevant at the time when information technologies have become extremely sophisticated. Business administrators can do it by enabling workers to do the jobs that they can do best. They justify their recommendation by investigating the use of this method by different firms.
The authors rely mostly on the qualitative information collected from several companies. Their research technique can be described as a case study. The scholars paid close attention to the opinions of managers who applied the principles of hyperspecialization. Furthermore, they examined the views of clients who used the services of companies in which the principles of hyperspecialization were fully implemented. This approach enabled them to look at this issue from different perspectives.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One should keep in mind that the researchers did not carry out statistical tests which could confirm the relationship between the productivity of a firm and the manufacturing technique that this organization adopted. Moreover, their sample of companies was very limited. This is the main limitation of this research article. Certainly, this drawback does not completely undermine the arguments of the authors. However, it indicates that the findings of these scholars cannot be generalized.
On the whole, the findings presented in the article suggest that hyperspecialization can improve the operational efficiency of businesses because it enables people to focus on those tasks in which they are most competent.
Nevertheless, the scholars acknowledge the drawbacks of this strategy since it can result in the lack of coordination, disappearance of many jobs, and increased supervision of workers. Nevertheless, despite these risks, hyperspecialization can be viewed as one of the techniques that can increase the productivity of many companies.
Definition of Sustainability and Its Underpinnings in Tourism Essay essay help: essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Tourism and Sustainability: Defining the Concept
Sustainability in Tourism: Theories and Implications
Measuring Sustainability in Tourism
Sustainability in Tourism: Application
Introduction Sustainability has become a buzzword in contemporary tourism research and practice. Thousands of businesses claim themselves to be sustainable, because they provide their services without damaging the environment. More often than not, sustainability is understood in the context of environmental protection and community development.
Sustainable tourism is expected to be able to balance its profitability concerns with the needs of communities. Apparently, the tools and resources used to promote sustainable tourism differ considerably across communities and settings.
This paper is a review of the current theoretical and empirical literature related to the topic of sustainable tourism. The main themes to be discussed in this review include: definition of sustainability and its theoretical underpinnings, the problems of measuring sustainability and tourism, as well as the case studies of sustainable tourism presented in literature.
Tourism and Sustainability: Defining the Concept Sustainability is a common topic in contemporary literature. However, its meaning is often taken for granted. Few, if any, researchers discussed the concept of sustainability in detail. Of all articles retrieved in this literature search, only Lansing and De Vries (2007) decided to review the meaning of the sustainability concept, as applied in tourism.
According to Lansing and De Vries (2007), the concept of sustainability in tourism has numerous categorisations and definitions, and this is also why the debate over sustainable tourism remains so fragmented and confusing. Saarinen (2006) supports this view and suggests that the concept of sustainable tourism continues to interest and irritate researchers. Lansing and De Vries (2007) take the definition of the World Tourism Organisation (WTO) as the starting point for their analysis.
This is also the definition, which is to be used in this review of literature: “sustainability principles refer to the environmental, economic and socio-cultural aspects of tourism development, and a suitable balance must be established between these three dimensions to guarantee its long-term sustainability” (Lansing
Nana Children’s Home Essay best essay help
Introduction Organization Description
Nana children home is a non-profit organization with a goal to provide for needy children. They offer God’s love and heal children for the sake of their security, safety and life. The incorporated children in this organization are needy, abused or neglected before the age of eighteen years.
The organization is located at Malabar in Florida. It relies on worldwide well wishers for provision to the children. Consequently, they have extended their reach among the continents including Australia. It relies on various advertisement strategies that facilitate their effect to most countries. Its funds arise from fundraising (40%), businesses/individuals (35%) and churches (25%) (Nana House 2007).
The systems applied by Nana Children’s Home management have been advanced by technology. They are able to reach their donors through websites, social media, newsletters, inquiries, public meeting, television and radio. These factors have facilitated the development of the organization into achieving the goals.
Social media, such as Facebook and Twitter, have managed to create a network that allows contribution from potential donors. Apparently, they have made the system easier to manage and reach many people simultaneously than in the previous times. The trend of advertisement applies high effort behaviour by applying various advertisement strategies.
In fact, if they do not reach their donors, it is probable to close the organization due to lack of funds. Therefore, they spread their operations and request for funding through high effort advertisements. The main issues of advertisement involve funding, parent responsibility to children, seminars and fundraising events.
Their advertisement websites have options for online donations that facilitate worldwide reach. This website has been advertised to other websites for connection purposes. Apart from the social media, the website has integrated with other websites that fight children abuse and neglect. Events are held to talk about and discourage communities from some issues. For instance, on 2nd and 3rd April 2013, the organisation arranged an occasion to pronounce their urge on child abuse prevention.
Analysis Exposure to the Advertisement
There are multidimensional strategies of exposure. The technological methods allow more exposures to many people than the traditional media strategies (Sandhusen 2000). Social sites have made a divergent and explicit interaction with people. Therefore, people are able to get advertisements and information easily.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This may happen through sharing of the website with friends and other people. Another way of exposure is through contextual internet searching. The organization has a formal website with all condition fulfilled. Therefore, the search engines, such as Google and Yahoo, could retrieve the websites when a person is searching. Media advertisement allows people to receive information through hearing on televisions and radios. It is a way that a person could be exposed to the information.
The website has a connection with many other childcare websites and donors’ websites that enhance the chances of encounter. Information moves within and around a targeted community through contact. This could be facilitated when people are talking about this organisation.
Calling is another way that information moves from one person to another and in a wide area. For instance, calls could move information from one person enlightened about the children’s home and reached a person without this knowledge. Consequently, it can be seen clearly that there are reliable methods of spreading information.
Theory of Attraction
It is apparent that a person cannot stay with people s/he does not like or adore (Morrison, 2002). The theory of attraction postulated that people pay attention to those who make them happy (Canham 2005). Otherwise, the theory suggested that people are happy when they are around other individuals who remind them about people they love (Pride